Anda di halaman 1dari 620

ACTROS Operating Instructions

Order no. 6462 0338 02 Part no. 930 584 01 81 EN Edition A, 09/02

A
CT
ORS
Op
e
art
ngi
nsI
t
ucr
ti
nos
Buchrcken (Versalhhe zentrisch)

Thank you for choosing MercedesBenz.


We recommend that you familiarise yourself with the vehicle, its operation and the
driving, control and comfort systems before starting your first journey.
Please ensure that you read the Operating
Instructions before starting your first journey. This will help to avoid endangering
yourself and others.
Since the scope of delivery depends on the
order, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from the equipment actually installed on the vehicle. The Operating
Instructions also describe items of optional equipment, if their operation needs explanation.
Country-specific vehicle equipment, limited availability of optional equipment or varying product designations are possible in
certain countries.

DaimlerChrysler reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and


technical features at any time. You cannot,
therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in these Operating Instructions.
Please consult your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre should you have any questions.
The Operating Instructions, Summary of
control elements, Maintenance Booklet
and equipment-dependent supplements
are an integral part of your vehicle. You
should therefore always keep them in the
vehicle and pass them on to the new owner
if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you pleasant
and safe motoring.

Contents
1

Introduction

The aim of these Operating


Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Protection of the environment . . . . 10
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mercedes-Benz original parts . . . . 11
Correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2

At a glance

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit switch units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function steering wheel . . . . .
Gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent gearshift unit . . . . . . . .
Telligent automatic
gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel switch units,
centre section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
18
20
22
25
26
26
27
28

Driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Co-driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Above windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Berth control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3

29
30
31
32

Getting started

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening with the key . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening using the radio
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the door from
the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock positions . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for a journey . . . . . . . . . .
Checks before starting
a journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . .
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . .
Adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . .
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34
34
35
36
36
37
38
38
40
41
41
44
45
45
46

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the engine has been
started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releasing the parking brake . . . . .
Pulling away and changing gear . . .
Switching on the headlamps . . . . .
Indicating a turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying the parking brake . . . . . .
Stopping Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping Telligent gearshift . . .
Stopping Telligent automatic
gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the door from
the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking with the key . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking using the radio
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49
49
50
52
52
59
60
61
62
62
63
63
63
64
65
65
65

Contents
4

Safety

Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Operation of audio and mobile
communication equipment . . . . . . 73
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . 76
Telligent brake system (BS) . . . . . 77
ABS deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . 87
Telligent stability control (SR) . . . 90
Telligent roll control (WR) . . . . . . 95
Lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reversing warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Folding underride guard . . . . . . . . 100

Controls in detail

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 102


Opening and closing doors . . . . . 102
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Unlocking/locking door using
the "Door lock" switch . . . . . . . . . 104
Opening the door from inside . . . 105
Central locking with anti-theft
alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Enhanced central
locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 109
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 111
Seats and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Upper berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lower berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Starting and stopping
the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ADR emergency-off switch . . . . . . 126
Flame-start system . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Hillholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Headlamp range control . . . . . . . . 133
Switching on the front
foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Light switch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . 137
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adjustable reading lamp . . . . . . . 143
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . 144
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Outside temperature display . . . . 147
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Reservoir pressure for brake
circuits 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Contents
Driver information system . . . . . . .
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver information system
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . .
Event message . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actros Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring info menu . . . . . . . . .
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . .
Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New SMS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Event info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating menu . . . . . . . .
Alarm menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission control back-up
mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
MB item number . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . .

150
151
152
154
156
157
160
161
166
169
169
169
171
175
177
178
182
183
207
207
209
210
213
213

Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear change methods . . . . . . . . .
Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the splitter group . . . . .
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . .
Telligent gearshift . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent gearshift unit . . . . . . . .
Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . .
Construction-site mode . . . . . . . .
Rapid change of direction . . . . . .
Telligent automatic gearshift . . .
Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent automatic
gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214
215
215
216
216
217
218
218
218
219
220
221
222
225
228
229
229
230
231
231
232

Engaging forward gears . . . . . . . .


Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . .
Rapid change of direction . . . . . .
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power take-offs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous brake . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idling speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching between various
driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control (combined
acceleration/braking control) . . .
Telligent distance control
(ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent level control . . . . . . . .

235
236
237
238
239
243
250
251
251
252
253
255
261
265
267
267
269
275
280
290

Contents
Starting-off aid,
three-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hendrickson leading axle . . . . . . .
Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent trailing axle . . . . . . . . .
Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen cleaning platform . . .
Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating/heater air
conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning . . . . . .
Auxiliary air conditioning . . . . . . .
Fresh air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . .

296
297
298
300
302
302
304
305
307
308
315
323
326
327

Open-air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Opening and closing the side
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Opening and closing the sliding/
tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Opening and closing the tilting
roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Opening and closing the roof
hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cab stowage compartments
(interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Cab stowage compartments
(exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Operating audio equipment . . . . . 359

Operation

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368


Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . 370
The first 1,250 miles
(2,000 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Trailer/semitrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer/semitrailer coupling . . . . . 373
Coupling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring . . . 378
Loading platform approach
aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Wind deflector on cab . . . . . . . . . 381
Side wind deflector on the cab . . 384
Tippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tipper operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Contents
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Checking the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Changing the tyre size . . . . . . . . . 391
Tightening wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . 392
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . 397
Caring for the exterior of
your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Caring for the interior
of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Telligent maintenance
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Reconditioned components/
reconditioned parts . . . . . . . . . . . 409
High-pressure grease guns . . . . . 410
Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Maintenance flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Topping up the windscreen washer/
headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 419
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Practical advice

Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Vehicle tool kit and emergency
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
(HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic-pneumatic gearshift
(EPS III S/EPS III SA) . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing
the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine
with the cab tilted . . . . . . . . . . . .

430
430
434
434
437
440
444
448
449
451
453
453
461

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Engine emergency running
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Poly-V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Electromagnetic fan clutch
lock-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . 468
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Transmission control
back-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Teach-in procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Emergency gearshift (NMV) . . . . . 481
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Releasing the spring-loaded parking
brake if there is a failure of charge
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Releasing the spring-loaded
brake with an external source of
compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Contents
Compressed-air system . . . . . . . . . 486
Charging the compressed-air
system via the front coupling
head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Charging the compressed-air
system via the tyre inflator
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Pneumatic suspension . . . . . . . . . . 488
Charging the pneumatic suspension
from an external compressed-air
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Trailing axle, pneumatic . . . . . . . . 489
Nummek trailing axle,
hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Steering system/Telligent
steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . 491
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . 502

Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504


Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Headlamp setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Partially masking headlamps
driving on left/right . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Unlocking and locking in
an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 534
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Closing the tilting sunroof
mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Jump-starting, tow-starting/
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Retrofitting the towing
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Technical data

Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552


Vehicle type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Engine type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Service products and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Service products and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Operating data overview . . . . . . 575
Tyre pressure table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Single tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Twin tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Compressed-air reservoir . . . . . . . . 585
Compressed-air reservoir
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Aluminium tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Steel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Radio type approvals . . . . . . . . . . 589
9

Glossary and index

Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591


Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Editorial office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Introduction
The aim of these Operating Instructions
The aim of these Operating Instructions
These Operating Instructions are intended
to assist you in all situations with your vehicle. Each section has its own print register to help you find the information you
require quickly.
1

Introduction

This section explains the aim of these


Operating Instructions. Details about the
means of representation and the symbols
used will help you to find your way about
quickly.

At a glance

Here you will find an overview of all the


controls you can operate from the driver's
seat.
3

Getting started

Here you will find all the information you


will need when you are driving the vehicle
for the first time. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz
or if you have hired the vehicle.
4

Safety

This section describes all the safety features of the vehicle.

Controls in detail

This is where you will find more detailed information about the equipment in your vehicle. This section expands on the "Getting
started" section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of the vehicle, you
will find this section particularly interesting.
6

2
3
4

Operation

5
Here you will find all the information you
will need when you are driving the vehicle.
7

Practical advice

Here you will find practical help for possible problems.

7
8
9

Introduction
The aim of these Operating Instructions

Technical data

All the important technical data for the

Glossary and index

2 vehicle is listed here.

The glossary of technical terms explains


the most important technical concepts.

The table of contents and the index are


intended to help you find information
quickly.

4
5
6
7
8
9

Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
You will find the following symbols used in
these Operating Instructions:
Warning

A warning draws your attention to possible


risks to safety, the human body, health and
life.

Environmental note

!
This note draws your attention to possible hazards to your vehicle.

i
This tip contains advice or further information you may find useful.

This symbol means that you have to do


something.

A number of these symbols one after


the other indicates a sequence of actions.

page

This symbol indicates the page


on which you will find further information on the subject.

This continuation symbol indicates an interrupted sequence


of actions that will be continued
on the next page.

An environmental note gives you tips on the


protection of the environment.

->

Display

This symbol in the glossary of


technical terms means that the
term following the arrow is also
explained.
Displays in the multi-function
display are printed in this font.

4
5
6
7
8
9

Introduction
Protection of the environment
Protection of the environment

1
2
3
4

Environmental note

DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of


integrated environmental protection. This
policy starts at the root causes and encompasses in its management decisions all the
consequences for the environment which
could arise from production processes or
the products themselves.

As fuel consumption and engine, brake and


tyre wear depend heavily on the style of driving and operating conditions, please bear
the following in mind:

A regularly serviced vehicle contributes to


environmental protection. The driver information system indicates the service due
dates in the multi-function display.

Make sure that the tyre pressures are always correct.

Always have maintenance work carried out


at a qualified specialist workshop.

Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not warm the engine up when the vehicle is stationary.


Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed.

The objectives are for the natural resources


which form the basis for our existence on
this planet to be used sparingly and in a
manner which takes the requirements of
both nature and humanity into account.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally


compatible manner, and you will help to protect the environment.

Switch off the engine in stationary traffic.

8
9

10

Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.

Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Risk of accident

Work incorrectly carried out on electronic


equipment and its software could stop this
equipment working. Since the electronic
systems are networked, this might also affect systems that have not been modified.
Faults in the electronic systems could seriously impair the operational safety of your
vehicle.
Always have maintenance work carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The operating safety can be affected by other, unauthorised work or modifications to
the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz original parts


DaimlerChrysler recommends that you:
Use only Mercedes-Benz original parts and
conversion parts or accessories that have
been expressly approved by MercedesBenz for your type of vehicle.
These parts have been specially tested to
ensure their safety, reliability and suitability.

2
3
4
5

Some of the safety systems only work when


the engine is running. Therefore, do not
switch the engine off when the vehicle is in
motion.

6
7
8
9

11

Introduction
Operating safety

1 So that Mercedes-Benz can vouch for reliability, safety and suitability, the following
should be observed:

2 Do not exchange Mercedes-Benz origi3

nal parts or authorised conversion


parts or accessories for other parts
Do not modify the vehicle in any other
way

4 Only manufacture and assemble con5


6
7
8
9

version parts in accordance with the


Mercedes-Benz Body and Implement
Mounting Directives
Authorisation from Mercedes-Benz
should be sought should there be any
deviation from the Mercedes-Benz
Body and Implement Mounting Directives

!
Acceptance or approval granted by official test centres or the issue of official
permits does not rule out safety risks.

12

i
Further information is available from
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Correct use
Observe the following information when
using your vehicle:
the entire Operating Instructions, safety notes
the "Technical data" section in these
Operating Instructions
national road traffic regulations
national road traffic licensing regulations

Risk of injury

Various warning stickers are attached to


your vehicle. Their purpose is to make you
and others aware of various risks. You
should not, therefore, remove any of these
warning stickers unless expressly instructed
to do so by information on the sticker itself.
If you remove these warning stickers, you or
others may fail to recognise certain risks.
The result of this could be injury to yourself
or others.

At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument panel
Cockpit switch units 1
Multi-function steering wheel
Telligent gearshift unit
Telligent automatic gearshift unit

2
3

Instrument panel switches, centre section


Driver's door 4
Co-driver's door
Above windscreen 5
Berth control panel

6
7
8
9

13

At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

14

At a glance
Cockpit

Function

Page

Function

Page

1 Side sun visor

8 Interior lighting switch unit

31

2 Loudspeaker

9 Telephone bracket with microphone for hands-free


system

350

3 Sun visor
4 Switch unit above windscreen

31

a FleetBoard receiver

251

b FleetBoard monitor

6 Audio equipment/
navigation system

359

c FleetBoard computer

7 Stowage compartments

346

5 Tachograph

Function
e Light switch/
headlamp range control

Page
59

f Combination switch
Turn signals

60

Windscreen wipers

61

Main-beam headlamps

60

Horn

3
4

d Stowage compartments

5
6
7
8
9

15

At a glance
Cockpit

Function
g Instrument panel
Speedometer and trip
meter

144
144

Multi-function display

3
4
5
6

Page

8
9

16

Function
l Heating/air conditioning
control panel

Continuous brake

261

Limiter

269

Airflow

280

Air distribution/
recirculation

265

Temperature

Rev counter

144

Fuel gauge

148

Idling speed governor

Reservoir pressure
display for brake circuits 1 + 2

149

25

Page

j Multi-function lever

Telligent distance
control

h Multi-function steering
wheel

Function

k Cockpit switch units

22

Page
309

At a glance
Cockpit

Function
m Switch unit

Page
252

Transfer case

Function
n Ventilation and heating
vents

Page
307

Function
t Instrument panel switch
units, centre section

On-road selector position

o Lane assist camera

96

u Ashtray

p Driver's door control panel

29

v FleetBoard switch unit

Off-road selector position

q Light switch unit

Differential locks
Inter-axle lock, transfer
case
Cross-axle lock, rear
axle

r Parking brake
253

s Telligent automatic gearshift unit

135
52
231

Telligent gearshift unit

28

2
344

w 12 V socket

357

x Electrical equipment compartment

522

y Co-driver's door control


panel

Driving mode selector


switch

Page

30

220

Cross-axle lock, front


axle

7
8
9

17

At a glance
Instrument panel
Instrument panel

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

18

At a glance
Instrument panel

Function

Page

Function
7

Turn signal indicator


lamp

Page

Function
a

Rev counter with

144

Econometer

145

Instrument panel function buttons


144
159

Tractor vehicle

Clock

148

Reset trip meter

Trailer, semitrailer

147

Indicator lamps

Ambient temperature
display

Acknowledge event
message

STOP lamp

Fuel gauge

148

G Reset button

Speedometer with

Brake circuit 1 and 2


reservoir pressure display with

149

Instrument panel lighting

20
451

Trip meter

144

Total distance
recorder

144

Multi-function display

156

Page

1
2

143

3
4

Brighter

Darker

Brake circuit 1 indicator lamp

Indicator lamps, depending on equipment

20

Brake circuit 2 indicator lamp

Additional indicator
lamps

20

6
7
8
9

19

At a glance
Instrument panel

Indicator lamps

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

20

At a glance
Instrument panel

Function
Turn signal indicator
lamps

Page
60

1 Tractor vehicle, left

b Continuous brake;
Telligent automatic gearshift

3 Trailer/semitrailer, right

Flame-start system

4 Tractor vehicle, right

262

60

Lane assist (SPA)

3
129

Converter and clutch


unit (WSK)

261

7 Parking brake

130

8 STOP lamp

451

Telligent steering
system

9 Tilting cab lock

453

Hillholder

130

Tipper body

385

87, 90

96

6 Continuous brake

a Acceleration skid control


(ASR)/Telligent stability
control (SR)

Page

c Indicator lamps, depending on equipment

2 Trailer/semitrailer, left

5 Main-beam headlamps

Function

5
6
7

Loading tailgate
Auxiliary air-conditioning

323

8
9

21

At a glance
Cockpit switch units
Cockpit switch units

Function
1 Switches ABS on/off

2
3

Page
85

Switches ASR/SR
on/off

87

Switches lane assist


on/off

Function
3 Anti-theft alarm system panic switch

111

96

ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch

126
453

356

Raised travel position

295

Starting-off aid

296
298

Raises/lowers the
trailing axle

Switches the electrohydraulic cab tilt


on/off

Raises/lowers
Nummek axle

299

Switches the 12 V
socket on/off

Telligent steering
system lock

300

2 Controls the heating/air


conditioning

8
9

22

116

Activates the anti-theft


alarm system

Page

307

4 Constant engine
speed
Engages/disengages
power take-off

255
255

At a glance
Cockpit switch units

Function

Page

5 Changes horn to air


horn

Function
6 Switches the air conditioning on/off

Switches the hazard


warning lamps on/off

137

Switches the hillholder


on/off

130

Page

Function

Switches the auxiliary


heating on/off

327

7 Engages/disengages the
transfer case for on-road
or off-road selection

Charges the refrigerant accumulator

324

8 Engages/disengages the
differential locks

Switches the refrigerator on/off

315

309,
316

Page
252

253

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

23

At a glance
Cockpit switch units

Function

2
3
4
5

Switch unit on left of multi-function


steering wheel

Page

1 Switches the work-area


lamp on/off

135

2 Switches the load compartment light on/off

135

3 Switches the rotating beacon lamp on/off

136

4 Cleans the headlamps

136

i
The layout of the switches can differ
depending on the vehicle equipment
level.

6
7
8
9

24

At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel
Multi-function steering wheel
1

FIS navigation buttons


FIS navigation
Forwards
Back
Navigation within a menu

Audio/telephone buttons
Adjusting volume of active
audio source e.g. telephone,
audio equipment or navigating within a menu list or making a selection.

j Forwards

Up/increases the volume

k Back

Down/decreases the volume

1
2
3
4

Making a telephone call


Accepts a telephone call/
direct entry into Redial list

Hangs up/direct entry into

Telephone menu

7
8
9

25

At a glance
Gearshift unit
Gearshift unit

Telligent gearshift unit

2
3

Function button

Gear lever

Neutral button

Half-gear rocker switch

Telligent gearshift ( page 220)

4
5

Gearshift unit

6
7
8
9

26

At a glance
Gearshift unit
Telligent automatic gearshift unit

Function button

Gear lever

Neutral button

Half-gear rocker switch

Driving mode selector switch

1
2
3

Telligent automatic gearshift


( page 231)

4
5

Gearshift unit

6
7
8
9

27

At a glance
Instrument panel switch units, centre section
Instrument panel switch units, centre section

1
1

Function

Switches the heated windscreen on/off

The layout of the switches can differ


depending on the vehicle equipment
level.

Switches the battery heating


on/off

Switches the loading tailgate


on/off
2

FleetBoard emergency call


Sends FleetBoard service
info

Sends FleetBoard message


to vehicle pool

User-definable FleetBoard
function

7
8
9

28

At a glance
Driver's door
Driver's door
Function

Page

1 Adjusts the airflow

307

2 Adjusts the airflow direction

307

3 Heated exterior mirrors indicator lamp

302

4 Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off

302

5 Adjusts the exterior mirrors

302

6 Selects the left-hand exterior mirror

302

7 Selects the right-hand exterior mirror

302

8 Locks the doors

104

9 Unlocks the doors

104

a Opens/closes the driver's


door window

338

b Opens/closes the codriver's door window

338

c Opens the door

105

2
3
4
5

8
9

29

At a glance
Co-driver's door
Co-driver's door

Function

Page

1 Adjusts the airflow direction

307

2 Adjusts the airflow

307

3 Unlocks the doors

104

4 Locks the doors

104

5 Switches the co-driver's


reading lamp on/off

140

6 Opens/closes the codriver's door window

338

7 Switches the interior lighting on/off

138

8 Opens the door

105

2
3

6
7
8
9

30

At a glance
Above windscreen
Above windscreen
Function

Page

1 Opens/closes the lefthand sun blind

Function
4 Audio equipment
5 Tachograph

Opens/closes the
right-hand sun blind

Page
73
251

Activates/deactivates
the sliding/tilting sunroof lock

341

Opens/closes the
sliding/tilting sunroof

340

The layout of the switches can differ


depending on the vehicle equipment
level.

2
3
4
5

2 Stowage space, installation space for CB radio


3 Switches the interior
lighting on/off

138

Switches the driver's


reading lamp on/off

140

Switches the nightlight


on/off

141

Switches the ambient


lighting on/off

142

8
9

31

At a glance
Berth control panel
Berth control panel

Function

Page

1 Berth reading lamp

138

2 Switches the auxiliary


heating on/off

327

Audio equipment

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

32

3 Press briefly: Increases


the volume
Press and hold: Function
parallel with function on
audio equipment see the
manufacturer's operating
instructions

359

4 Press briefly: Decreases


the volume
Press and hold: Audio
equipment ON/OFF

359

Function

Page

5 Opens the sliding/tilting


sunroof

340

6 Closes the sliding/tilting


sunroof

340

7 Switches the interior lighting on/off

138

8 Switches the interior lighting off centrally

138

9 Switches the auxiliary air


conditioning on/off

323

Getting started
Opening
Preparing for a journey
Adjusting 1
Driving
Parking and closing

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

33

Getting started
Opening
Opening

1 The "Getting started" section contains


2
3

summarised information. This information


refers not only to the basic functions of the
vehicle but also to the steps that need to
be followed before starting a journey. You
should read this section in particular if this
is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle.

Opening with the key

Unlocking
Only the driver's and the co-driver's
doors can be unlocked with the key.

4
5

Left-hand door

1 To unlock
2 To lock

6
7
8
9

34

Getting started
Opening
Unlocking the driver's door

Opening using the radio remote


control
The radio remote control will work regardless of the direction in which it is pointed.

The turn signals flash once.

It is also possible to unlock the vehicle


from some distance. To prevent theft, the
radio remote control should only be used
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
The radio remote control unlocks the driver's door first and then the co-driver's
door.

Press the button once.

Radio remote control

1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button
Press and hold the locking/unlocking
button for approximately one second.

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:


The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's


doors

Press the button twice.

The turn signals flash once.


Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

6
7
8
9

35

Getting started
Opening

1
2
3

Getting in and out of the vehicle

Pull the door handle on the outside to


open the door.

Lower the driver's suspension seat


completely ( page 43).

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 102).

Swing the armrest up.

Do not use the seat armrest as a grab


handle. It is not designed to support
such a load.

Opening the door from the outside

Entrance

Risk of injury

There can be no guarantee that you can get


in and out of the vehicle safely if the grab
handles and the steps are not used. Do not
jump out of the cab.

5
6

There is a risk of slipping if the steps are not


kept clean.

7
8
9

Use the grab handles and steps provided.

Entrance (example)

1 Grab handles

36

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 102).

Getting started
Opening

Ignition lock positions

Risk of accident

Under no circumstances should the ignition


lock be turned to position 0 when the vehicle is in motion. The ignition lock locks the
steering and the vehicle can no longer be
steered.

0 To insert or remove the key, to lock


the steering

1 To unlock the steering

Some consumers are operational


2 Drive position

3 To start the engine

Always remove the key from the ignition


lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you
are only leaving for a short time. Children or
unauthorised persons could otherwise start
the engine and set the vehicle in motion.

4
5
6
7
8
9

37

Getting started
Preparing for a journey
Preparing for a journey

Checks before starting a journey

Vehicle exterior
Page

Driver's vehicle checks

2 Inspect the vehicle outside and inside


before starting a journey.

3 Rectify identified faults before starting

Risk of fire and accident

Tyres and wheels

40

damages or destroys the tyres


causes the tyres to overheat until they
ignite

Check tyre pressures regularly before starting a journey and correct as necessary.

Check tyres for foreign objects and for damage before starting a journey.

38

Cab tilt lock


Steering wheel play

390

Semitrailer coupling1
Trailer coupling1

Insufficient tyre pressure


jeopardises operating safety

Check function of lighting,


turn signals and brake lamps

Page

Secure fastening of side trim


and quick-release locks

a journey.

Vehicle interior

1 Observe the operating instructions issued by the


manufacturer

Disc inserted in tachograph

453
51
251

Getting started
Preparing for a journey
Emergency equipment/first-aid kit

First-aid

Breakdown equipment

The first-aid kit and breakdown equipment


can be found in the cab or in the exterior
stowage compartments ( page 430).

First-aid equipment:

Special tools in the vehicle tool bag and


vehicle document wallet

Check that the equipment can be accessed easily, and that it is complete
and intact.

First-aid kit
Warning triangle
Fire extinguisher
Warning lamp
Reflective safety jacket

Jack
Wheel wrench

2
3

Chocks
Tyre inflator hose

Have the fire extinguisher refilled after


every use.

Check at regular intervals that the firstaid kit is complete and usable.

Note the use-by dates of the contents.


Have the fire extinguisher checked
every 1 to 2 years. Otherwise it could
fail in an emergency.

7
8
9

39

Getting started
Preparing for a journey

1 Trailer/semitrailer coupling
2
3

Before starting the engine

The trailer or semitrailer coupling is one of


the vehicle components which is particularly important to road safety. Please comply with the manufacturer's operating
instructions with regard to operation, care
and maintenance.

Fuel level
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Check the fuel level in the
fuel gauge. If necessary, refuel the
vehicle.

Further notes ( page 373).

4
Risk of accident

5
6
7

There should be no longitudinal play in the


trailer coupling. Otherwise there is a danger
of the trailer breaking free. Check the trailer
coupling daily for longitudinal play by moving the towbar firmly backwards and forwards. Do not hold the coupling jaws when
doing this. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it rectified immediately.

8
9

40

Vehicle check using the driver information system (FIS)


Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Vehicles with Telligent automatic
gearshift: The FIS shows the selected
mode of operation auto or man.
( page 232) in the multi-function display.
Any faults will be indicated in the multifunction display by means of an event
message ( page 156).

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to acknowledge the event message
( page 159).
Rectify the faults indicated.
Vehicle lighting, turn signals and brake
lamps
Following the function check, the driver information system checks the function of
the exterior lighting bulbs.
Check exterior lighting for cleanliness
and damage.
Rectify identified faults before starting
a journey.

Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seat
Adjusting the driver's suspension seat
(example)

1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment


2 Seat cushion forwards/backwards
3 n Vertical seat suspension
4 = Seat cushion angle
5 Seat height
6 o Seat lowering, easy-exit feature

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Pull adjusting bar 1 upwards.


Slide the seat forwards or backwards.
Adjust the distance to the pedals so
that you can depress them fully.
Release adjusting bar and engage it audibly.

2
3
4

7 Backrest
8 Armrest

5
6
7
8
9

41

Getting started
Adjusting

1 Seat cushion
Pull adjusting handle 2 upwards.

2 Slide seat cushion forwards or backwards.

3
4

Release the adjusting handle and engage it audibly.

Seat height

The seat suspension adjustment is infinitely adjustable.

Pull lever 5 up,

Adjust the seat suspension so that it


does not bottom out, even on poor road
surfaces.

Push lever 5 down,

Vertical seat suspension

Seat cushion angle

Pull lever 3 up to select a softer suspension setting.

Pull lever 4 up,

5 Push lever 3 down to select a harder


suspension setting.

adjust the seat by leaning backwards


or forwards on the seat cushion or
backrest,
release the lever.

6
7
8
9

42

the seat is raised.

the seat lowers.

i
The seat height is infinitely adjustable.

Getting started
Adjusting
Seat lowering, easy-exit feature

Backrest

Armrest

Pull lever 7 up.

Turn rotary button 8 beneath the armrest,

The backrest is pushed forwards in the


normal direction of travel under spring
loading.
Adjust the backrest by leaning backwards or forwards on the backrest
infinitely adjustable.

the armrest rises/lowers.


Further information can be found in the
"Controls in detail" section
( page 118).

2
3
4

Release the lever.

The backrest is infinitely adjustable.

6
Push lever 6 down, the seat will
lower.

Pull lever 6 up, the seat will return to


the stored height setting.

8
9

43

Getting started
Adjusting

1
2

Adjusting the steering wheel


You can adjust the height and angle of the
steering column.

Risk of accident

An unlocked steering column could cause


you to lose control of the vehicle.

Adjust the steering column only when


the vehicle is stationary and the parking
brake is applied.

Do not unlock the steering column when


the vehicle is in motion.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied:

Press the lower section of the steering


column lock switch.
The steering column is released.

7
1 Steering column lock switch

8
9

44

Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.


Press the upper section of the steering
column lock switch.
The steering column locks.

i
If the steering column is unlocked, it
will relock itself automatically after
ten seconds.

Getting started
Adjusting

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied:
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Select the exterior mirror you wish to
adjust by pressing button 1 or 2.
Adjust the exterior mirror by pressing
button 3.

Tachograph

i
A correctly filled out disc must always
be inserted in the tachograph for any
journey ( page 251). Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

2
3
4

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 302)

5
6
1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror
2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror
3 To adjust the exterior mirrors

7
8
9

45

Getting started
Adjusting

1
2
3
4
5
6

Wearing seat belts


Ensure that all occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly for every journey.
Risk of accident

An incorrectly worn seat belt will not provide


the necessary degree of protection and
could even cause injury. For this reason,
make sure that all occupants, especially
pregnant women, wear their seat belts correctly for every trip. Always fasten your seat
belt before starting the vehicle. Airbags and
belt tensioners will only be able to perform
their protective function if the occupants are
wearing their seat belts properly.

7
8
9

46

Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear


the seat belt properly. They therefore require additional restraint systems for protection in an accident.
Under no circumstances should the seat
belts be modified. They will not be able to
function as intended.

i
The legal requirements for the use of
seat belts and restraint systems should
be observed at all times.

1 Belt tongue
2 Buckle
3 Release button

Getting started
Adjusting
Wearing seat belts correctly
Pull the belt smoothly from the seat
belt reel and route it over the shoulder.
Do not twist the belt when fastening.

Click belt tongue 1 into buckle 2 (it


must audibly engage).
Adjust the backrest to an almost vertical position.

Pass the belt over the middle of the


shoulder.

Check the seat belt during the journey


to ensure that it is still correctly routed.

The belt must not pass around the neck


or under the arm.

Releasing the seat belt

If necessary, pull the belt upwards in


front of the chest so that it rests tightly
against the chest.
The belt must cross over the hips as
low down as possible, i.e. over the hip
joint and not across the abdomen.

Press release button 3 in buckle.


Guide belt tongue 1 back to its out-ofuse position.

Risk of injury

Only one person should use each seat belt


at any one time.

Do not use seat belts to secure both objects


and persons.

The seat belt should always pass closely


over the body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing.

Under no circumstances should the seat


belts be modified. They might no longer
function correctly.

Seat belt warning system

Optional extra
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

A warning buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds if the driver's seat
belt is not engaged.

8
9

47

Getting started
Adjusting

1
2

Risk of injury

Replace the following items


seat belts

3
4
5
6

belt tensioners
airbags
if these have been subjected to a load in an
accident. The restraint systems should be
checked and replaced if necessary if they
have been subjected to a load or damaged
in an accident.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

7
8
9

48

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 68).

Getting started
Driving
Driving
Starting the engine
The starter inhibitor prevents the engine
from being started if a gear is selected and
the clutch pedal not fully depressed.

Shift the transmission to neutral.


Vehicles with Telligent gearshift or
Telligent automatic gearshift: The
transmission neutral position N must be
shown in the multi-function display.
Disengage power take-off.
The J power take-off display or the
c tipper body indicator lamp must
not light up.
Vehicles with flame-start system: Wait
until the q indicator lamp goes out
( page 129).

Transmission neutral position N

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and wait at least one second
until the immobiliser is deactivated.

Without depressing the accelerator


pedal, turn the key to position 3 and
hold it in this position until the engine
starts.

Do not drive off straight away. Leave


the engine to idle for a short time until
sufficient oil pressure has built up. This
prevents wear and potential damage to
the engine.

Quickly warm up the engine by driving


in the middle range of the engine
speed. Observe the green section in
the rev counter as you do this.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine will reach its operating
temperature after approximately
10 20 minutes. The engine's full power output becomes available once the
operating temperature has been
reached.

Release the key when the engine has


started.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

49

Getting started
Driving

Vehicles with hot-water auxiliary heating: At ambient temperatures below


20 C, pre-heat the engine before
starting ( page 327).

3 Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 125).

After the engine has been started


Reservoir pressure in the compressedair system
There must be sufficient reservoir pressure
in the following pressure circuits before a
journey is started:
in brake circuit 1 or 2 3 the event
message with red status display must
go out

in the spring actuator pressure circuit


the ! indicator lamp in the instrument panel must go out

in the auxiliary consumers circuit


the event message with yellow status
display must go out

7
8
9

50

Event messages in the multi-function display indicate insufficient reservoir pressures. At the same time the STOP lamp will
light up.
Risk of accident

If the reservoir pressure in the compressedair system is too low it will not be possible to
brake the vehicle or to change gear. The operating reliability and road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised. Do not start off until
the reservoir pressures have been reached
and the STOP lamp goes out.

Getting started
Driving
Checking steering wheel play
With the engine running
turn the front wheels to the straightahead position.
Turn the steering wheel to left and
right. The front wheels must begin to
move when the steering wheel is
turned by not more than 30 mm
(1.2 in), measured at the steering
wheel rim.
If this is not the case, have the steering
and steering linkage checked immediately.

Risk of accident

If the steering wheel play is greater than


30 mm, the vehicle can no longer safely
maintain a straight line. The direction of
travel will need to be corrected continually.
The operating reliability and road safety of
the vehicle are jeopardised. Have the steering system inspected.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Cab tilt lock

The cab tilt lock indicator lamp in the


instrument panel must go out once the engine has been started.

If the indicator lamp does not go out:


Tilt the cab back to the driving position
( page 453).
Risk of accident

An unlocked cab could tilt forwards if the vehicle is braked sharply. Only start off once
the cab is tilted fully back and locked in this
position.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

51

Getting started
Driving

Releasing the parking brake

The ! parking brake indicator lamp


in the instrument panel will go out.

i
If the reservoir pressure in the parking
brake circuit is too low and the engine
cannot be started to charge the reservoirs, it is possible to release the
parking brake mechanically or pneumatically ( page 483).

3
4
5 1 Brake fully applied, lever engaged
6
7
8

Move the lever to release position 3.

2 To raise the lever


3 Released position
If necessary, wait until sufficient reservoir pressure has built up in the brake
circuits and the STOP lamp has gone
out.
Raise parking brake lever 2 out of fully
applied position 1.

52

Pulling away and changing gear


Risk of accident

The movement of the pedals must not be obstructed.


If floormats and carpets are fitted, ensure these are secured correctly and
cannot slip and that there is sufficient
pedal clearance.
Do not place any loose objects in the
driver's footwell. Such objects could interfere with the pedals in the event of
sudden acceleration or braking manoeuvres. The objects could block the pedals
and it might be impossible to brake, depress the clutch or accelerate.
Store all loose objects or secure them
so they cannot get into the driver's footwell during a journey.

Getting started
Driving

Do not start off if:


the reservoir pressure in brake circuit 1
or 2 3 is below 6.8 bar (event message with red status indicator)
the auxiliary consumer reservoir
pressure is too low (event message with yellow status indicator)
there is insufficient oil pressure
the STOP lamp is lit.
on vehicles with pneumatic suspension:
the chassis frame is not in the
drive
position.

Brake circuit 1 and 2 reservoir pressure display

1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 1


2 Brake circuit indicator lamp 2

Do not drive off straight away. Leave


engine to idle for a short time until sufficient oil pressure has built up. This
prevents wear and potential damage to
the engine.

2
3

Quickly warm up the engine by driving


in the middle range of the engine
4
speed. Observe the green section in
the rev counter as you do this.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine will reach its operating 5
temperature after approximately
10 20 minutes. The engine's full pow6
er output becomes available once the
operating temperature has been

reached.

7
8
9

53

Getting started
Driving

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

If the warning signal sounds when shifting to a lower gear, do not engage the
clutch but select a higher gear instead.
There is a risk of engine damage from
overrevving.

Pulling away Hydro-pneumatic


gearshift

If the vehicle is driven at too high or too


low an engine speed, the engine will be
damaged.

Depress the clutch pedal.

Do not rely on hearing to judge


when to change gear. Observe the
green range in the rev counter.
Avoid the red range in the rev counter.
Under no circumstances should the
engine speed exceed 2,500 rpm
when the continuous brake is in operation.

8
9

54

DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away


in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and
gradient.
Move the gear lever to the desired
gear, but without using force.
Release the parking brake.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.
Immediately after pulling away, test the
service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do
this.
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to
the left or right and that it slows down
in a controlled manner.

Risk of accident

If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once
(road and traffic conditions permitting).

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 216).

Getting started
Driving
Changing gear Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift

!
A warning signal heard when changing
down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, do not engage the clutch. Select
the next highest gear instead. There is
a risk of engine damage.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Apply slightly increased pressure on
the gear lever to overcome the lock between the gear ranges.

Move the gear lever to the desired


gear, but without using force.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

i
To change between gear ranges L and
H, e.g. when changing from 4th to
5th gear, the clutch pedal must remain
depressed.

Pulling away Telligent gearshift

If you wish to pull away from stationary in


transmission neutral position N, the
Telligent gearshift will only permit selection of the 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.
Risk of accident

If the clutch pedal is released before a gear


is selected, the transmission remains in neutral.
Depress the clutch pedal again within two
seconds and wait until the gear is selected.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

55

Getting started
Driving
Wait until the selected gear is engaged.

A selection sound is heard over the


central loudspeaker.

The gear engaged flashes briefly on the


left in the gear indicator.

Release the parking brake.

Slowly release the clutch pedal and


slowly depress the accelerator.
Immediately after pulling away, test the
service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do
this.

5
6 Depress the clutch pedal.
7
8

Press and hold down function button


1 and push gear lever forwards 2 until a resistance can be felt and hold in
this position.
The selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator.

56

Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to


the left or right and that it slows down
in a controlled manner.
Risk of accident

If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once
(road and traffic conditions permitting).

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 218).

Getting started
Driving
Changing gear Telligent gearshift

Guide the gear lever in the direction of


gear engagement until a resistance can
be felt.

Pulling away Telligent automatic


gearshift

The optimum gear selected by the


Telligent system flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator.

Wait until the selected gear is engaged.


A selection sound is heard in the central loudspeaker.

The gear engaged flashes briefly on the


left in the gear indicator.
Release the gear lever.

1 To shift up
2 To shift down
Depress the clutch pedal.

Slowly release the clutch pedal and


slowly depress the accelerator.

1 Driving mode selector switch


M Manual mode

A Automatic mode
Press automatic mode A on the driving
mode selector switch.

The driver information system shows

auto in the multi-function display.

57

Getting started
Driving
Press function button 1.

Push gear lever 2 forwards.


Telligent automatic gearshift engages
a suitable gear.
The selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator and then
changes to the left position.

2
3

Release the parking brake and slowly


depress the accelerator.

The vehicle pulls away.

5
6

If a gear is selected when the auxiliary


consumer reservoir pressure is
too low, a system fault will result. The
engine must be stopped and restarted.

8
9

58

Immediately after pulling away, test the


service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do
this.
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to
the left or right and that it slows down
in a controlled manner.

Risk of accident

If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once
(road and traffic conditions permitting).

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 218).

Getting started
Driving
Changing gear
Risk of accident

Accelerating

If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm,


Telligent automatic gearshift will switch
off. This could lead to critical driving situations when driving up or downhill. Do not let
the engine speed drop below 550 rpm.

Switching on the headlamps

Depress the accelerator pedal.


When the maximum speed is reached
for the driving situation and the gear
engaged, Telligent automatic gearshift selects the next highest optimum
gear.

2
3
4

Decelerating
Release the accelerator pedal.
Slowly depress the brake pedal.

Telligent automatic gearshift changes


down to the optimum gear.

Light switch
M Lights off

B Dipped-beam headlamps on
Turn the light switch to B.
Further information can be found in the
"Controls in detail" section ( page 132).

7
8
9

59

Getting started
Driving

1 Main-beam headlamps
Switch on the lights.

2 Push the combination switch on the left


3
4

Indicating a turn
The combination switch can be found on
the left of the steering column.

Indicating a right turn


Engage combination switch in
position 1.

of the steering column forwards and


engage.

The / right turn signal indicator


lamp flashes in the instrument panel.

The A main-beam headlamps indicator lamp lights up in the instrument


panel.

If a trailer is attached, the right-hand


( trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp
also flashes.
Indicating a left turn
Engage combination switch in
position 2.

5
Combination switch

1 To indicate a right turn


2 To indicate a left turn

The & left turn signal indicator lamp


flashes in the instrument panel.
If a trailer is attached, the left-hand
) trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp

also flashes.

8
9

60

Getting started
Driving

Windscreen wipers
The combination switch can be found on
the left of the steering column.

Single wipe

Check at regular intervals that the wiper blades are clean and undamaged.

Turn the rotary switch briefly towards


the steering column up to the pressure
point.

The windscreen wiper wipes once without windscreen washer fluid.

Switching the windscreen wipers on


Turn rotary switch to the required position depending on the intensity of the
rain.
Windscreen wipers off
5 Intermittent wipe
Normal wipe
To switch the windscreen wipers on/off

Rapid wipe
Windscreen washer system

Wiping with windscreen washer fluid


Turn the rotary switch to the stop towards the steering column and hold in
this position.

4
5

Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the


windscreen as long as the rotary switch
is in the rearmost position.

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 304).

7
8
9

61

Getting started
Parking and closing
Parking and closing

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Press lever downwards, swing into test


position 3 and hold.

Applying the parking brake


Risk of accident

The braking efficiency of the parking brake


may not be sufficient on uphill or downhill
gradients to prevent the laden vehicle from
rolling away. In the test position, check
whether the braking force of the spring actuators is adequate to hold the vehicle. If necessary, the vehicle's wheels should be
chocked as an additional safety measure.
The vehicle could start moving spontaneously. Always check that the lever has engaged correctly in the fully applied position,
or else it may move back automatically to
the released position.

8
9

62

The vehicle must not move. If the braking force of the spring actuators on the
towing vehicle is not sufficient to hold
the vehicle, chock the wheels as an additional safety measure.

1 Released position
2 Fully-applied position
3 Test position
Swing lever out of released position 1
to fully-applied position 2.

Allow lever to swing back from test position 3 to fully-applied position 2


and engage in this position.
The ! parking brake indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.

Getting started
Parking and closing

Stopping Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift
Brake the vehicle.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Hold the vehicle using the service
brake or the parking brake
( see page 62).
Release the clutch pedal.

i
When the transmission is in neutral, the
gear lever is in the gate between 3rd
and 4th gear, or between 5th and
6th gear.

Stopping Telligent gearshift


Brake the vehicle.
If necessary, change down a gear.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
Press neutral button on gear lever.
N flashes on the right in the gear indica-

tor.
Telligent gearshift engages neutral.
Hold the vehicle using the service
brake or the parking brake
( see page 62).
Release the clutch pedal.

Stopping Telligent automatic


gearshift
Risk of accident

The vehicle could roll away with the engine


running and a gear engaged. Telligent automatic gearshift disengages automatically
when the idle speed is reached.

3
4

Always hold the vehicle using the service


brake or the parking brake when you stop.

5
Brake the vehicle.
Telligent automatic gearshift disengages automatically just before the idle
speed is reached.

6
7

Automatic mode (A):


When the vehicle is stationary, a pullaway gear is selected.

63

Getting started
Parking and closing

i
Manual mode (M):

When the vehicle is stationary, the selected gear remains engaged.

3 Stopping the engine Telligent automatic gearshift

Risk of accident

A parked vehicle could roll away as the


Telligent automatic gearshift always engages neutral position once the engine has
been switched off. You cannot park the vehicle with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle using the parking brake.

Stopping the engine


Leave engine running for approximately one to two minutes at idle if
the coolant temperature is above
95 C
it had been run at maximum output,
e.g. uphill.
Release the accelerator pedal.

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the transmission into neutral.

Apply the parking brake


( see page 62).

Turn the key back to position 0 in the


ignition lock.

Press neutral button 1 on the gear lever.

Further information can be found in the


"Controls in detail" section ( page 250).

N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.

Telligent gearshift engages neutral.


Switch off the engine.

8
9

64

Getting started
Parking and closing

Opening the door from the inside

Locking with the key

Locking using the radio remote


control
The radio remote control will work regardless of the direction in which it is pointed.
It is also possible to unlock the vehicle
from some distance. To avoid theft, the radio remote control should only be used in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Left-hand door

Pull interior door handle 1 to open


door

1 To unlock
2 To lock

A locked door can always be opened


from the inside using the interior door
handle.

The driver's and co-driver's door always lock simultaneously.

3
4

The radio remote control


1 Interior door handle

Locks the driver's and co-driver's door


centrally
Locks the side windows automatically
on vehicles with enhanced central locking system

5
6

Locks the sliding/tilting sunroof auto7


matically on vehicles with enhanced
central locking system, depending on

the position of the lock switch

8
9

65

Getting started
Parking and closing

1 Activates/deactivates the anti-theft


alarm system.

Press locking button 1 for approximately one second.


The driver's and co-driver's door will
lock.

Opened side windows close automatically.

The turn signals will flash 3 times.

The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, depending on the position of


the lock switch.

3
Risk of injury

Radio remote control

Take care when closing the power windows


and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody
becomes trapped in them.

5
1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button

Always remove the key from the ignition


lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you
are only leaving for a short time. Children or
unauthorised persons could otherwise start
the vehicle.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could open a locked door from
the inside and endanger themselves and
others.

8
9

66

Vehicles with enhanced central locking


system:

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:


The anti-theft alarm system is activated.

i
Turn signals only flash if the locking
procedure is successful.
Further information can be found in the
"Controls in detail" section ( page 102).

Safety
Occupant safety
General
Driving safety systems 1
Underride guard

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

67

Safety
Occupant safety
Occupant safety

Restraint systems

This section describes the most important


aspects of the restraint systems of the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle equipment level,


the restraint systems consist of:
seat belts

4 belt tensioners
airbag

5 Seat belts, belt tensioners and the airbag


6
7
8

are supplementary restraint systems


whose protective functions complement
one another.
Always fasten your seat belt before starting off. Airbags and belt tensioners will
only be able to perform their protective
function if the occupants are wearing their
seat belts properly.

68

Replace the following items

The driver's airbag and belt tensioners


are always installed together in a vehicle.

seat belts
belt tensioners
airbags

Risk of injury

Do not modify components of the restraint


systems or interfere with restraint system
wiring. The belt tensioners or airbag could
be triggered accidentally or fail to function
and therefore no longer protect in the event
of an accident.

if these have been subjected to a load in an


accident. The restraint systems should be
checked and replaced if necessary if they
have been subjected to a load or damaged
in an accident.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Safety
Occupant safety
Seat belt

Wearing seat belts is a legal requirement in


many countries observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

The locking action of the inertia reel can


be checked by pulling sharply on the
belt.

Regardless of such requirements, all occupants should wear a seat belt for every
journey.
Information about wearing seat belts can
be found in the "Getting started" section
( page 46).
This information applies only to seat belts
fitted at the plant in which the vehicle was
manufactured.
Inertia reel How it works
The inertia reel will prevent the belt strap
from being pulled out further if
the vehicle is decelerated suddenly in
any direction and
if the belt is pulled out sharply

Seat belt warning system


Optional extra
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
A warning buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds if the driver's seat
belt is not engaged.

Seat belts which have been subjected to a


heavy load in an accident must be replaced.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

1
2

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

3
4
5

Always fasten your seat belt before starting


off. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be
able to perform their protective function if
the occupants are wearing their seat belts
properly.

Risk of injury

8
9

69

Safety
Occupant safety

1 Belt tensioners
2

In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens


the belt to pull it close to the body thus optimising the protective function of the seat
belt.

3
Risk of injury

4
5
6
7

Damage or accident-related stress to the restraint system (seat belt, anchor points, belt
tensioner or airbag) may mean that the system will not be able to provide the protection for the occupants. For this reason,
damage or accident-related stress to restraint systems should be inspected immediately at a qualified specialist workshop
and, if necessary, the system should be replaced.

8
9

70

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver's airbag
The airbag offers additional protection
against injury and complements the protective functions of the belt tensioner and
seat belt.
The airbag is located beneath the padded
boss of the steering wheel.
Risk of injury

Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able


to perform their protective function effectively if the occupants are wearing their seat
belts properly and are sitting properly.
Because the airbag inflates in a matter of
milliseconds, there is a risk of serious injury
or death.

Safety
Occupant safety

Risk of injury

To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury


caused by inflation of the airbag in milliseconds, observe the following:
Choose a seat position that allows you
to sit as far back from the airbag as possible, but still allows you to drive the vehicle safely.
Only hold the steering wheel by the rim.
Do not lean over the padded boss of the
steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion or when the key is in position 2
in the ignition lock. This allows the airbag to inflate fully.
Do not cover the padded boss of the
steering wheel or affix badges or stickers to it. Otherwise correct functioning
of the airbag cannot be guaranteed.

Because the airbag inflates in a matter


of milliseconds, there is a high risk of injury.
Severe injuries could be caused by being very near the point where the airbag
is triggered.
Do not touch any parts of the airbag
once it has been triggered. Parts of the
airbag could be hot.
Correct operation of the airbag module is no
longer guaranteed after 15 years of service.
For safety reasons, the airbag module
should be replaced after 15 years at the latest.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you sell the vehicle, you should pass the
Operating Instructions on to the new owner.
The buyer or others would otherwise not be
aware of and be able to reduce the risks of
injury.

1
2
3
4
5
6

The maintenance work should always be


carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

7
8
9

71

Safety
Occupant safety

1 Function of airbag and belt tensioner


2

The airbag and belt tensioners are only operational once the key has been turned to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
The airbag and belt tensioners will be trig-

3 gered from a certain degree of vehicle deceleration, e.g. in a frontal collision.


The seat belt will tension automatically so

4 that the strap is close to the body.


5
6

i
Although smoke is released, this neither
constitutes a health hazard nor implies
that fire has broken out in the vehicle.

7
8
9

72

Risk of injury

To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury


caused by inflation of the airbag in milliseconds, observe the following:
Choose a seat position that allows you
to sit a far back from the airbag as possible, but still allows you to drive the vehicle safely.
Ensure that small children are kept away
from the airbag inflation point as serious
or fatal injuries could otherwise result.

Safety
General
General
Navigation system
Risk of accident

Operation of audio and mobile


communication equipment

Stop the vehicle to enter data into the navigation system. Attention would otherwise
be drawn away from the traffic.
The navigation system is unable to take account of the load-bearing capacity of bridges or the permissible headroom in tunnels or
under bridges. The driver is responsible for
ensuring that bridge load-bearing capacities
and maximum headroom capacities are not
exceeded.

e.g. telephone, two-way radio, fax machine, etc.


Risk of accident

Operate the audio or mobile communication


equipment only when road and traffic conditions permit. Attention would otherwise be
drawn away from the traffic.

In the Federal Republic of Germany it is


forbidden to use mobile telephones
without a permanently installed handsfree system while the vehicle is in motion or while the engine is running.

2
3

Observe the legal requirements in all


countries concerned.

4
5

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph


(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is
covering a distance of some 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

i
7

Observe the legal requirements in all


countries concerned.

8
9

73

Safety
General

1 Operation and retrofitting of mobile te-

In the Federal Republic of Germany it is


forbidden to use mobile telephones
without a permanently installed handsfree system while the vehicle is in motion or while the engine is running.

Bank cards, credit cards or other cards


with magnetic strips should not be kept
near the telephone bracket and loudspeaker.

lephones, two-way radios and fax machines


Risk of accident

3
4
5
6

Operating mobile telephones, two-way radios and fax machines that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in
the vehicle's electronic systems.

Observe the legal requirements in all


countries concerned.
When retrofitting

As a result, the operating reliability and vehicle safety are considerably jeopardised.

mobile telephones

Only use the telephone with a permanently


installed hands-free system and if the traffic
conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic.

fax machines

7
8
9

74

two-way radios
the relevant installation specifications
issued by Mercedes-Benz are to be observed. Contravention of these specifications could invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit
(EU Directive 95/54/EC).

If a magnetic strip is kept in the vicinity


of this equipment, the data stored on
the card could be deleted or modified.

Safety
General

Tyres
Risk of accident

Air conditioning

Tyres age from the influence of sunlight and


the environment. The rubber of the tyre
gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become
harder and more brittle and they begin to
split through age.

Safety requirements
Specialist knowledge is required for service and repair work to the air conditioning.
For this reason, such work should only be
carried out by a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.

Tyres more than six years old are no longer


safe for use.

Risk of injury

Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after


six years at the latest. This also applies to
the spare wheel.

Leaking refrigerant from the air conditioning


can cause frostbite. Avoid all contact with
refrigerant. If refrigerant comes into contact
with the skin, consult a doctor immediately.

Checking the age of tyres ( page 390).

If the air conditioning is damaged in an


accident, do not switch the system on.
This could result in damage to the air
conditioning system.

Have the air conditioning system


checked.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

4
5
6
7
8
9

75

Safety
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems

1 The following driving safety systems are


described in this section:

Telligent brake system (BS) with ABS


Telligent brake system (BS) with ABS
and ASR

3 Telligent stability control (SR)

Telligent

roll control

4 Lane assist (SPA)


Reversing warning

5
6

i
During the winter, the best performance is only attained from the driving
safety systems in conjunction with
M+S tyres (winter tyres).

7
8
9

76

Risk of accident

The risk of an accident is higher:


at high speeds, especially when cornering
on wet or slippery road surfaces
if a safe distance is not kept from the vehicle in front
The driving safety systems are unable to
overcome the laws of physics. For this reason, adapt your driving style to current road
and weather conditions.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)


ABS prevents the wheels from locking
when the brakes are applied. The vehicle
thus remains steerable.
It is operational from walking pace, regardless of road surface conditions.

Safety
Driving safety systems
Telligent brake system (BS)

The Telligent brake system features all


the control functions of ABS, ASR and SR.
The Telligent brake system ensures particularly good braking efficiency with an
even shorter braking distance. The
Telligent brake system can detect emergency braking situations via the integrated
brake assist system. To conserve the
wheel brakes, the Telligent brake system
can also employ the vehicle's engine
brake/retarder, depending on the laden
weight of the vehicle and the weather conditions.

The Telligent brake system imparts


control over the trailer that results in
the vehicle and trailer/semitrailer automatically contributing to the braking
effort of the entire vehicle and trailer
combination in accordance with their
weight. This means the vehicle and
trailer combination has improved braking characteristics. On 4 x 2 vehicle
and semitrailer combinations, the
Telligent brake system monitors the
temperature of the wheel brakes.

Function check

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition


lock. The multi-function display will light up
for approximately two seconds. At the
same time, the warning buzzer sounds.

2
3
4
5
6

Function check of brake systems

1 ABS on tractor vehicle


2 ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS
on trailer/semitrailer

8
9

77

Safety
Driving safety systems

1 The multi-function display will then show:


ABS on tractor vehicle

2 or
3

ABS on tractor vehicle and


ABS on trailer/semitrailer

Risk of accident

If there is no display or
the display does not go out after three
seconds or
the display does not go out when the vehicle pulls away,
anti-lock protection is not guaranteed. The
vehicle cannot be steered if the wheels lock
during braking. The vehicle could skid due to
locked wheels. The vehicle can still be
slowed down using the normal brakes. Drive
with particular care. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible.

4
5
6
7
8
9

78

The maintenance work should always be


carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Safety
Driving safety systems
Event messages
Vehicles with Telligent brake system
(BS)
Risk of accident

An event message with a yellow status indicator means the braking characteristics
could be affected. Drive with particular care.
Have the brake system checked and repaired as soon as possible by a qualified
specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Risk of accident

An event message with a red status indicator means the braking characteristics are affected.

The pedal travel and pedal force required to brake the vehicle/vehicle and
trailer combination may be increased.
The anti-lock function may be deactivated.
The vehicle can still be slowed down using
the normal brakes. Drive with particular
care. Have the brake system checked and
repaired immediately by a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

79

Safety
Driving safety systems

or
without function restriction

Malfunctions in the Telligent stability


control (SR) are shown by the multifunction display as a Telligent brake
system (BS) event message.

3 Vehicles with Telligent brake system


(BS)

4 An event message from the tractor vehicle


5
6
7

brake system is shown by the multi-function display with:


function restriction
instructions
fault location and
system abbreviation "BS"

8
9

80

without instructions
but with fault location and
system abbreviation "BS"
At the same time, the status indicator will
light up yellow or red.
Tractor vehicle BS event message
(example)

1 System abbreviation
2 Status indicator (yellow or red)
3 Function restriction
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/semitrailer

Safety
Driving safety systems
An event message from the trailer or semitrailer brake system is shown by the multifunction display:

with fault location and

the system abbreviation "ABS trailer/


semitrailer"

or for trailer/semitrailer and electropneumatic brake system with the system abbreviation "EAB".
At the same time, the status indicator will
light up yellow or red.

4
"ABS/EBS trailer" event message with ABS
fault message (example)

1 System abbreviation
2 Status indicator (yellow or red)
3 Function restriction
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/semitrailer

"EBS trailer" event message (example)

1 System abbreviation
2 Status indicator (yellow or red)
3 Function restriction
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/semitrailer

5
6
7
8
9

81

Safety
Driving safety systems

1 To drive the tractor unit without semitrailer


or with semitrailer without ABS:

Insert the connector of connecting cable in the "blank socket".


To drive the tractor vehicle with a semitrail-

3 er having ABS or electronic trailer brake:


4

Remove connector of connecting cable


from empty socket and insert in trailer
socket.
Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)

Brake system memory function (example)

1 Blank socket
2 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin

Memory function of Telligent brake


system (BS)

When the key is turned to position 2 in the


ignition lock and there had been a dynamic
fault in the Telligent brake system the
last time the vehicle was driven, an event
message will indicate this.

1 System abbreviation
2 Status indicator (yellow or red)
3 Function restriction
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/semitrailer

Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)

82

Safety
Driving safety systems
Excessive wheel brake temperature
4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles
An event message with yellow status indicator will indicate excessive temperatures
in the wheel brakes.

Drive with particular care. Adapt driving style and try to use the continuous
brake (exhaust brake/retarder) to
brake the vehicle where possible.
Once the wheel brake temperature
drops back below the critical level, the
display will go out.

The system is unable to detect and display increases in temperature caused


by defects in the wheel brakes (seized
calliper, reduced air gap etc.).

2
3

Risk of accident

An event message with a yellow status indicator means the braking characteristics
could be affected. Drive with particular care.

4
5
6

1 Excessive wheel brake temperature


event message
2 Status indicator (yellow)

7
8
9

83

Safety
Driving safety systems

1 Braking with anti-lock protection


2
3
4
5
6

In an emergency, apply full pressure to


brake pedal. This guarantees optimum deceleration of the vehicle.
Risk of accident

If a trailer/semitrailer without ABS is attached, this could be over-braked if the


brakes are applied fully. There is a danger
that control over the vehicle could be lost.
Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an
emergency to prevent the wheels of the
trailer/semitrailer from locking.

7
8
9

84

The BS or ABS anti-lock braking systems do


not relieve you of the responsibility for
adopting a driving style which suits traffic
and road conditions. True running and steerability of the vehicle/vehicle and trailer
combination under braking is improved. The
anti-lock protection is not capable, however,
of overcoming the laws of physics and cannot protect against the consequences of not
keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
front or excessive speed when cornering, for
instance.

If the multi-function display shows the


event message
ABS on trailer/semitrailer
or
ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on
trailer/semitrailer
the anti-lock protection for the trailer/
semitrailer or for the tractor vehicle and
trailer/semitrailer is not operational.

Safety
Driving safety systems

Risk of accident

If the multi-function display shows just the


event message "ABS trailer/semitrailer",
there is a danger of the trailer/semitrailer
over-braking.
There is a danger of control over the vehicle
being lost if full braking effort is applied.
Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an
emergency to prevent the wheels of the
trailer/semitrailer from locking.
Telligent

Vehicles without
automatic gearshift: On a slippery road surface, declutch as
well so that the ABS control system is not affected by the engine braking effect.

i
The continuous brake switches itself
off automatically during ABS intervention. The b indicator lamp does not
go out.

ABS deactivation
If ABS is switched off, it may be possible to
achieve shorter stopping distances on
rough terrain and on unmade roads
(e.g. soft or extremely corrugated surfaces
and on downhill slopes).
Risk of accident

2
3
4

The vehicle could skid due to locked wheels.


If ABS is switched off, the wheels may lock
and skid under braking. The vehicle cannot
be steered if the wheels lock during braking.

ABS must always be switched on when driving on public roads.

6
7
8
9

85

Safety
Driving safety systems
Deactivating ABS

i
The "Tractor vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer ABS off" display is only available
on trailers/semitrailers with EBS

Press upper section of switch 1.

ABS is deactivated.
The multi-function display shows tractor vehicle ABS off.

4
1 ABS OFF switch

i
On vehicles with ABS deactivation:

6
7

Deactivate ABS for off-road travel.


The next time the engine is started,
ABS is automatically activated.
Switch ABS off again for off-road driving.

8
9

86

1 Display for tractor vehicle ABS off


2 Status indicator (yellow)
3 Display for tractor vehicle and trailer/
semitrailer ABS off

On trailers/semitrailers with EBS, the


multi-function display shows tractor
vehicle and trailer/semitrailer ABS off.
At the same time, the status indicator
will light up yellow.

Safety
Driving safety systems
Reactivating ABS
Press upper section of switch 1.
ABS is reactivated.
The display in the multi-function display must go out.

Acceleration skid control (ASR)


Acceleration skid control prevents the
drive wheels from spinning when the vehicle pulls away or during acceleration, regardless of the road conditions.

Activating ASR

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up and then goes
out after two seconds.
Risk of accident

If the ASR is switched off and the wheels


slip, the vehicle could skid.

1 ASR OFF switch

Acceleration skid control does not relieve


you of the responsibility of driving the vehicle in a manner which suits road and traffic
conditions.
If the indicator lamp does not go out, have
ASR checked.

6
7

8
9

87

Safety
Driving safety systems

1
2
3
4
5

Risk of accident

The maintenance work should always be


carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

6
7
8
9

88

Driving with ASR

If the drive wheels start to spin on one or


both sides of the vehicle, ASR switches itself on automatically.

During the winter, the best performance is only attained from ASR in conjunction with winter tyres.

The v ASR indicator lamp lights up in


the instrument panel.

If traction problems occur when the vehicle is driven with chains or driven on
loose ground (e.g. sand or gravel),
switch off acceleration skid control.

If the drive wheels spin on one side,


ASR brakes them automatically.
If the drive wheels spin on both sides,
ASR automatically reduces engine
power output.

Vehicles with two driven rear axles:


On a slippery road, engage the "inter-axle"
differential lock ( page 253).

Safety
Driving safety systems

Deactivating ASR

Cruise control or the cruise control


continuous brake cannot be activated
during skid control.
If cruise control was already switched
on, it will remain active. It is not possible to accelerate or decelerate using
the cruise control function.

Reactivating ASR

Press upper section of switch 1 again.


ASR is activated. The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will go
out.

2
3
4

1 ASR OFF switch

Press upper section of switch 1.


ASR is deactivated. The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will
flash.

6
7
8
9

89

Safety
Driving safety systems

Telligent stability control (SR)


4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles

2 Telligent stability control only operates

3
4

within physical limitations. In critical driving situations, such as sudden evasive manoeuvres or increased speed in corners, it
reduces skidding, jack-knifing or tipping of
the semitrailer. This is independent of the
load condition of the semitrailer or the type
of road surface.

Telligent stability control is operational regardless of whether or not the


service brake and continuous brake are
engaged.

Handling characteristics
Understeering
The vehicle moves off the correct path 1
over the front axle to the outer edge of the
carriageway 2.

1 Intended
2 Actual

8
9

90

The vehicle breaks away through the rear


axle. Moving off the intended path 3, the
vehicle turns toward the inner edge of the
carriageway 4.

Path correction (oversteering)


Path correction (understeering)

Oversteering

3 Intended
4 Actual

Safety
Driving safety systems
Activating SR

Deactivating SR

Press upper section of switch 1 again.

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.


The v SR/ASR indicator
lamp lights up and should go out after
two seconds. This indicates that Telligent stability control is active.

i
When the key is turned to position 2 in
the ignition lock, Telligent stability
control is activated automatically.

Reactivating SR

1 SR OFF switch
Press upper section of switch 1.

The stability control and acceleration


skid control functions are active.

The flashing SR/ASR indicator


lamp v in the instrument panel will
go out.

Driving with SR

Telligent stability control is an extension


of the Telligent brake system (BS), which
already incorporates both ABS and ASR.

The stability control and acceleration


skid control functions are deactivated.

The v SR/ASR indicator lamp in


the instrument panel will flash.

7
8
9

91

Safety
Driving safety systems

1 If Telligent stability control recognises a

During automatic control, the v


SR/ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will light up.

critical driving situation, the following automatic control interventions will stabilise
the tractor and trailer combination:
Reduction in engine power output

3 Targeted intervention in the brake system on each wheel of the tractor vehicle individually

4 Actuation of the semitrailer brake system

5 Braking of the entire vehicle and trailer


combination

6
7
8
9

92

Risk of accident

Telligent stability control does not relieve


you of the responsibility of driving the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the loading of
the vehicle and the road and traffic conditions. Stability control is not capable, for example, of overcoming the laws of physics
and cannot protect against the consequences of the semitrailer vehicle being driven at
excessive speed in corners.
Excessive speed in corners could lead to
control over the vehicle being lost. Therefore, brake the vehicle in good time when
approaching corners, so that there is no
danger when cornering.

Safety
Driving safety systems

Telligent stability control is only active when the vehicle is moving at a


speed of at least 6 mph (10 km/h). If
reverse gear is engaged, stability control will be deactivated.

SR event message

During the winter, the best performance is only obtained from Telligent
stability control in conjunction with
M+S tyres (winter tyres).

Telligent stability control messages are


shown by the multi-function display as a
Telligent brake system (BS) event message.

Switch off Telligent stability control if


traction problems occur when driving
with snow chains or on loose surfaces
(e.g. sand and gravel).

At the same time, the multi-function display indicates any function restriction and
the status indicator lights up yellow.

Telligent stability control is then deactivated.

Telligent stability control is automatically deactivated:

if there is a malfunction in
Telligent stability control

Risk of accident

if there is a malfunction in
Telligent brake system which affects Telligent stability control.

Excessive speed when cornering could lead


to control over the vehicle being lost. Drive
with particular care. Therefore, brake the vehicle in good time when approaching corners, so that there is no danger when
cornering.

5
6
7
8
9

93

Safety
Driving safety systems

Acknowledging event message

Have Telligent stability control inspected.

Press the or button on


the multi-function steering wheel.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.

or

If the cause of the malfunction is not


rectified when the engine is started
again, the event message is shown
again in the multi-function display.

2
3
4
5
6

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

7
8
9

94

Press the button on the instrument panel.


The message is cleared. The system
abbreviation is shown in the reminder
section.

Safety
Driving safety systems
Telligent roll control (WR)
4x2 and 6x2 vehicles with steel/airsprung front axle and air-sprung rear axle:
Telligent roll control controls the chassis
suspension electronically. Depending on
the laden weight of the vehicle, the driving
situation and the road properties, the
chassis suspension regulates itself automatically.

When driving,
rolling movements of bodies with a
high centre of gravity e.g. box bodies,
are reduced
safety in critical driving situations is increased, e.g. lane change or sudden
evasive manoeuvres

Malfunctions in Telligent roll control


are shown in the multi-function display.
An event message in the multi-function
display is indicated by the system abbreviation HM.

2
3

ride comfort is improved on poor road


surfaces

Telligent roll control is gentle on sensitive freight

pitching movements are reduced when


the vehicle pulls away or brakes

6
7
8
9

95

Safety
Driving safety systems

1
2
3
4

Risk of accident

If there is a Telligent roll control event


message, the risk of the vehicle tipping over
in corners is increased. The suspension's
damping characteristics may be affected.
Drive with particular care. Slow down in
particular when approaching corners.
Telligent roll control should be repaired as
soon as possible.

The maintenance work should always be


carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

7
8
9

96

Lane assist
Lane assist is a convenience system which
continuously monitors the position of the
vehicle in relation to the roadside markings
through a camera behind the windscreen.
If the road lane markings are driven on or
crossed, an audible warning in the form of
a "rumble strip" noise will sound in the lefthand or right-hand cab loudspeaker.
1 "Lane assist" camera

Safety
Driving safety systems

Risk of accident

Lane assist is merely a tool to assist the driver. When driving, you are responsible for
keeping the vehicle on the correct lane and
in the correct direction.
Lane assist can only give a warning when
the road lane markings are driven over or
crossed if these are easily detectable.
Active Lane assist will not give a warning if:
the speed of the vehicle is below 40 mph
(60 km/h)

Risk of accident

Adverse weather conditions, such as:


snow
slush
heavy rain
and a very dirty windscreen
can impair the function of Lane assist. You
should therefore switch on the windscreen
wiper, for example, to keep the area around
the camera free from dirt.

Note that the function of Lane assist is limited:

if the lane markings are difficult to detect (e.g. if the road is covered by snow,
sand or debris)

if there are shadows or several markings


on the road (e.g. roadworks)

when the main-beam headlamps are


switched on

Risk of accident

in tight corners

a turn signal is on

the vehicle is decelerating

7
8
9

97

Safety
Driving safety systems

1 Switching on Lane assist

Press upper section of switch 1.


Lane assist is activated.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up. A brief crackling noise will be heard
from the loudspeakers in the cab.

2
3

4
5 1 Lane assist switch
6

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

7
8
9

98

If Lane assist was already activated before the engine was started, the crackling noise will be heard as the engine is
started.
The radio is automatically muted when
a Lane assist warning is being given.

i
If a Lane assist warning is not possible,
the f "Lane assist" indicator lamp
will light up in the instrument panel.
Switching off Lane assist
Press upper section of switch 1.
Lane assist is deactivated.
The indicator lamp in the switch will go
out.

Safety
Driving safety systems

Reversing warning

The reversing warning does not relieve you


of your duty to make sure that there are no
persons/obstacles behind the vehicle.

Risk of accident

The reversing warning is an audible warning device built into the rear lamp cluster
of the vehicle. The reversing warning is activated and emits a warning tone when reverse gear is engaged.

If necessary, a second person should assist


during manoeuvring.

3
4

1 Reversing warning

5
6
7
8
9
1. Legal requirement in Austria

99

Safety
Underride guard
Underride guard

1
2

Folding underride guard

Risk of accident

The underride guard can be folded up for


off-road journeys, for example.

The underride guard must be folded down


and locked in this position when the vehicle
is driven on public roads. Only this way can
a vehicle be prevented from becoming
jammed beneath the frame in the event of a
collision.

3
4
Underride guard (example)

5
6
7

Underride guard (example)

1 Unlocked
2 Locked

8
9

100

1 Unlocked
2 Locked
3 Folded down
4 Folded up

Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Seats and berths
Starting and stopping the engine 1
Brakes
Lighting
Instrument panel

2
3

Driver information system


Gear selection 4
Driving
Driving systems 5
Good visibility
Climate control
Open-air

6
7

Features

8
9

101

Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Opening and closing

1 The "Controls in detail" section contains

detailed information about the functions of


the vehicle.

2 Do not read this section until you are fully


3

conversant with the basic functions of the


vehicle.
You can read about the basic functions in
the "Getting started" section.

4
5

Opening and closing doors


Risk of accident and injury

Only drive with the doors properly closed. If


you open or close the doors while the vehicle is in motion there is a risk of injury.
Always remove the key from the ignition
lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you
are only leaving for a short time. Children or
unauthorised persons could otherwise start
the vehicle.
Do not leave children alone in the vehicle.
They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.

6
7
8
9

102

If you unlock the vehicle using the radio


remote control, you must open one of
the doors within 25 seconds. Otherwise the electronics system relocks the
vehicle.
A locked door can always be opened
from the inside using the interior door
handle.
Before the vehicle can be locked, all
doors must be closed. The lock-out protection prevents opened doors from
being locked.

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Vehicle key

Central locking
The
vehicle
is
equipped
with
a
special
key
When you unlock the vehicle using the
Included with the vehicle are two keys.
system. You can only start the engine usradio remote control, the interior light
lights up for approximately ten seconds. ing the keys coded to the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking driver's door
The interior light goes out when the
i
key in the steering lock is turned to poUnlocking/locking doors using the key
If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement
sition 1. If a door is open, the interior
is a time-consuming process which only
light goes out after approximately
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can
five minutes.
perform for you.
When pressing the buttons of the radio
For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recomremote control, always hold for approximends that you always keep an easily
mately one second. This avoids malaccessible spare key with you for emerfunctions.
gencies.

Left-hand door

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1 unlocked
2 locked

8
9

103

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 Exterior door release mechanism


2
3
4

To lock

To open the door, pull the door handle


on the outside.

Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes
out.

All doors must be closed. The vehicle


locks centrally.

Unlocking
Only the driver's and the co-driver's
door can be opened using the key.

Unlocking

To lock
The driver's and co-driver's door always lock simultaneously.

Press switch 3.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch flashes.

5
6
7
8

The vehicle unlocks centrally.

Unlocking/locking doors using


the "Door lock" switch
You can lock and unlock the vehicle centrally via the door lock switch in the control
panel of the driver's and co-driver's door.
This is useful, for example, to unlock the
co-driver's door from inside or to lock the
vehicle before driving off.

104

Door lock switch in driver's door

i
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:
If the vehicle was locked from the outside, the anti-theft alarm system is activated if switch 3 is pressed.

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Opening the door from inside

Central locking with anti-theft alarm


system
Included with the vehicle are:
two keys
two radio remote controls
Unlocking/locking doors using key
The locking and unlocking function is the
same as on vehicles with central locking
( page 103).

1 Interior door handle


To open the door, pull door handle 1
on the inside.

To activate the anti-theft alarm system


at the same time, hold the key in the
locked position for longer than
two seconds.
The vehicle is locked. The turn signals
flash 3 times1.
The anti-theft alarm system is primed.

i
If there is no visual confirmation, the
anti-theft alarm system is activated but
at least one of the components that are
monitored is not in an operational condition and is not being monitored.

1
2
3
4
5
6

i
A locked door can always be opened
from the inside using the interior door
handle.

7
8
9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.

105

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 Locking and unlocking doors using the


radio remote control

Included with the vehicle are

The turn signals flash 3 times.

two radio remote controls

The turn signals flash once1.

The anti-theft alarm system is primed.

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

The enhanced central locking system is an


extension of the central locking system.

Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door

5 Press the button twice.


The turn signals flash once1.

Enhanced central locking system


two keys

Press the button once.

Press the button once.


Driver's and co-driver's door locks.

2 Unlocking driver's door


3

Locking driver's and co-driver's door

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

The turn signals only flash if the locking


procedure is successful. If there is no
confirmation from the turn signals1, not
all components/vehicle access points
monitored by the anti-theft alarm system are in the ready position
( page 111).
1 Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly

Unlocking/locking doors using the key


The vehicle should be locked using the key
in the same way as any standard central
locking system ( page 103).
If you lock a vehicle with enhanced central
locking system, the following also have to
be closed
the driver's and co-driver's door windows
the sliding/tilting sunroof

8
9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.

106

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Unlocking/locking doors using the key

The power windows feature protection


against entrapment.

The vehicle should be locked using the key


in the same way as any standard central
locking system ( page 103).

The closing function is interrupted if an


object prevents the side window from
closing fully.
The sliding/tilting sunroof remains
open if the closure lock is activated before you lock the vehicle ( page 341).
The enhanced central locking system is
only effective if
the key in the steering lock is in
position 0 or removed
you lock or unlock the vehicle using the
key in the driver's door or if you use the
radio remote control
both doors are closed

Locking and unlocking the doors using


the radio remote control

Unlocking the driver's door

Press the button once.


Convenience opening
Hold key in driver's door lock for longer
than three seconds in the "unlock" position.

The turn signals flash once1.

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:


The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

The driver's door unlocks


The turn signals flash once1
The side windows open
The sliding/tilting sunroof moves
into the raised position

Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door


Press the button twice.
The turn signals flash once1.

5
6

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:


The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

When you release the key, the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof
stop moving.

7
8
9

1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.

107

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 Locking driver's and co-driver's door


Press the button once.

The turn signals flash once1.


The driver's and co-driver's door lock.

Opened side windows close automatically.

The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, depending on the position of


the lock switch.

The turn signals flash three times1.

Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock

Protection against entrapment feature


in power windows.

Before locking, select position of


sliding/tilting sunroof on closure lock
switch.

Opened windows close automatically


when the vehicle is locked. The closing
function is interrupted if an object prevents the side window from closing fully.

Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:


The anti-theft alarm system is primed.

i
7

Turn signals only flash if the locking


procedure is successful.

8
9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.

108

1 Closure lock switch

Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Activating
Press the upper section of the P
closure lock switch.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up.
The next time the vehicle is locked, the
sliding/tilting sunroof remains open.

Radio remote control


The radio remote control works regardless
of the direction in which it is pointed.
It is also possible to unlock the vehicle
from some distance. To avoid theft, the radio remote control should only be used in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Closes the sliding/tilting sunroof


automatically on vehicles with the enhanced central locking system, depending on the position of the closure
lock

1
2

Activates/deactivates the anti-theft


alarm system

The radio remote control


Deactivating
Press the upper section of the P
closure lock switch.
The indicator lamp in the switch should
go out.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes when
the vehicle is locked.

Unlocks the driver's and co-driver's


door in succession

Locks the driver's and co-driver's door


centrally

Closes the side windows automatically


on vehicles with the enhanced central
locking system

Radio remote control

1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button

109

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 Press and hold locking/unlocking button for approximately one second.

2
3

i
If you unlock the vehicle using the radio
remote control and none of the doors
are opened within 25 seconds, the vehicle locks itself again automatically.

4
Risk of injury

5
6

When closing the power windows and the


sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody
becomes trapped in them.

7
8
9

110

i
The driver information system shows
when the battery in the radio remote
control needs to be replaced.
Replacing the battery ( page 534).
Loss of a radio remote control
If a radio remote control is lost, a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can prevent further use by deactivating all of the
radio remote control units.

Be prepared to hand over all available


radio remote control units to the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for recoding.
The vehicle can then only be locked/
unlocked with the recoded radio remote control units.

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Anti-theft alarm system


The anti-theft alarm system protects the
tractor vehicle and the attached trailer/
semitrailer against break-in and theft.
The activated anti-theft alarm system triggers an optical and acoustic alarm if:
a door is opened
the maintenance flap is opened
the cab is tilted
a stowage compartment is opened on
the driver's or co-driver's side
a connecting cable to the trailer or
semitrailer is disconnected
the driver's door is unlocked using the
"Lock door" switch in the driver's door
control panel if the vehicle was locked
from the outside

the voltage supply is interrupted due to


the battery terminal clamps being undone, for example.
supply to the anti-theft alarms is interrupted
the panic switch in the cab interior is
pressed
a signal is set off by sensors fitted by
the body manufacturer.
To activate the anti-theft alarm system
with monitoring of all sensors, the following must be observed:
Only those components that were in
the ready position, i.e. locked or attached, when the alarm was activated
will trigger an alarm.
The anti-theft alarm system only monitors closed or attached components.

The turn signals1 confirm the locking


procedure with activated anti-theft
alarm system only when all components are in the ready position.

1
2

On vehicles with enhanced central


locking system, the side windows close
first and then the sliding/tilting sunroof before the turn signals confirm
completion of the locking procedure.

It is possible to place a component in


the ready position up to ten seconds
after the anti-theft alarm system has
been activated. The anti-theft alarm
system then monitors this component.

The anti-theft alarm system cannot


monitor trailers or semitrailers with
LED tail lamps.
The multi-function display shows
Trailer cannot be monitored!.

6
7
8
9

1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly

111

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 Anti-theft alarm system for vehicles for


the transport of hazardous goods

Activating or deactivating the anti-theft


alarm system from outside the vehicle

The functional differences in the anti-theft


alarm system are listed as follows:

To lock the vehicle centrally and to activate


or deactivate the anti-theft alarm system:

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated and the voltage supply is interrupted
via the emergency-off switch, an alarm
sounds.

the radio remote control or

4 If the voltage supply has been inter5


6
7

rupted via the emergency-off switch,


the anti-theft alarm system cannot be
activated as the anti-theft alarm system will then sound an alarm.
Lock the vehicle using the key in
the driver's door to prevent an
alarm.
Do not hold the key in the locked
position for longer than one second. The anti-theft alarm system is
not primed.

8
9

112

the key (in driver's door only)


should be used.

i
The key in the ignition lock must be in
the 0 position or removed.

Activating using the key


When locking the vehicle, hold key in
the locked position for approximately
two seconds.
Vehicles with enhanced central locking
system: opened side windows and
sliding/tilting sunroof close automatically.
The vehicle locks and at the same time
the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Deactivating using the key
Unlock the vehicle by turning the key to
the unlock position ( page 103).
The vehicle is unlocked. The anti-theft
alarm system is deactivated.

Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Deactivating using the radio remote
control
Press the button once.
All turn signals and the indicator lamp
in the anti-theft alarm system switch
flash once1.
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

i
If none of the doors are opened within
25 seconds,
the vehicle locks itself again automatically
the anti-theft alarm system that
was previously deactivated is activated once again

Activating using the radio remote


control

Press the button once.


Vehicles with enhanced central locking
system:
Opened side windows close automatically.
The driver's and co-driver's door lock.
The turn signals flash three times1.
The indicator lamp in the anti-theft
alarm system switch flashes if all monitored components are in the ready position.

2
3
4
5
6

The anti-theft alarm system is activated.

7
8
9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.

113

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp


2

The indicator lamp in anti-theft alarm system switch 1 indicates to the driver the
status of the anti-theft alarm system in its
various stages of operation.

3
4
5
6
1 Anti-theft alarm system switch

7 If the anti-theft alarm system is activated:


The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes.

8
9

114

If the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated:


The indicator lamp in switch 1 is off.

Deactivating from inside the vehicle


Press the upper section of switch 1
once.

Activating or deactivating the anti-theft


alarm system from inside the vehicle

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.

If the anti-theft alarm system is switched


on from inside the vehicle, it can only be
switched off in this way.

The indicator lamp in switch 1 goes


out.

Activating from inside the vehicle

Vehicles with immobiliser:

Press the upper section of switch 1


once.

If you activated the anti-theft alarm


system from inside the vehicle, you can
deactivate it by starting the engine.

The anti-theft alarm system is activated.


The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes.
Both doors lock at the same time.

The prerequisite is that the immobiliser


can recognise the key.

Controls in detail
Opening and closing
The multi-function display indicates

Anti-theft alarm

a malfunction

If an alarm is activated, all turn signals and


the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the
alarm sounds.

an alarm source that is not in the ready


position (closed or attached) when the
anti-theft alarm system is activated
from inside the vehicle ( page 111).
The event message indicates the alarm
sources to be checked and, if necessary,
an instruction on what to do.
Anti-theft alarm system event message
(example)

1 Alarm source
2 Instructions

1
2

After a predetermined period of approximately five minutes, the alarm switches


off.

The acoustic alarm switches off after approximately 30 seconds.

After the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated, the multi-function display shows an
alarm message when the ignition key is
turned to position 1 in the steering lock.

5
6
7
8
9

115

Controls in detail
Opening and closing

1 The multi-function display shows the

Panic alarm

2 The message must be acknowledged by

If more than one alarm was set off, the


multi-function display shows the first
alarm.

You can activate the panic alarm at any


time by pressing the anti-theft alarm system switch.

source of the alarm or the reason it was activated.


the driver.

3 Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

Cancelling the alarm


If an alarm is activated, it is possible to
cancel it by:

If the alarm is activated, all turn signals and


the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the
alarm horn sounds1.

Unlocking the vehicle using the radio


remote control

Pressing the button once.

Unlocking the vehicle using the key in


the driver's door

Turn the key in driver's door to the


"unlock" position and hold for
two seconds ( page 103)
Alarm message (example)

8 1 Source or reason why alarm was activated

If the alarm system has been activated


from inside the vehicle:

1 Anti-theft alarm system switch

Press the upper section of the antitheft alarm system switch in the
switch panel once ( page 114)
1. Great Britain: If the alarm is activated, only the
alarm horn sounds.

116

Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Activating
Press the lower section of anti-theft
alarm system switch 1 once.
The panic alarm is activated.
Both doors lock.
On vehicles with enhanced central
locking system: Both side windows
close.

i
The closing function is interrupted if an
object prevents a side window from
closing fully.

Risk of injury

Take care when closing the power windows


and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody
becomes trapped in them.
Always remove the key from the ignition
lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you
are only leaving for a short time. Children or
unauthorised persons could otherwise start
the vehicle.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could open a locked door from
the inside and endanger themselves and
others.

To release

Press the lower section of anti-theft


alarm system switch 1 once.
The panic alarm switches off.
The doors remain locked.
The anti-theft alarm system maintains
its previous status.

2
3
4

i
The panic alarm switches off automatically after a maximum of 30 seconds.
The optical alarm terminates after a
maximum of five minutes. During this
period, the doors remain locked and
the anti-theft alarm system maintains
its previous status.

5
6
7
8
9

117

Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Seats and berths

Seats

The vehicle may be equipped with different


types of seats depending on the equipment level.

Observe the operating instructions issued


by the manufacturer.

Risk of accident and injury

Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary and with the parking brake
applied. The movement of the seat could
otherwise lead to you losing control over the
vehicle and causing an accident.

Adjusting the seat while driving would also


divert your attention away from the road and
traffic conditions.

8
9

Ensure, when adjusting the seat, that you


select a relaxed position that does not promote body fatigue.
The seat catches must audibly engage.

118

Make sure that none of the occupants or


you yourself become caught in the seat
when it is being adjusted.

i
Adjust backrest into vertical position, if
possible.

Ensure that all occupants have secured their


seat belts before commencing any journey
( page 46).

Set the distance to the pedals so that


you can comfortably depress them fully.

Before exiting the vehicle, lower the suspension seat fully, otherwise the seat could rise
and trap your legs between the steering
wheel and the seat.

With both hands on the steering wheel,


the arms should be slightly bent.

!
Vehicles with upper berth:
To avoid damage to the berth and
seats.
Fold up the berth before adjusting
the seat ( page 121).
Move the backrest forwards before
folding down the berth.

Adjust height adjustable head restraints so that the back of the head is
supported approximately at eye level.
Do not operate several control elements for seat adjustment at the same
time.
To prevent noises while driving, the codriver's seat should be fully lowered if it
is not being used.

Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Seat adjustment, driver's suspension
seat
Further information can be found in the
"Getting started" section ( page 41).
Seat adjustment, co-driver's function
seat (example)

Adjusting the backrest

Folding up the seat cushion

Sit down on the seat and pull the adjustment lever 1 upwards.

Push seat cushion 2 towards the


backrest until the seat cushion audibly
engages (click).

The backrest moves forwards.


Apply or release pressure to/from
backrest to adjust backrest to desired
position.
Release adjustment lever.

Folding down the seat cushion


Push seat cushion 2 towards the
backrest again until the seat cushion
audibly disengages.

2
3
4

Fold down seat cushion 2.

5
6
7
8
1 Backrest adjustment lever
2 Seat cushion

119

Controls in detail
Seats and berths

1 Centre seat head restraint


2
3
4
5

Risk of injury

Removing the head restraint


Pull the head restraint up to the stop.

Simultaneously press in and hold the


retainers 1.

Only drive the vehicle with head restraints


fitted so that occupants are protected
against critical injuries should an accident
occur.
Adjust the head restraints so that they support the back of the head at approximately
eye level. This reduces the risk of injury to
the head and neck area in case of an accident or similar situation.

Pull the head restraint sharply up and


out.
Installing head restraints
Head restraint

1 Safety retainers

Insert head restraint in guides.


Push head restraint down to the stop.
The head restraint locks in place automatically.
Adjust to the desired position.

6
7
8
9

120

Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Folding the berth up

Upper berth
Risk of injury

Folding the berth down


(sleeping position)

To prevent damage to the berth and


seats, ensure that there is enough
space for the upper berth before it is
folded down. Move the backrests of the
driver's and co-driver's seats forward.

Only use the berth when the vehicle is stationary. It is forbidden for anyone to be in or
on the upper berth while the vehicle is in
motion.

3
4

Do not drive the vehicle unless the berth has


been folded up and is secured by the belts.
When folding the berth in/out, take care to
ensure that your fingers do not get trapped
between the parts of the berth.

i
Before adjusting the seats, fold the upper berth up. When doing this, avoid
damage to the berth and the backrest.

1 Belt buckles

Fold berth up and hold in place,


Push the securing belt tongues 1 into
the belt buckles until they audibly engage,

If necessary, adjust the seats back into


position.

7
2 Belt buckle release button

121

Controls in detail
Seats and berths

1 Lift berth up slightly, hold in place and

press the red release button of the belt


latches 2,

2 Release securing belt,


Fold the berth down.

Folding out the access step

Lower berth

Press against access step and then release.

Risk of injury

The access step folds out and engages


audibly.

3
Upper berth access step

Folding in the access step

The access step is there to assist you in ac-

Push release lever 1 downwards.


Push access step down onto stop.

in the instrument panel.

Take hand away from release lever 1.

4 cessing the upper berth and is integrated


5
6
7
8
1 Release lever

122

A person on the lower berth should be secured in place with the restraint system
when the vehicle is in motion.
When folding the berth in/out, take care to
ensure that your fingers do not get trapped
between the parts of the berth.

Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Use when the vehicle is in motion

Hook restraint system 2 in eye 1 on


cab roof.

i
The covers for the stowage compartments can be found beneath the mattress ( page 348).

3
4

Recliner

Lower berth restraint system

The recliner seat in the single cab is not designed to be used permanently as a codriver's seat. However, for exceptional
cases, it can be used as a seat for passengers.

5
Recliner

7
8
9

123

Controls in detail
Seats and berths

1
2
3
4
5

Risk of injury

Fold backrest of co-driver's seat down


towards the seat cushion,

Make sure, before commencing any journey,


that the person occupying the recliner seat
has his/her seat belt applied ( page 46).

Position swivel bar 1 vertically and


engage downwards,
Fold up 1/3 part of mattress onto
backrest.

When converting the recliner into a berth,


make sure that no one can become caught
in the seat.

Conversion to recliner

When the seat is being used as a berth, the


person occupying it must be secured by:

Lower berth with two-part mattress

the seat belt ( page 122)

1 Swivel bar

the locked backrest securing bar

Conversion to berth

when the vehicle is in motion.

Fold 1/3 part of mattress onto 2/3


part,
Pull swivel bar 1 upwards vertically,
release and fold up towards the backrest,
Set up backrest towards cab backwall.

7
8
9

124

Controls in detail
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting and stopping the engine
Immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents the engine from
being started by unauthorised persons.
You can only start the engine using the
keys supplied with the vehicle.
The vehicle is equipped with a special key
system.

Deactivating the immobiliser


Turn the key in ignition lock to position
2. Hold in position 2 for approximately
0.5 seconds.
If the immobiliser recognises the coded
key, the immobiliser switches off. The
engine can be started.

i
Activating the immobiliser
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
The immobiliser electronics are activated.

If you do not hold the key in position for


the specified duration or an incorrect
key is used, the multi-function display
shows CODE.
If five unsuccessful attempts are made
with an incorrect key, the waiting period is extended by one minute every
time the key is used in an attempt to
start the engine.

For the waiting period, the key must be in


position 2 in the steering lock.

i
After four unsuccessful attempts, it
may be necessary to use the spare key.
Slowly turn the key. Wait briefly
(approximately 0.5 seconds) in
between positions 2 and 3 in the steering lock.
If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement
is a time-consuming process which
only a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
can perform for you.
For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recommends that you always keep an easily accessible spare key with you for
emergencies.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

125

Controls in detail
Starting and stopping the engine

1
2
3
4
5

ADR emergency-off switch


Vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous goods:
Vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous goods are equipped with two emergency-off switches. The switches are
intended to allow isolation of the power
supply and to prevent spark generating
short circuits that could set off a fire or explosion.
The following components are supplied
with electricity even if the isolation switch
has been pressed:

6 Tachograph
Anti-theft alarm system

7
8
9

126

i
If the voltage supply is interrupted by
actuation of the emergency-off switch
if the anti-theft alarm system is active,
the anti-theft alarm system sounds an
alarm. Ensure the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated before interrupting
the power supply using the emergencyoff switch.

Risk of accident

The switch interrupts the power supply to all


main electrical consumers.
The engine switches off automatically.
The following have no function:
Power steering
Vehicle lighting
Anti-lock protection
Electronic gear selection
The vehicle can no longer be kept under control.
Only operate the emergency-off switch if
there is imminent danger and the vehicle is
stationary. It must never be operated while
the vehicle is in motion.

Controls in detail
Starting and stopping the engine
Emergency-off switch in cockpit

Activating

Deactivating

The switch is located in the cockpit on the


left or right-hand side next to the heater
control panel.

Fold cover upwards.

Push down cover until it audibly engages.

Remove switch pin 1.


All electrical consumers apart from the
tachograph and the anti-theft alarm
system are isolated from the power
supply system.

The voltage supply for all electrical consumers is reinstated.

2
3
4
5
6

1 Emergency-off switch (example)

7
8
9

127

Controls in detail
Starting and stopping the engine

1 Emergency-off switch on outside of


2

Activating

Deactivating

vehicle

Open cover,

The switch is on the co-driver's side behind


the cab.

Push lever 1 upwards.

Push down cover until it audibly engages.

All electrical consumers apart from the


tachograph and the anti-theft alarm
system are isolated from the power
supply system.

3
4
5
6 1 Emergency-off switch
7
8
9

128

The voltage supply for all electrical consumers is reinstated.

Controls in detail
Starting and stopping the engine

Flame-start system
At low ambient temperatures, the flamestart system makes it possible to quickly
and easily start the engine.
Environmental note

The advantages of the flame-start system


are:

The electronics system activates the


flame-start system at a temperature below
4 C as soon as the ignition lock is in
position 2. The q indicator lamp in the
instrument panel shows that the flamestart system is being primed.
When the engine has been started, the system remains active until the coolant temperature is at 0 C.

Optimal combustion which leads to

A considerable reduction in harmful exhaust emissions while the engine is


warming up

At coolant temperatures above 4 C,


the q indicator lamp lights up to
show the function check of the flamestart system.

Avoidance of poor cold running properties

The electronic system switches the


flame-start system off initially
if you start the engine while the
q indicator lamp is on.
Do not start the engine until the indicator lamp has gone out.
if you do not start the engine within
30 seconds after the q indicator lamp has gone out.
Activate the flame-start system
again before starting the engine.

2
3
4
5
6

Less load on battery and starter

7
8
9

129

Controls in detail
Brakes
Brakes

1
2
3
4
5

Parking brake
The parking brake is designed to prevent a
parked vehicle from rolling away. It actuates the spring-loaded cylinders.

i
Trailer/semitrailer parking brake, see
manufacturer's operating instructions.
Trailer/semitrailer with EU brake system:
If the trailer is attached, the parking
brake also has an effect on the service
brakes of the trailer/semitrailer.

6 Applying ( page 62) or releasing


( page 52) parking brake.

7
8
9

130

Hillholder

Activating hillholder

The hillholder is an extension of the


Telligent brake system and offers pulling
away assistance.
When pulling away on hills, the hillholder prevents the vehicle from rolling
backwards
When reversing up gradients, the hillholder prevents the vehicle from rolling
forwards
1 Hillholder switch
Press the upper section of hillholder
switch 1.
The hillholder is primed but not active.
Bring the vehicle to a halt using the
brakes.
The hillholder is active automatically.
The k hillholder indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.

Controls in detail
Brakes

i
As long as you maintain even the slightest of pressure on the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal, the hillholder remains active.
Deactivating hillholder
When you drive off in your vehicle, the hillholder is deactivated automatically.
The k hillholder indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.

Risk of accident

If none of the pedals are pressed when the


hillholder is active (accelerator, clutch or
brake pedal), a warning buzzer sounds briefly. The hillholder is deactivated and the
k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out. The vehicle could roll
away unintentionally.

Switching off hillholder

Press the lower section of hillholder


switch 1.
The k hillholder indicator lamp
goes out and the function of the hillholder is deactivated.

2
3

i
The hillholder remains primed as long
as upper section of switch 1 is
latched.
When you apply the parking brake,
the k hillholder indicator lamp in
the instrument panel goes out. The hillholder function is no longer active but
remains in the primed state.

4
5
6
7
8
9

131

Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting

1 Information about switching on lights and


turn signals ( page 59).

Light switch

There may be a slight deviation in the


function of the light switches described
here due to legal requirements in all
countries concerned.

In countries where traffic drives on the


side of the road opposite to that which
is normal in the country where the vehicle was registered, there is a danger of
oncoming vehicles becoming dazzled
due to the symmetry of the dippedbeam headlamps.

3
M

Lights off

Side lamps, switch illumination

Dipped or main-beam headlamps on

Front foglamp indicator lamp


(green)

Rear foglamp indicator lamp


(yellow)

7
8
9

132

For journeys in these countries, mask


the headlamps ( page 517).

Controls in detail
Lighting

Headlamp range control


Depending on the laden state of the vehicle, the focus of the dipped-beam headlamps can rise or fall. Always adjust the
headlamp range control in such a way that
oncoming vehicles are not dazzled.

Reducing headlamp range

Switching on the front foglamps

Turn thumbwheel from position 0


downwards until the dipped-beam
headlamps no longer dazzle oncoming
vehicles.

Setting headlamp range to neutral

Turn thumbwheel to position 0.

4
5

With dipped-beam headlamps on:


Pull light switch out onto first stop.
The green indicator lamp in the
light switch lights up.

6
7
8
9

133

Controls in detail
Lighting

1 Switching on rear foglamps


2
3

Combination switch

With dipped-beam headlamps and front


foglamps on:

The combination switch is located to the


left of the steering column.

Pull light switch out onto second stop.

Indicating change of direction


( see page 60).

The yellow indicator lamp in the


indicator lamp lights up.

Switching on main-beam headlamps


Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Turn the light switch to position B.
The dipped-beam headlamps are on.
Push the combination switch in direction 1 onto detent.
The A main-beam headlamp indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights
up.

4
5

Headlamp flasher
Pull the light switch in direction 2.

6
1 Main-beam headlamps
2 Headlamp flasher

7
8
9

134

Controls in detail
Lighting

Light switch unit


The light switch unit is equipped for various lighting functions. The light switch unit
is located on the left next to the multi-function steering wheel.

Work-area lamp

Load compartment light

Switching on

Switching on

Press the upper section of switch 1


1.

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Press the upper section of switch 2


F.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up.
Switching off
Press the upper section of switch 1
1.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out.
1 Work-area lamp
2 Load compartment light
3 Rotating beacon lamp
4 Headlamp cleaning system

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up.

Switching off
Press the upper section of switch 2
F.

The indicator lamp in the switch goes


out.

The work-area lamp switches off automatically if the vehicle accelerates.

7
8
9

135

Controls in detail
Lighting
Rotating beacon lamp

Switching on

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Press the upper section of switch 3


D.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up.

4
5

1 Work-area lamp
2 Load compartment light
3 Rotating beacon lamp
4 Headlamp cleaning system

Switching off
Press the upper section of switch 3
D.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out.

6
7
8
9

136

Headlamp cleaning system


Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Press the upper section of switch 4
Y.
The headlamp cleaning system sprays
washer fluid onto both headlamps for
approximately 0.3 seconds.

Controls in detail
Lighting

Hazard warning lamps


The hazard warning lamps will still operate
if the steering lock is in position 0.

Switching on hazard warning lamps

Switching off hazard warning lamps

Press switch 1.

Press switch 1 again.

The indicator lamp in the hazard warning lamp switch, the turn signal indicator lamps in the instrument panel and
all turn signals on the vehicle flash.

The indicator lamp in the hazard warning lamp switch, the turn signal indicator lamps in the instrument panel and
all turn signals on the vehicle go out.

1
2
3
4
5

1 Hazard warning lamp switch

6
7
8
9

137

Controls in detail
Lighting

1
2
3
4

Interior lighting

Interior lighting switches

In the vehicle interior there are four different types of lighting:


Interior lighting
Reading lamp
Nightlight (green)
Ambient lighting (blue)
The different modes of lighting can be
switched on and regulated individually.

5
6

i
If the voltage supply drops below 22 V,
the electronics system switches the interior lighting off.

7
8
9

138

Co-driver's door control panel


Switch unit above windscreen

1 Ambient lighting
2 Driver's reading lamp
3 Interior lighting
4 No interior lighting when door open
5 Nightlight

3 Interior lighting
6 Co-driver's reading lamp

Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on interior lighting
Briefly touch switch 3 U.

i
From a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h), the electronics system
dims the cab lighting.

Berth switch unit

3 Interior lighting
7 Central interior lighting off switch

When you open a door, the interior and


entry lights light up. The lighting goes
out after approximately 30 minutes,
even if one of the doors is still open.

Switching lighting on when vehicle is in


motion
Briefly touch switch 3 U.
The electronics system switches the interior lighting on with reduced brightness.

1
2
3

i
The level of brightness can be adjusted
while the vehicle is motion.

4
5

Dimming interior lighting


Hold down switch 3 U.
The brightness is reduced. Dimming
continues for as long as the switch is
held down. Once dimming is reduced to
the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.

6
7
8
9

139

Controls in detail
Lighting

1 Switching off interior lighting


Briefly touch switch 3 U.

Activating "no interior lighting when


door open" function

The interior lighting goes out.

2
or

3
4
5

Press and hold switch 4 L in the


switch unit above the windscreen until
a brief signal sounds.

Driver's and co-driver's reading lamp


If the interior and entry lights are to remain
off when the doors are opened:
Press and hold switch 4 L in the
switch unit above the windscreen until
a brief signal sounds.

7
8
9

140

If you switch the interior lights on before opening the door, they remain on.
Deactivating "no interior lighting when
door open" function

Press switch 7 I in berth switch


unit.

When you start the engine, the interior


lighting switches on by the door opening, is switched off by the electronics
system.

The switch for the driver's reading lamp


2 S is located in the switch unit above
the windscreen. The switch for the co-driver's reading lamp 6 S is located in the
control panel of the co-driver's door.

Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on reading lamp

Switching off reading lamp

Switching off nightlight

Briefly touch switch 2 S


or 6 S.

Briefly touch switch 2 S


or 6 S.

Press switch 5 Q in the switch


unit above the windscreen.

The respective reading lamp lights up.

The respective reading lamp goes out.

The nightlight goes out.

Dimming reading lamp

Nightlight (green)

Press and hold switch 2 S


or 6 S.

The nightlight or green light is dazzle-free


and intended to aid orientation while the
vehicle is in motion.

The brightness is reduced. Dimming


continues for as long as the switch is
held down. Once dimming is reduced to
the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.

Switching on the nightlight

Press switch 5 Q in the switch


unit above the windscreen.

The nightlight lights up.

7
8
9

141

Controls in detail
Lighting

1 Ambient lighting (blue)


2

The ambient lighting is intended for the vehicle when it is parked.

Switching off ambient lighting

Press and hold switch 1 O in the


switch unit above the windscreen.

Briefly touch switch 1 O in the


switch unit above the windscreen.

The brightness is reduced. Dimming


continues for as long as the switch is
held down. Once dimming is reduced to
the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.

3
4
5
6 Switching on ambient lighting
7

Dimming ambient lighting

Briefly touch switch 1 O in the


switch unit above the windscreen.

8
9

142

The ambient lighting goes out.

Controls in detail
Lighting

Instrument lighting

Brighter

The instrument lighting consists of the instrument panel lighting and switch illumination.

Press and hold the button until required degree of brightness has been
achieved.

Dimming instrument lighting

Darker

The degree of instrument lighting brightness can be adjusted using the


and buttons in the instrument panel.

Press and hold the button until required degree of brightness has been
achieved.

Adjustable reading lamp

2
3
4
5

Reading lamp

Switching on

Turn switch cover to position 1.


Switching off

Turn switch cover to position 2.

8
9

143

Controls in detail
Instrument panel
Instrument panel

1
2

Total distance recorder

Rev counter

Depending on the country, the speed and


distance travelled are recorded in miles or
kilometres.

The rev counter shows the engine speed.


The scale is split into three areas.

3 Resetting the trip meter


4

Press and hold button the button


in the instrument panel until the trip
meter is reset to zero.

5
6

1 Trip meter
2 Total distance recorder

7
8
9

144

Controls in detail
Instrument panel

1 Green
2 Yellow

Economical operating range


Engine brake operating range

Economical operating range

The econometer is active

Operation of the vehicle in the economical


range has the following effects

at speeds above 12 mph ( 20 km/h)

low fuel consumption

3 Red

Overrevving range

low wear and tear

4 Green diode
strip

Econometer

In some exceptional circumstances, operation outside the economical range may be


necessary, for example:

if the relation between the engine


speed and the selected gear does not
appear to be correct at an almost constant speed

2
3

The econometer does not light up


if the engine speed is at an economical
level in terms of fuel consumption

on gradients

On vehicles that are used predominantly for long distance driving, the rev
counter features an econometer.

when overtaking

if the speed drops below 6 mph


(10 km/h)

Econometer

Several segments of the econometer light


up depending on the how much the engine
is placed under load. This range indicates
the most economical rev range in terms of
fuel consumption.

Vehicles with Telligent automatic


gearshift:
In the automatic mode of operation

Avoid overrevving range.


This could lead to engine damage.

7
8
9

145

Controls in detail
Instrument panel

1 The econometer goes out


2

Driving with the econometer

two seconds after the engine has


reached the displayed speed range
if high output is requested from the engine

3 if the clutch pedal is depressed for


longer than five seconds

4 if neutral is selected at the transmission for longer than five seconds.

5
6
7
8
9

146

If the engine speed is higher than the economical speed range indicated:

If the engine speed is lower than the economical speed range indicated:

select a higher gear.

select a lower gear.

Controls in detail
Instrument panel

Outside temperature display

Even if the outside temperature display


shows temperatures that are just above
freezing point, the roads could still be icy.
This applies in particular to shaded areas or
bridges.

Risk of accident

The display in the rev counter can show the


outside temperature in two temperature
scales.
Degrees Celsius (C)
Degrees Fahrenheit (F)
Changing the unit of measurement for
temperature ( page 205).

Extreme temperature changes are not


shown in the outside temperature display
immediately. This prevents an incorrect
reading as a result of the engine heat when
the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.

1 Outside temperature display

3
4
5
6

i
Extreme temperature changes are not
shown in the outside temperature display immediately. This prevents an incorrect reading as a result of the
engine heat when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.

7
8
9

147

Controls in detail
Instrument panel

1
2

Time

Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the quantity of fuel in
all fuel tanks of the vehicle.

The display in the rev counter can show the


time in two different ways depending on
requirement.

If the fuel volume drops to 14% of the maximum level, an event message is shown in
the multi-function display indicating this.

12 hour mode

3 24 hour mode
Changing clock mode ( page 206).

4
5
6

1 12 hour clock mode

7
8
9

148

Controls in detail
Instrument panel

i
The volume of fuel in litres and the distance that can be travelled with that
amount of fuel can be called up in the
driver information system in the trip
computer menu ( page 166).

Reservoir pressure for brake


circuits 1 and 2
The instrument shows the pressure in the
brake circuit with the least amount of pressure. The brake circuit in question is
shown by an active indicator lamp.
If the reservoir pressure in one of the brake
circuits drops below 6.8 bar, an event
message is shown in the multi-function display indicating this.

2
3
4
1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 1
2 Brake circuit indicator lamp 2

The reservoir pressure of both brake circuits can be called up in the monitoring
info menu ( page 162).

6
7
8
9

149

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Driver information system

1 The driver information system is activated


when the key in the ignition lock is in
position 2.

Maintenance

2 The driver information system features the


following functions:

5
6
7

Page
Information about vehicle
operation
Digital speedometer

160

Monitoring info

161

Trip computer

166

Control functions
Navigation system
Operating audio equipment

359

Mobile telephone

350

Reading Fleetboard text


message

169

Auxiliary heating

177

Wakeup call

178

8
9

Viewing/confirming service
due dates

171

Settings

3
4

Page

150

Display configuration

183

Activating menu

183

Monitoring load

189

Clock

197

Service products

198

Changing units of measurement

205

Page
Changing language

182

Transmission control back up


mode

189

Diagnostics

207

Display of malfunctions
Event message

175

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Risk of accident

Use the driver information system only if the


traffic situation permits it. Attention would
otherwise be drawn away too much.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is
covering a distance of some 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

The driver information system shows all information in the multi-function display. If
necessary, this information may be accompanied by acoustic signals.

Structure

The driver information system features various menus.

The number of menus depends on

There are several functions combined in


each of the menus under the main category. In the Audio menu, for example, there
are functions for operating the radio or the
CD player. In the Monitoring info menu,
all the main information dealing with operation can be called up. In the Settings
menu, all functions are found for making
adjustments to the display and for the vehicle.

whether the vehicle is stationary or


in motion

the equipment level of the vehicle

which additional menus in the Settings menu, sub-menu Configuration have been activated

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

151

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Driver information system menus

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

152

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Menu

Page

Menu

1 Actros info

160

2 Monitoring info

161

Configuration

184

3 Trip computer

166

Load

189

Time

197

4 Navigation

Page

d Settings

183

5 Audio

169

Service products

198

6 Telephone

169

Units

205

7 New SMS message


(Fleetboard)

169

8 Maintenance

171

MB item number

209

9 Event info

175

Events

210

a Auxiliary heating

177

Binary values

213

b Alarm

178

Measured values1

213

c Language

182

e Transmission control

207

f Diagnostics

207

2
3
4
5
6
7

1 For service personnel only

8
9

153

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

User guidance

If the multi-function display shows the


symbol ? 6, you can make a selection or adjustment using the + and
- buttons on the multi-function
steering wheel. However, volume control using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel is then no longer possible.

The user guidance at the top of the multifunction display shows where you are in
the driver information system and which
steering wheel buttons should be used for
navigation.
The name of the menu 3 is shown in
the centre of the multi-function display
The number 13 2 to the left of the
menu name shows that the Settings
menu is the 13th in the driver information system
The number 1 5 to the right of the
menu name shows that the list is the
first display/function in the Settings
menu

8
9

154

1 Symbol for steering wheel and


buttons
2 Menu number
3 Menu name
4 Symbol for steering wheel j and
k buttons
5 Display/function number
6 Symbol for steering wheel and
buttons

The quantity and numbering of the


menus can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
System navigation

Menu navigation

The structure of the driver information system is circular.

The structure within the menus is usually


circular as well.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.
The display shows the next menu.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly.
Each time the button is pressed, the
display shows the next menu until it returns to the start of the loop.

i
In the Settings, Language and Diagnostics menus, a menu list is displayed
instead of the functions.
You can navigate in the menu list using
the + and - steering wheel buttons. The multi-function display shows
the ? symbol next to the menu list.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system shows
the next function or item of information.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly.
Each time the button is pressed, the
multi-function display shows the next
function until it returns to the start of
the loop.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

155

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1
2
3

Multi-function display
The multi-function display is split up into
set areas. The gear indicator is always displayed. All other displays show the function of a vehicle system or information that
is shown automatically by the driver information system.

Function

Page

1 User guidance

154

2 Digital speed display

160

3 Level control display

186

4 Gear indicator

219

5 Reminder with system


symbol

160

1 Vehicles with Telligent gearshift and Telligent


automatic gearshift

5
6
7
8
9

156

Function
6 Differential lock display

Page
185

Starting-off aid switched


on display (6x2 vehicles)

296

Starting-off aid switched


on display (6x2/4 vehicles)

297

Hendrickson leading axle


raised display

297

Trailing axle raised display


(vehicles with pneumatic
suspension)

298

Nummek axle raised display (vehicles with pneumatic suspension)

299

7 Cruise control/Limiter/
ART display

267

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Event message
If there are malfunctions on the vehicle,
the driver information system informs the
driver with an event message. The background colour of the message indicates
the degree of importance in terms of operational and road safety of the vehicle. The
driver must acknowledge this message
( page 159). If more than one message is
displayed, the driver information system
shows the messages in succession.
If the malfunctions are serious, a warning
buzzer and a STOP lamp may accompany
the event message.

Risk of accident

If the STOP lamp lights up, the operational


and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised

Event message with red status display


Risk of accident

Stop the engine

The operational and road safety of the vehicle is at risk if there is a message with red
status display.

When bringing the vehicle to a halt, take the


traffic situation into consideration.

The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change

Rectify faults before starting a journey.

If it is possible to continue driving, adjust driving style respectively

Bring the vehicle to a halt in all cases

5
Red

Adjust driving style as appropriate or bring vehicle to a halt.

Carry out action in accordance


with the event message.
Rectify fault immediately. Have
affected system checked.

8
9

157

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Red

The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified


specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work
on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

3
4
5

Continuing the journey

may lead in some circumstances to vehicle damage

may mean in some circumstances that legal requirements are not being adhered
to

8
9

158

Event message with yellow status


display
Yellow

Adjust driving style.


Carry out action in accordance
with the event message.
Have the fault rectified as soon as
possible.
Maintenance work should always
be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work
on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

!
The operational and road safety of the
vehicle is impaired.
The vehicle's driving and braking
characteristics may change
Adjust driving style

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Event message with action to be carried out

Event message with symbol

Event message for acknowledgement


Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
or
Press the button in the instrument panel.

1 Red status display


2 System abbreviation/Symbol
( page 208)
3 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/Semitrailer
4 Functional restriction
5 Instructions
6 Reminder ( page 160)

2 Coolant temperature symbol


7 Yellow status display
8 Reminder

1
2
3

The message is cleared. The system


abbreviation is shown in the reminder
section.

If the fault is not rectified the next time


the engine is started, the driver information system repeats the event message.

6
7
8
9

159

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Reminder
2
3
4

In order that the acknowledged event message is not forgotten, the driver information system shows the relevant symbol or
system abbreviation in the reminder section. If there are several messages that
must be displayed due to legal requirements, the reminder function shows these
one after the other in the reminder section.

Actros Info menu

Faults that must be displayed due to legal requirements have a red or yellow
background.

In the Actros Info menu you can choose between three different displays:

The messages stored in the reminder


section can be viewed in the Event-Info
menu ( page 175).

Digital speed display

Neutral
Date

Symbols:

Collective symbol for malfunctions

BS

There are faults that must be


displayed due to legal requirements. Example: ABS.

7
Digital speed display

8
9

160

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Changing Actros Info menu display

After the functional check, the multifunction display always shows the
menu that was last selected.

Call up the Actros Info menu.

Calling up the Actros Info menu

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows the desired display.

Monitoring info menu


In the Monitoring info menu you can call up
information which is important for the operation of the vehicle.
Page

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Coolant temperature

162

Reservoir pressure

162

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Engine oil level

163

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel continually until the Actros Info menu is shown
in the multi-function display.

Axle load indicator

163

Load info

165

Trailer ID

165

Converter and clutch unit temperature

166

2
3
4
5
6
7

i
Further information can be called up by
selecting the Monitoring info sub-menu
from the Diagnostics menu.

8
9

161

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Calling up the Monitoring info menu

Calling up the coolant temperature

Calling up the reservoir pressure

Call up the Monitoring info menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows Coolant temperature.

1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 1


2 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 2

2
3
4

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows Monitoring info.

7
8
9

162

Call up the Monitoring info menu.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows Brake pressure.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Calling up the engine oil level

Topping up engine oil ( page 418).

i
Do not top up engine oil unless prompted to do so.

Calling up the axle load indicator

Vehicles with axle load measurement device:

Engine oil level display, oil level 3.5 l

Call up the Monitoring info menu.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows Oil level.

The axle load measuring device determines the axle load from the pressure in
the air springs when the vehicle chassis is
in the driving position.

4
Axle load indicator

Set chassis to driving position


( page 294).

Switch off starting-off aid


( page 296).

Call up the Monitoring info menu.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows Axle load Overall.

7
8
9

163

Controls in detail
Driver information system

The axle load measuring device is not


calibrated nor is it a system capable of
calibration. The measured data only
provides an approximate guide which is
not suitable for official use.

3
4
5
6

If the chassis is not in the driving position when the axle load indicator is selected, the arrows in the level control
display flash
. The multi-function
display does not show the axle loads.
If there is a notable difference between
the axle load indicator and the weighbridge results, the axle load indicator
can be adjusted.

Setting the axle load indicator

Indicator lamps 1 and 2 should not


light up.
Press
"M1" 5 for the 1st axle
"M2" 6 for the 2nd axle
"Driving position" 7 for the
3rd axle
Drive vehicle onto single axle weighbridge.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Call up the axle load indicator.

8
9

164

and hold.

Level control operating unit

Set chassis to driving position


( page 294).

Press button 3 or 4 to switch off level control operating unit.

To increase the displayed value, press


and hold the "Raise" button 8 until the
displayed value equals the value indicated by the weighbridge.
or
To decrease the displayed value, press
and hold the "Lower" button 9 until
the displayed value equals the value indicated by the weighbridge

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Calling up the load info

Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in accordance with ISO 11992 and associated
sensor technology:

The trailer ID is the chassis number of


the trailer.

The multi-function display can show the


following information depending on the
equipment level of the trailer or semitrailer:

3
4

Load temperature
Load pressure
Fluid load volume
Trailer ID
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring
( page 378).

Load temperature

Call up the Monitoring info menu.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Load.
Calling up the trailer ID
Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in accordance with ISO 11992:

5
6

Trailer ID

Call up the Monitoring info menu.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Trailer ID.

7
8
9

165

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Calling up the converter and clutch unit


temperature

Vehicles with converter and clutch unit:

Trip data

Trip computer menu


In the trip computer menu you can call up
the following information
Page

3
4

7
8

Converter temperature display

Call up the Monitoring info menu.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows WSK temperature.

166

duration of journey in hours

166

average speed in kilometres per hour

Fuel level and range

168

average fuel consumption in litres per


100 kilometres

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

distance travelled in kilometres

Trip data

Calling up the trip computer

The trip data comprises:

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Trip computer.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
The trip data can be viewed

Calling up the trip data

After reset from the point at which


the data was last reset ( page 167)

Call up the trip computer.

A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can


alter the reset time.

After start if the key has been removed from the ignition lock for longer
than four hours

The trip data After reset is shown in


the multi-function display.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows the trip data After start.
Resetting trip data
After start, automatically
The driver information system resets the
trip data After start if

Trip data after start

1
2

After start, manually


Call up the trip computer.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Trip computer, After start.

Press the l button in the instrument panel and hold until the trip data
is reset After start.

the ignition lock is in position 0 for


longer than four hours or

5
6
7

the key has been removed from the ignition lock for longer than four hours

8
9

167

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 After reset, manually

Calling up the fuel level and range

Call up the trip computer.

2
3

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to select
the next menu.

The multi-function display shows the


trip data After reset.
Press the l button in the instrument panel and hold until the trip data
After reset is reset.

4 Fuel level and range


This function shows the following informa-

5 tion in the multi-function display:


current tank contents in litres

Fuel level and range

Call up the trip computer.

6 estimated range in kilometres with cur- Press the j button on the multirent fuel level

7
8
9

168

Quitting trip computer

function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows


Tank contents and Range.

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Audio menu
Using the functions in the audio menu, you
can operate the basic functions of the audio equipment ( page 359).

Telephone menu

New SMS menu

Vehicles with hands-free system:

Vehicles with FleetBoard :

Using the functions in the telephone menu,


you can operate the basic functions of a
mobile telephone connected to a handsfree system ( page 350).

The driver information system indicates in


the reminder section of the multi-function
display when a text message has been received by FleetBoard. If you wish to read
the text message, call it up in the new SMS
menu.

Risk of accident

2
3
4

Operating mobile telephones that have an


aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.

As a result, the operating reliability and road


safety is at considerable risk.

Only use the telephone with a permanently


installed hands-free system and if the traffic
conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.

7
Receiving several text messages

8
9

169

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Calling up the New SMS menu


2
3

Risk of accident

The priority is to focus your attention on the


traffic conditions. Only read the text messages if the traffic situation permits it.

4 With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

5
6
7

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Deleting SMS

Each text message consists of at least


2 pages.

The last page of a text message is the


prompt to delete the message.

The last page of the text message is the


prompt to delete the message.
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel.

i
The multi-function display only shows
the next text message once the current
text message has been deleted.

The multi-function display shows the


next page of the text message.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows New SMS.
The multi-function display shows the
first page of the text message.
SMS delete command

8
9

170

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The selection bar is on Yes.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system deletes
the current text message and displays
the next one.
If no other text messages are stored in
the system, the multi-function display
shows: No SMS message.

Maintenance menu

The Maintenance menu serves as a means


of

calling up the service due dates for the


vehicle and the assemblies calculated
by the Telligent maintenance system

confirming the completion of service


work

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The multi-function display shows the


service due dates in individual submenus in the order they are due. The
number 1 in the menu list shows
which sub-menu you are in.

The driver information system deletes


the current text message and moves on
to the next menu.

Further service information can be


found in the Diagnostics menu, in the
Service Info submenu.

or

Calling up the Maintenance menu

1 Item that requires service


2 Item designation
3 Estimated service due date
4 Distance remaining

5
6

!
If you do not keep to the service due
dates, this could lead to the vehicle or
assemblies becoming damaged. Always keep to the schedule for service
work.

7
8
9

171

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

2
3
4
5

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.


Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows the Maintenance menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the service due dates for individual
items.

If the Telligent maintenance system is


unable to calculate the service due
date, the multi-function display shows
--.--.-- instead of the service due
date.

8
9

172

The Telligent maintenance system automatically indicates the service due dates
14 days in advance.
Furthermore, the maintenance system indicates
current service due dates
exceeded service due dates
particularly late service due dates in
the case of the brake system

i
6

Service note

Each time you turn the ignition lock to


position 2, the multi-function display
shows the service messages for approaching or current service due dates.

If you do not acknowledge a service


message ( page 173), the multi-function display always show it for approximately 20 seconds.

Risk of accident

If you override a service note, you could be


putting the operational reliability and road
safety of the vehicle at risk. There is a danger of important assemblies, such as the
brake system, failing due to worn parts and
this could lead to an accident. Always adhere to the scheduled service due dates.

!
If the service work is not carried out at
the time specified, the result could be
increased wear and damage to the vehicle or assemblies.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Acknowledging service message

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel
or
Press the button in the instrument
panel.

Approaching service due date

Service due date passed

2
3

In the case of an approaching, current


or late service due date, the service
4

message is cleared.

5
6
7
8
Current service due date

Particularly late service due date (brake


system)

173

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Risk of accident

There is a danger of the brake system failing


as a result of worn brake linings.

Have the brake system repaired immediately by a qualified specialist workshop.

4
5
6
7
8

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The service message for a particularly late
service due date relating to the brake system cannot be acknowledged using the
steering wheel buttons. The service message cannot be deleted. It remains in the
multi-function display.

174

Confirming completed service work

!
If you
confirm that service work has been
carried out when this is not the
case, increased wear and even
damage to the vehicle or assemblies could be the result
confirm a current or an approaching
service due date, the Telligent
maintenance system recalculates
the date. To avoid damage to the
vehicle or assemblies, the relevant
service work may need to be carried out immediately.
Do not confirm service work until the
specified service work has been carried
out.

1 Reset button

i
Use a pointed object, such as a pen to
press the reset button in the instrument
panel.
Call up the Maintenance menu.
Press and hold the j or k button on the multi-function steering
wheel until the driver information system in the multi-function display shows
the desired service due date.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Press and hold reset button in the instrument panel for one second.
The driver information system resets
the displayed service due date. The
multi-function display shows --.--.--.

!
Once you have confirmed a service,
check whether the oil grade and viscosity (SAE grade) is the same as that
which has been used in the assembly.
If necessary, adjust the setting
( page 198).
Quitting maintenance menu

Event info menu

Calling up the Event info menu

The Event info menu serves as a means of


selecting the events stored in the reminder
section. Unlike the display of a new event,
only the control unit abbreviation/ symbol
and the fault location have a red or yellow
background.
If the cause of the event is no longer
present while you are viewing the information, the driver information system removes the event from the display.

2
3
4
1 Control unit abbreviation
2 Functional restriction
3 Reminder
4 Instructions

5
6

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to select
the next menu.

7
8
9

175

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1
2

Risk of accident

The priority is to focus your attention on the


traffic conditions. Only read the event info if
the traffic situation permits it.

3
4
5
6

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Event info.

7
8
9

176

Quitting event info menu

The driver information system shows


the last acknowledged event in the
multi-function display.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to select
the next menu.

The number in the menu list next to the


arrow symbol shows the number of
events.
If there is no new event, the multi-function display shows No malfunctions.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
further events.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Switching on auxiliary heating

Vehicles with auxiliary heating:

Risk of fire and poisoning

Continuous heating ( page 328),

The Auxiliary heating menu serves as a


means of

Timed heating ( page 332),

The auxiliary heating may not be used in enclosed spaces such as garages or workshops unless there is suitable extraction,
whether in timer or preselected mode, due
to the risk of poisoning and suffocation.

Auxiliary heating menu

Checking the operating data of the auxiliary heating


Activating the preselected heating requirements
Adjustment
of the heating temperature
of the heating duration and
the remaining time of the auxiliary
heating on the timer or preselected
operation

Preselected heating ( page 334).

At filling stations and tanking systems, the


auxiliary heating must be switched off due
to the risk of explosion.
In places where vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g. in the vicinity of fuel, coal, wood
dust and grain stores or similar), the auxiliary heating must be switched off.
Vehicles for the transportation of hazardous
goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

177

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Calling up the auxiliary heating menu

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Auxiliary heating.

3
4
5
6
7
8

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Operating data for auxiliary heating, preselect 1

Risk of accident

The priority is to focus your attention on the


traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings
on the auxiliary heating when the vehicle is
stationary.

178

Alarm menu
There is an alarm clock function integrated
in the instrument panel.
The alarm menu comprises the following:
Page
Setting alarm mode

179

or

Setting alarm time memory

180

Press the lower section of auxiliary


heating switch .

Setting alarm time

180

The multi-function display shows the current operating data depending on the selected mode of operation ( page 327).

There are three modes available:


Off
Radio
Buzzer

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Calling up the Alarm menu

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

The priority is to focus your attention on the


traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings
on the alarm when the vehicle is stationary.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Alarm.

Risk of accident

Setting alarm mode/switching alarm


off
Call up the Alarm menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Setting alarm mode.

Alarm menu

The selected alarm mode can be seen


in the change bar.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired alarm mode can
be seen in the highlight.

1
2

Radio
Buzzer

Off
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system accepts
the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

4
5

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

7
8
9

179

Controls in detail
Driver information system

If you would like to woken up by the radio, the ignition lock must be in position 1.

Setting alarm time memory


There are two memory slots for the alarm
time.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Set memory.
The highlight is on the selected memory slot.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to
change between the memory slots.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel.

5
6

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

1 Alarm time memory 2

180

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

Setting alarm time


Call up the alarm menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Set memory.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows Set
hour. The highlight is on hours.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired hour has been selected in the highlight.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows Set
minutes. The highlight is on minutes.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system accepts
the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

Switching off alarm

Press any button on the multi-function


steering wheel.
The alarm is turned off.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

4
5
6

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired minutes are
shown in the highlight.

7
8
9

181

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Changing language

The language menu serves as a means of


selecting the language for the multi-function display.

The Language menu can only be selected in the multi-function display when
the vehicle is stationary.

With the vehicle stationary and the hand


brake applied

The following languages are available in


the driver information system as standard:

If the language for the country in which


the vehicle was sold is English, only
English and German are available.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Language.

Language menu

German

4 English
5

Language of country in which vehicle


was sold

Other languages can be installed in the


driver information system by a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired
language.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system accepts


the chosen language and continues
onto the next menu.

8
9

182

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Settings menu
The settings menu serves as a means of
Page
Activating/deactivating

Page
Adjusting

Cruise control sound

184

Differential lock
permanent display

185

Level control permanent


display

186

Page

Activating menus

Load monitoring
restrictions

189

Diagnostics

188

Clock

197

Transmission control

189

Service fluid grades

198

Unit of temperature
measurement

205

Clock mode
12 h/24 h

206

The settings menu can only be selected


in the multi-function display when the
vehicle is stationary.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

183

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Calling up the Settings menu

Cruise control sound menu

The Cruise control sound menu serves as a


means of activating and deactivating the
acoustic signal during operation of the various driving systems:

Limiter
Cruise control
Telligent distance control (ART)

4
5 With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied

6
7

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.


Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Settings.

8
9

184

Calling up the Cruise control sound


menu
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Cruise control sound.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Activating

Permanent display of differential lock


and additional equipment

1
2

Deactivating

The Differential lock permanent display


menu serves as a means of activating the
display when the locks are disengaged.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The differential lock display shows operation of the following equipment:

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Quitting Cruise control sound menu


Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
menu.

Transfer case/through-drive lock


Differential lock

4
1 Differential lock permanent display

Power take-off

Leading/trailing axle

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.

Telligent distance control ( page 280).

8
9

185

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Selecting differential lock permanent


display

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.

Quitting differential lock permanent


display
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.

Level control permanent display


The Level control permanent display menu
serves as a means of activating the display
when the level control is switched off.
The level control display shows the status
and operation of the Telligent level control.
Telligent level control ( page 290).

5 Press the j or k button on the


6

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display


shows Differential lock permanent
display.

7 Activating
8

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


Deactivating

9 Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

186

1 Level control permanent display

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Selecting level control permanent
display
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the settings menu.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Level control permanent display.

Activating

Arrow buttons in radio mode menu

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio


equipment:

Deactivating
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The Arrow buttons in radio mode menu


serves as a means of assigning functions
to the arrow keys for radio operation
( page 362).

1
2
3
4

Quitting level control permanent display menu


Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
menu.

5
6

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.

7
8
9

187

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu


2
3

Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio


equipment:
The Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu
serves as a means of assigning functions
to the arrow keys for cassette operation
( page 365).

Diagnostics menu activation

Activating

Diagnostics menu activation can be selected using the Display diagnostics menu
function ( page 207).

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


Deactivating

Calling up diagnostics menu activation


With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu
( page 184).
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.

5
6

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Display diagnostics menu.

7
8
9

188

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


Quitting diagnostics menu activation
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.
Diagnostics menu ( page 207).

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Enabling transmission control back up
mode menu

Activating

Load temperature monitoring in


trailer/semitrailer, min./max. temperature

Trailer/semitrailer telematics with load


temperature monitoring system:

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The menu serves as means of adjusting the


thresholds for the load temperature monitoring system.

Quitting Transmission control back up


mode menu

Setting range: 125 C to +125 C.

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
menu.

The driver information system monitors


the load temperature. If the temperature
rises or drops, an event message indicates
the deviation.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Enable transmission control
backup mode.

Transmission control back up mode


( page 207).

Transmission control back up mode serves


as a means of activating the Transmission
control back up mode menu ( page 207)
for Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift.
Calling up the Transmission control
back up mode menu
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


Deactivating

4
5
6
7
8
9

189

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Calling up the Min. temperature menu


2

Adjusting lower threshold temperature

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

The min. temperature decreases in 1


increments.

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

3 Press the or button on the


4
5
6

To change the setting quickly, press


and hold the appropriate button.

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Load.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Min. temperature. The highlight
3 is on the lower threshold temperature.

Quitting min. temperature menu


1 Load temperature monitoring system
2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the Min. temperature menu.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The minimum temperature increases in


1 increments.

8
9

190

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the setting
menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to move on to the max.
temperature menu.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Calling up the maximum temperature
menu

Adjusting the upper threshold temperature

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

The maximum temperature decreases


in 1 increments.

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

i
To change the setting quickly, press
and hold the appropriate button.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Load.

Quitting the Max. temperature menu

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Max. temperature.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the Settings
menu.

The highlight 3 is on the upper threshold temperature.

1 Load temperature monitoring system


2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the max. temperature menu.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings.

The maximum temperature increases


in 1 increments.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

191

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Load pressure monitoring in trailer/


semitrailer, min./max. pressure

Trailer/semitrailer telematics with cargo


pressure monitoring:

The menu serves as means of adjusting the


thresholds for the load pressure monitoring system.

4
5

Calling up the Min. pressure menu


With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu
( page 184).

Setting range: 0 bar to 25 bar.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Load.

The driver information system monitors


the load pressure. If the pressure rises or
drops, an event message indicates the deviation.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Min.
pressure.
The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold pressure.

6
7
8
9

192

Adjusting the lower threshold pressure

1 Load pressure monitoring


2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the Min. pressure menu.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The minimum pressure increases in
0.1 bar increments.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The minimum pressure decreases in
0.1 bar increments.

i
To change the setting quickly, press
and hold the appropriate button.
Quitting the Min. pressure menu
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the Settings
menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to move on to the Max.
pressure menu.

Adjusting the upper threshold

1
2

Calling up the Max. pressure menu

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied
Call up the Settings menu
( page 184).

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Load.

1 Load pressure monitoring


2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Max.
pressure.

Call up the Max. pressure menu.

6
7

The highlight 3 is on the upper pressure threshold.

8
9

193

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The maximum pressure increases in


0.1 bar increments.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The maximum pressure decreases in


0.1 bar increments.

i
5

To change the setting quickly, press


and hold the appropriate button.

6 Quitting the Max. pressure menu


7

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the Settings
menu.

8 Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting.

194

Liquid load volume monitoring in


trailer/semitrailer, min./max.
quantity

Selecting the minimum volume

Trailer/semitrailer telematics with liquid


load volume monitoring:

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

The menu serves as means of adjusting the


thresholds for the liquid load volume monitoring system.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on load.

Setting range: 0 l to 128,510 l

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Min.
quantity.

The driver information system monitors


the liquid load volume. If the volume rises
or drops, an event message indicates the
deviation.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Adjusting the lower threshold

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


The minimum quantity decreases in 2 l
increments.

i
To change the setting quickly, press
and hold the appropriate button.
Quitting the Min. quantity menu
1 Liquid load volume monitoring
2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the Min. quantity menu.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The minimum quantity increases in 2 l
increments.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the Settings
menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to move on to the Max.
quantity menu.

Calling up the Max. quantity menu


With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu
( page 184).
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Load.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Max.
quantity.
The highlight 3 is on the upper threshold.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

195

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Adjusting the upper threshold


2

Call up the Max. quantity menu.

Quitting the Max. quantity menu

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the Settings
menu.

The maximum quantity increases in 2 l


increments.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The maximum quantity decreases in 2 l


increments.

5 1 Liquid load volume monitoring

2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight

6
7
8
9

196

To change the setting quickly, press


and hold the appropriate button.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Clock menu
The Clock menu is used to set the time in
the rev counter.
Setting time, hours
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu
( page 184).
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Clock.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Setting
clock, hours.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows the desired hour.

Setting clock, minutes

Call up the Settings menu.

Quitting menu for setting clock, hours

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Clock.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to select the previous
or next menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Setting
clock, minutes.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to select the minutes
setting or the start screen for the Settings menu.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows the desired minutes.

2
3
4
5
6
7

The highlight is on hours.

8
9

197

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Quitting the menu for setting clock, min- Fluids and lubricants menu
utes

2
3
4

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to select the previous
or next menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and select the start screen
of the Settings menu or the hours setting.

5
6
7
8
9

198

The fluids and lubricants menu serves as


means of setting the properties of the fluids and lubricants.

!
If you make changes to the properties
of the fluids and lubricants, the Telligent maintenance system modifies
the service due dates accordingly.
To avoid damage to the vehicle assemblies, the properties specified for the
fluids and lubricants must be the same
as those of the fluids and lubricants actually used.

The following settings are possible:


Page
Fuel sulphur content/
biodiesel fuel (FAME)

199

Engine oil viscosity

200

Engine oil grade

202

Transmission oil grade

203

Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Fuel sulphur content

Selecting fuel sulphur content display

For operation of the vehicle, the sulphur


content of the diesel in the vehicle must be
entered.

If the sulphur content entered for the


fluid/lubricant is not the same as the
sulphur content of the fuel used, there
is a danger of the engine becoming
damaged.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

A higher sulphur level accelerates the


ageing process of the engine oil. The
Telligent maintenance system calculates
the date for engine oil change on the basic
of the sulphur level specified.
Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart
( page 567).

Biodiesel (FAME)

!
If you use biodiesel (FAME), you must
select FAME in the fluids and lubricants/
fuel sulphur content menu. This is also
required for a mixture of conventional
diesel fuels and biodiesel fuels. The periods for changing engine oil and engine oil filters are more frequent than
for conventional diesel fuels with low
sulphur content ( page 564).

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/ lubricants.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Fuel sulphur
content.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

199

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Changing fuel sulphur content

Select the fuel sulphur content display


( page 199).
Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired fuel
sulphur content is shown in the multifunction display or until FAME is shown
if biodiesel is being used.

2
3
4
5

To press the reset button in the instrument panel, use a pointed object, such
as a pen.

Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart


( page 567).

The fuel sulphur level or FAME (if


biodiesel is used) as seen on the
screen is then set.
Quitting the fuel sulphur level display
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next menu
or
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next display.

8
9

200

Engine oil viscosity display


The engine oil viscosity value in the fluids/
lubricants menu must be the same as the
viscosity class (SAE class) of the oil in the
engine.

!
Always use a viscosity class appropriate for the ambient temperature
( page 558).
Engine oil grade display ( page 202).
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Select engine oil viscosity display
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied

Changing engine oil viscosity

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to


press the reset button in the instrument panel.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/lubricants.

Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).

Press the j button until the multifunction display shows Engine oil
viscosity.

Select engine oil viscosity display.

Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired engine oil
viscosity is shown in the multi-function
display.

2
3

The engine oil viscosity displayed is


set.

4
Quitting the engine oil viscosity display
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next menu

or

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next display.

7
8
9

201

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Engine oil grade display


2
3
4

The engine oil grade must be set in accordance with the data sheet values from
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products. The higher the data sheet value,
the higher the engine oil grade level. The
data sheet value in the fluids/ lubricants
menu must be the same as that of the engine oil actually used.

5
6
7

Risk of engine damage. If possible, do


not mix engine oils of different grades.
If you mix engine oils of different
grades, the data from the poorest
grade must be entered in the fluids/ lubricants menu. The periods for changing the engine oil are more frequent
compared with those for engine oil of
the same grade.

8
9

202

Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).


Engine oil viscosity menu ( page 200).
Calling up the Engine oil grade menu
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu
( page 184).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/lubricants.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Engine oil
grade.

Changing the engine oil grade

i
Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to
press the reset button in the instrument panel.
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 556).

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Call up the Engine oil grade menu
( page 202).
Press the reset button in the instrument panel until the multi-function display shows the desired engine oil
grade.
The engine oil grade shown in the multifunction display is now set.
Quitting the Engine oil grade menu
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next display.

Transmission oil grade menu


The transmission oil grade must be set in
accordance with the data sheet values
from Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products. The higher the data
sheet value, the higher the transmission oil
grade level. The data sheet value in the
fluids/lubricants menu must be the same
as that of the transmission oil actually
used.

!
Danger of transmission damage. If possible, do not mix transmission oils of
different grades. If you mix transmission oils of different grades, the data
from the poorest grade must be entered in the Fluids/lubricants menu.

The periods for changing the transmission oil are more frequent compared
with those for transmission oil of the
same quality.

1
2

Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).

Call up the Transmission oil grade


menu

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel continually until the highlight is on Fluids/lubrications.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Transmission
oil grade.

203

7
8
9

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Changing the transmission oil grade


i
Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to
2
press the reset button in the instrument panel.

Observe the "Service products and capacities" section ( page 569).

4
5
6
7
8
9

204

Call up the Transmission oil grade


menu.

Quitting the transmission oil grade


menu

Press and hold the reset button (for


approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired transmission oil grade is shown in the multifunction display.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next menu

The transmission oil grade shown in the


multi-function display is now set.

or
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to select
the previous or next display.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Units menu
The units menu serves as a means of
switching
the unit of temperature measurement
between C/F
the clock mode between 12 h/24 h
Units menu, temperature unit
The menu is used to specify the way temperature is displayed for the entire instrument panel.
The following modes are available:
Degrees Celsius (C)
Degrees Fahrenheit (F)

Calling up the Units menu, Temperature unit

Changing the temperature unit

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Units.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Units
Temperature unit:.
The highlight 1 is on the current setting.

Degrees Celsius (C) display

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Degrees Fahrenheit (F) display


Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

7
8
9

205

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Quitting the temperature unit display


2

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to move on to the next
menu.

3 Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the display.

4
12 h/24 h

Call up the Settings menu


( page 184).
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Units.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Units
Clock mode.
The highlight 1 is on the current setting.
12 hour mode

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The clock display in the instrument


panel is in 12 hour mode

8
9

206

24 hour mode
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The clock display in the instrument
panel is in 24 hour mode
Quitting the menu for setting the clock
mode
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to select the previous
or next menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to quit the display.

Controls in detail
Driver information system

Transmission control back up mode


menu
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift:
If there is a malfunction or complete failure
of
the gearbox electronics

Diagnostics menu
The Diagnostics menu is used in fault finding. It comprises a list of all the control
units installed in the vehicle which will vary
depending on the equipment level.
The following information is available for
each control unit:

the drive control

Function

the gearshift unit

MB item number

209

the gearbox signal wire

Events

210

you can still reach a workshop using the


transmission control back up mode.

Binary values

213

Measured values

213

Deleting events

212

Page

The Diagnostics menu can only be selected


when the vehicle is stationary
when the Settings menu/
Configuration is activated
( page 184)

2
3
4

!
Check event menus of all control units
at regular intervals for events. Rectify
any faults in the stored events before
commencing a journey.

The Transmission control back up


mode menu can only be selected once
it has been activated in the Settings
menu.

5
6
7
8

The gearshift detects if there is a need


for substitute operation and indicates
when transmission control back up
mode is selected with an event message.

207

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Control unit abbreviations


2
3

5
6
7

System

Abbreviations

System

GS

Telligent gearshift

MS

Modular switch panel

Abbreviations

System

AG

Automatic gearshift

HM

Rear module

NOX

APU

Air-Process-Unit

HPS

Hydraulic-pneumatic
gearshift

Exhaust emission
treatment (DeNOx)

NR

Telligent level control

PFA

Particulate filter system

PSM

Programmable special
module

ART

Abbreviations

BS

Telligent distance
control
Battery isolation switch

EAB

Electronic trailer brake

EDW

Anti-theft alarm system

FLA

Flame-start system

FM

Front module

FR

Drive control

GM

General module

208

Heating control/air
conditioning

INS

Instrument panel

KB

Clutch mechanism

RAD

Radio

KOM

Communication
interface

RS

Retarder control

SPA

Lane assist

KS

Clutch control

SRS

Safety restraint system

KSA

Convenience closing
system

MR

Telligent engine control

Telligent brake system

BTS

HZR

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Calling up the Diagnostics menu

Abbreviations

System

TCO

Tachograph

TEL

Telephone, hands-free
system

TMB

Door module, co-driver's


door

TMF

Door module, driver's


door

TP

Telematics platform

WR

Telligent active roll


stabilizer

WS

Telligent maintenance
system

WSK

Converter and clutch


unit

ZDS

Central data memory

ZHE

Auxiliary heating

ZL

Telligent trailing axle

MB item number
The MB item number identifies the control
unit.

Selecting the MB item number


With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Diagnostics menu.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied
Turn the key in ignition lock to
position 2.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Diagnostics.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on the desired control unit
abbreviation.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows the system abbreviation and the MB item no.
menu list.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

209

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Press the or button on the

multi-function steering wheel until the


highlight is on MB item no.

2 Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

3
4
5
6

The multi-function display shows the


MB item number.
Events menu
In the Events menu, the driver information
system stores all system malfunctions for
a period of 2.5 days. A Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre can carry out a diagnosis of
the faults based on the stored events.

Selecting events
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied
Call up the Diagnostics menu
( page 209).
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Diagnostics.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows the
list of control units.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on the desired control unit
abbreviation.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows the system abbreviation and the MB item no.
menu list.

8
9

210

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Events.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The multifunction display shows the
first event in memory 1 of the control
unit. If there is no new event, the multifunction display shows No events.

i
A fault which has not been rectified is
represented by 2 as being current.
The event priority 3 and the event
code 4 assist the Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre in rectifying the fault.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Quitting the Event menu

If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows: Delete event?
The highlight is on No.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to move
on to the next menu.
1 Event number
2 Current event
3 Event priority (1st digit)
4 Event code (digits 2 5)
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows the
event text 5 and the action to be
taken 6.

5 Event text
6 Instructions
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

2
3

Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to return to the


menu list.

Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel to return to the


previous display.

The multi-function display shows the


next event.

If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows: Delete event?
The highlight is on No.

8
9

211

Controls in detail
Driver information system

1 Deleting events
The following options are available:

Deleting events from an individual control unit

The highlight is on Yes.

2 You can delete the events from an indi-

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

vidual control unit

3
4
5
6
7

You can delete the events from all control units

The multi-function display shows


Events deleted and returns to the

Diagnostics menu.

It is possible to carry out a fault diagnosis based on the stored events.


The event memory should therefore
only be deleted at a qualified specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required.

8
9

212

Press button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Call up the event menu of the desired


control unit.
If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows Delete events?
The highlight is on No.

Controls in detail
Driver information system
Deleting events from all control units

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Delete events.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Binary values

i
The binary values are intended to assist
Mercedes-Benz Service Centres in vehicle diagnosis.

The multi-function display shows


Delete events.

The highlight is on No.

Call up the Diagnostics menu


( page 209).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Diagnostics.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to select the
list of control units.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


The highlight is on Yes.

2
3

Measured values

The measured values are intended to


assist Mercedes-Benz Service Centres
in vehicle diagnosis.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

5
6

The multi-function display shows the


Event deleted message and returns to

the Diagnostics menu.

8
9

213

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Gearshift

1 The vehicle is equipped with a fully syn2


3

chronised 4 speed transmission. Half stages (post-selection) are also possible which
doubles the number of gears. The pre-selection group provides a high and a low ratio for each of the gears. This means that
there are 16 forward and 2 reverse gears
available.

4 To select the gears, the vehicle is equipped


with the following modes of gearshifting:
Page

5
6
7

Risk of accident

If the reservoir pressure is too low in the


auxiliary consumer circuit, complete declutching and secure gear change cannot be
guaranteed. The driver information system
displays an event message. Under certain
circumstances you may not be able to pull
out of dangerous situations effectively. Do
not accelerate or change gear until the reservoir pressure in the auxiliary consumer circuit is sufficient and the message clears
from the screen.

Reservoir pressure in auxiliary consumer


circuit too low

1 Auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure


2 Yellow status indicator

HPS

Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift

215

EPS III S

Telligent gearshift

218

EPS III SA

Telligent automatic gearshift

231

Try to maintain the engine speed in the


economic range. See also "Rev counter".
Drive in the lowest possible gear.

8
9

214

Controls in detail
Gearshift

i
Change gear in good time when approaching steep gradients.
If possible, block change and avoid
changing gear unless absolutely necessary.
Always fully depress the clutch pedal
when changing gear.

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS)


The hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) is designed with a double H layout and is split
into a low and a high gear range. The low
gear range "L" comprises the reverse gear
and gears 1 to 4. The high gear range "H"
comprises the gears 5 to 8. The split
groups can be selected using the switch on
the front of the gear lever.

Change gear smoothly without using


force.

Gear change methods


On vehicles with HPS there are three ways
to operate the transmission:
Gear selection in low ratio, e.g. for offroad driving

Gear selection in high ratio e.g. for onroad driving

Gear selection in either low or high ratio, e.g. when vehicle is fully laden

4
5

Only select reverse gear at idling speed


and when the vehicle is stationary.

When the vehicle is stationary and the


transmission is in neutral, the engine
only speeds up after a delay.

7
8

HPS gearshift pattern

215

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1
2

Pulling away
DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away
in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and
gradient.
Depress the clutch pedal.

3 Without using force, select desired


gear using gear lever.

4 Release the parking brake.


5
6
7

Slowly release the clutch pedal and


slowly depress the accelerator.
Immediately after pulling away, test the
service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation.
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to
the left or right and that it comes safely
to a halt.

8
9

216

Risk of accident

If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during


the brake test or it does not come to a halt
safely, there is a danger that the brakes
could fail and you could cause an accident.
If continuing your journey is not possible,
park the vehicle and have it towed away. If it
is possible to continue your journey, drive at
a suitable speed to a specialist workshop
and have the brake system checked.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Changing gear

!
A warning signal heard when changing
down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, do not engage, select next highest gear. There is a risk of engine
damage.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Apply slightly increased pressure on
the gear lever to overcome the lock between the gear ranges.
Without using force, select desired
gear using gear lever.

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

i
When changing between gear ranges
"L" and "H", e.g. from 4th to 5th gear,
the clutch pedal must remain depressed.

Selecting the splitter group


The splitter group allows the vehicle to be
driven in a higher or lower ratio in the selected gear without the need for gear
change.

High-range splitter group

Place split-shifter in upper position 1.


Keep clutch pedal depressed until the
splitter group is selected.
Release the clutch pedal.

2
3

Low-range splitter group


Place split-shifter in lower position 2.
Keep clutch pedal depressed until the
splitter group is selected.
Release the clutch pedal.

4
5
6

Split-shifter

1 High-range splitter group


2 Low-range splitter group

8
9

217

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Stopping
Brake the vehicle.

2 Depress the clutch pedal fully.


Shift the transmission into neutral.

3 Apply the parking brake


( see page 62).

Release the clutch pedal.

i
5
6

When the transmission is in neutral, the


gear lever is in the gate between 3rd
and 4th gear, or between 5th and
6th gear.

Selecting reverse gear


Depress the clutch pedal.
Wait for a period of three to six seconds
until the layshaft has come to rest in
the transmission.
Guide gear lever to the left into the reverse gear gate.
Apply slightly increased pressure on
the gear lever to overcome the lock.
Engage reverse gear.
Vehicles with reversing horn:
The reversing horn is activated.
To proceed, release parking brake.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

7
8
9

218

Telligent gearshift
Telligent gearshift (EPS III S) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selection device. To
change gear, the gear lever or the half-gear
rocker on the gearshift unit must be moved
in the desired direction.
Telligent gearshift allows you to
let the Telligent gearshift select the
optimum gears for you (Telligent selection) or
determine the point of gear change
yourself (driver's choice)

Controls in detail
Gearshift
In both cases, the gear can be selected
directly:
Depress the clutch pedal
Select a gear
Release the clutch pedal
or
Gearshift with preselection:
Select a gear
Depress the clutch pedal
The Telligent gearshift engages the
gear
Release the clutch pedal

Gear indicator
This gear indicator shows the following information in the multi-function display:

the engaged gear and the selected


splitter group on the left 1 and

the recommended or preselected gear


(flashing) with the appropriate splitter
group on the right 2
x

High-range splitter group

Low-range splitter group

Transmission neutral position

Reverse gear

4
1 Engaged: 8th gear, high splitter group
2 Preselected: 7th gear, low splitter
group

5
6
7
8
9

219

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1
2

Telligent gearshift unit

Gear lever

The gearshift unit is located on a separate


folding armrest on the driver's seat.

Function button

Shift up

Shift down/select reverse

Neutral button
Half-gear rocker

4
Gearshift unit on right-hand drive vehicles

5
6
7
8
9

220

Shift gear up

Shift gear down

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Selecting neutral

Depress the clutch pedal.


As soon as neutral is engaged, N is
shown on the left in the gear indicator.
Release the clutch pedal.

i
Neutral position N can be selected from
any gear when the gear lever and the
half-gear rocker are in the basic position.

When you declutch or select transmission


neutral, either engine braking or tractive
power is interrupted. In certain circumstances the vehicle cannot be brought to a halt.
Never select transmission neutral when the
vehicle is in motion.

Risk of accident

3
4
5
6

Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle


to a halt.

Press and hold neutral button 1.

N flashes on the right in the gear indica-

tor.

221

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1
2

Pulling away
If you wish to pull away from stationary
with the transmission in neutral N, the
Telligent gearshift only permits selection
of 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.

3 Select the appropriate gear in which to pull


away given

4 the load

uphill/downhill gradients

5 the traction
i
6
7

Activate the differential locks


( page 253) and the starting-off aid
( page 296) if you encounter traction
difficulties.

Direct gearshift

i
If you move the gear lever with the
function button forwards to drive away
with the transmission in neutral, the
Telligent gearshift selects the second
gear with fast splitter group.
If you move the gear lever forwards or
backwards to the end position when
the vehicle is in motion, gear selection
is with Telligent driver's choice.

Risk of accident

If the clutch pedal is released before a gear


is selected, the transmission remains in neutral.
Depress clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.

8
9

222

Depress the clutch pedal.


Press and hold function button 1,
move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2 and hold in this position.

Controls in detail
Gearshift
The selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator.
Wait until the selected gear is engaged.
A selection sound can be heard in the
central loudspeaker.
The gear engaged flashes briefly on the
left in the gear indicator.
Release the parking brake.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.
Immediately after pulling away, test the
service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation.
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to
the left or right and that it comes safely
to a halt.

Risk of accident

If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during


the brake test or it does not come to a halt
safely, there is a danger that the brakes
could fail and you could cause an accident.
If continuing your journey is not possible,
park the vehicle and have it recovered by a
breakdown service. If it is possible to continue your journey, drive at a suitable speed to
a specialist workshop and have the brake
system checked.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you choose the direct gearshift option, block changing with the vehicle in
motion is limited to

a half-gear using the half-gear rocker and

a full gear using the gear lever in


conjunction with the applied function button.

Shifting with preselection

Shifting a gear with preselection means


that the gear you wish to select is preselected using the gear lever or the half-gear
rocker and the gear change is initiated by
depressing the clutch pedal.

6
7
8
9

223

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 The Telligent gearshift stores the prese-

lected gear

for two minutes when the vehicle is


stationary

for ten seconds when the vehicle is in


motion

Construction-site vehicles:
When the differential locks are activated, the Telligent gearshift stores the
preselected gears for 30 seconds.

If you choose the preselect gearshift


option, block changing is limited to two
gears.

During the period allowed for preselection, the selected gear can be changed
or deleted as required.

8
9

If the period for preselection has


elapsed and no gear has been selected,
the previously selected gear remains
engaged.

224

Move gear lever and/or half-gear rocker in the direction of the gear change
continually until a resistance can be
felt and until the relevant gear flashes
on the right in the gear indicator.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Wait until the selected gear is engaged.
A selection sound can be heard in the
central loudspeaker.
The gear engaged flashes briefly on the
left in the gear indicator.
Release the parking brake.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

Changing preselection
Select a different gear during the period allowed for preselection using the
gear lever with function button or the
half-gear rocker.
The newly selected gear flashes on the
right in the gear indicator. The period
allowed for preselection starts again.
Deleting preselection
Press neutral button during period allowed for preselection.
The preselected gear shown in the right
of the gear indicator is deleted.

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Changing gear

The Telligent gearshift offers 4 ways in


which to change gear when the vehicle is in
motion:
Direct gearshift with Telligent driver's
choice ( page 227)
Preselected gearshift with Telligent
driver's choice and preselection
( page 227)

The Telligent gearshift monitors gear


selection. If the driver chooses a gear
that would lead to overrevving of the
engine, a warning signal sounds. The
Telligent gearshift selects a "safe"
gear. The warning buzzer turns off as
soon as the gear lever or the half-gear
rocker is in the basic position.

If the clutch pedal is released before a gear


is selected, the Telligent gearshift selects
transmission neutral.

Risk of accident

Depress clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.

3
4

and

Direct gearshift ( page 222)


Preselected gearshift ( page 223)

6
7
8
9

225

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Telligent driver's choice

2
3
4
5

If you move the gear lever forwards to 1


or backwards to 2 when the vehicle is in
motion without pressing the function button, Telligent driver's choice is activated.
The Telligent gearshift selects the optimum gear.

i
If the optimum gear is already engaged,
the Telligent gearshift selects the
next half-gear up or down as appropriate.

The influencing factors which aid the


Telligent gearshift in determining the optimum gear are
Road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Engine load
Status of continuous brake
Laden weight of vehicle

1 Shift up
2 Downshift

7
8
9

226

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Direct gearshift

Preselected gearshift

Depress the clutch pedal.

You decide whether gear change should be


up or down by means of the gear lever. The
Telligent gearshift selects the optimum
gear. The point of gear change is determined by actuation of the clutch pedal.

The preselected gear can be changed


or deleted during the period allowed for
preselection.

Move gear lever to change gear until a


resistance can be felt.
The optimum gear selected by the
Telligent gearshift flashes briefly on
the right in the gear indicator.
Wait until the selected gear is engaged.
A selection sound can be heard in the
central loudspeaker.
The gear engaged is displayed on the
left in the gear indicator.
Release the gear lever.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

The Telligent gearshift stores the preselected gear


for two minutes when the vehicle is
stationary
for ten seconds when the vehicle is in
motion
Construction-site vehicles:
When the differential locks are activated, the Telligent gearshift stores the
preselected gears for 30 seconds.

If the Telligent gearshift finds, during


the period allowed for preselection,
that the preselected gear is no longer
optimum due to a change in driving
conditions, it modifies the gear preselected.
If the period for preselection has
elapsed and no gear has been selected,
the previously selected gear remains
engaged.
Move gear lever to change gear until a
resistance can be felt.

3
4
5
6
7

The gear selected by the Telligent


gearshift flashes on the right in the
gear indicator.
Depress the clutch pedal.

8
9

227

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Wait until the selected gear is engaged. Deleting preselection


2

A selection sound can be heard in the


central loudspeaker.
The gear engaged flashes briefly on the
left in the gear indicator.

3 Slowly release the clutch pedal and


slowly depress the accelerator.

4 Changing preselection
5
6
7

Select a different gear during the period allowed for preselection using the
gear lever with function button or the
half-gear rocker.
The newly selected gear flashes on the
right in the gear indicator. The period
allowed for preselection starts again.

8
9

228

Press neutral button during period allowed for preselection.


The preselected gear shown in the right
of the gear indicator is deleted.

Stopping
Brake the vehicle.
If necessary, change down a gear.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Press the neutral button.
N flashes on the right in the gear indica-

tor.
The Telligent gearshift selects neutral.
Hold the vehicle using the service
brake or the parking brake.
Release the clutch pedal.

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Selecting reverse gear

Press and hold function button 1 and


move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 2 and hold in this
position.
Vehicles with reversing horn:
The reversing horn is activated.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Reverse gear is engaged when
a selection sound is heard in the
central loudspeaker.
R can be seen on the left in the gear
indicator.
Release gear lever and function button.

i
You can only select reverse gear R
when the vehicle is stationary and neutral N is selected.

To proceed, release parking brake.


Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

Construction-site mode
Construction-site vehicles:
When the differential locks are engaged
( page 253) the Telligent gearshift selects construction-site mode. In construction-site mode, the Telligent gearshift
shortens the period between gear changes
and thus minimises any interruption in
traction.

2
3
4

i
When construction-site mode is activated and you select a gear with
Telligent driver's choice, block changing is limited to:

5
6

Upshift: a maximum of one gear


Downshift: a minimum of one gear

7
8

Reverse gear cannot be selected with


the preselection feature ( page 223).

229

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1
2

Rapid change of direction


This procedure may be necessary to rock
out a bogged-in vehicle for example.

i
To rock out the vehicle, always start in
reverse gear.
If necessary, engage the differential
locks ( page 253).

Engage reverse gear.


Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

Press function button 1 and move


gear lever forwards until a resistance
can be felt 2 to preselect a forwards
gear.

5
6

As soon as you feel the vehicle driving


backwards, depress the clutch pedal.

7
8
9

230

Watch the gear indicator, when a forwards gear has been engaged, release
the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal.
Press function button 1 and move
gear lever backwards until a resistance
can be felt 3 to preselect the reverse
gear.
As soon as you feel the vehicle driving
forwards, depress the clutch pedal.
Watch the gear indicator, when the reverse gear has been engaged, release
the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal.
Repeat the gear change procedure until
the vehicle is free.

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Telligent automatic gearshift

The Telligent automatic gearshift (EPS III


SA) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selection device with automated clutch actuation. To change gear, the gear lever or the
half-gear rocker on the gearshift unit must
be moved in the desired direction.

Gear indicator
This gear indicator shows the following information in the multi-function display:

the engaged gear and the selected


splitter group on the left 1 and

the recommended or preselected gear


(flashes) with the appropriate splitter
group on the right 2
x

High-range splitter group

Low-range splitter group

Transmission neutral position

Reverse gear

4
1 Engaged: 8th gear, fast splitter group
2 Preselected: 7th gear, slow splitter
group

5
6
7
8
9

231

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Modes of operation
Telligent

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

The
automatic gearshift can be
used in two modes of operation.

Telligent automatic gearshift unit


The gearshift unit is located on a separate
folding armrest on the driver's seat.

Automatic mode "A" ( page 239).


You select a gear in which to pull away.
The Telligent automatic gearshift selects the gear depending on the

Gear lever
1

Function button

Shift up

Changing down/selecting reverse

Neutral button

Road speed

Half-gear rocker

Accelerator pedal position

Shift gear up

Engine load

Shift gear down

Status of continuous brake

Driving mode selector switch

Manual mode

Automatic mode

Laden weight of vehicle


Manual mode "M" ( page 243).
You select a gear in which to pull away
and when the vehicle is in motion, you
also determine the point and direction
of gear change (up or down). The electronics system engages the optimum
gear.

232

Gearshift unit

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Selecting operating mode
Risk of accident

The automatic and manual operating


modes can be selected using the operating
mode selector switch on the gearshift unit.

When the vehicle is being driven off-road or


with engaged differential locks in automatic
operating mode A, Telligent automatic gearshift can lead to undesired interruptions in
traction. The result of this could be dangerous driving situations.
For such journeys, always select manual
mode of operation M so that you can determine yourself when gears should be selected in accordance with the driving situation.

The driver information system shows


the current mode of operation in the
multi-function display following the
function check of the instruments.

The mode of operation can be changed


at any time when the ignition lock is in
position 2.
You can modify the gear chosen by the
Telligent automatic gearshift in both
modes of operation.
1 Operating mode selector switch
M Manual mode
A Automatic mode

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

233

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Selecting manual mode

Selecting automatic mode

If you change from manual to automatic mode

when the vehicle is stationary and


with 4th gear selected

the Telligent automatic gearshift selects 2nd gear with fast splitter group.

4
5 Press manual mode M on the operating
mode selector switch.

Press automatic mode A on the operating mode selector switch.

The driver information system shows

The driver information system shows

man. in the multi-function display.

auto in the multi-function display.

7
8
9

234

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Engaging forward gears


In automatic mode you only need the gearshift unit
to pull away
to select reverse gear
to select transmission neutral
In manual mode you can determine the
point and direction of gear change (up or
down) for every gear using the gearshift
unit.

i
You can change the gear selected by
the Telligent automatic gearshift at
any time.

Changing gear when the vehicle is in


motion

Selecting a gear

Move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt to change up or

backwards to change down.

The Telligent automatic gearshift engages the optimum gear for the operating conditions.

Changing engaged gear

To change the gear engaged by the


Telligent automatic gearshift, you can
change up 2 or down 3 a full gear
using the gear lever or
change up 4 or down 5 a half-gear
using the half-gear rocker.

6
Press function button 1.

Move gear lever forwards 2 or


backwards 3.

8
9

235

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Selecting gears

Selecting neutral

As soon as neutral is engaged, N is


shown on the left in the gear indicator.

Neutral position N can be selected from


any gear when the gear lever and the
half-gear rocker are in the basic position.

3
4

Risk of accident

5 Move half-gear rocker upwards 4 or


downwards 5.

6
7

i
In the neutral position N and with reverse gear engaged, the transmission
changes between slow and fast splitter
groups or vice versa.

Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle


to a halt.
Press and hold the neutral button 1.
N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.

236

When you select neutral, either engine braking or traction is interrupted. In certain circumstances the vehicle cannot be brought
to a halt. Never select neutral when the vehicle is in motion.

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Selecting reverse gear

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the transmission into neutral.

Reverse gear R can only be selected


when

Press function button 1 and move


gear lever backwards 2 until a resistance can be felt.
Vehicles with reversing horn:
The reversing horn is activated.

the engine is running


the vehicle is stationary

2
3

neutral N is selected.

Reverse gear is engaged when

a selection sound can be heard in


the central loudspeaker

R can be seen on the left in the gear


indicator

To proceed, release the parking brake.


Slowly depress the accelerator.

7
8
9

237

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1
2

Rapid change of direction


This procedure may be necessary to rock
out a bogged-in vehicle for example.

i
To rock out the vehicle, always start in
reverse gear.
If necessary, engage the differential
locks ( page 253).

Select reverse gear and depress the accelerator.

As soon as you notice the vehicle driving backwards, press function button
1 and move the gear lever forwards
2 until a resistance can be felt.

The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a forwards gear.

6
7
8
9

238

As soon as you notice the vehicle driving forwards, press function button 1
and move the gear lever backwards 3
until a resistance can be felt.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages the reverse gear.
Repeat the gear change procedure until the vehicle is free.

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Automatic mode
Pulling away

i
If a gear is selected when the auxiliary
consumer reservoir pressure is
too low, a system fault occurs. The engine must be stopped and restarted.
Press function button 1.
Move gear lever in desired direction of
travel 2.

Release the parking brake and slowly


depress the accelerator.
The vehicle starts to move.
Immediately after pulling away, test the
service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation.
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to
the left or right and that it comes safely
to a halt.

1
2
3
4

The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a suitable gear.


The selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator and then
changes to the left position.

5
6
7
8
9

239

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Risk of accident

If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during


the brake test or it does not come to a halt
safely, there is a danger that the brakes
could fail and you could cause an accident.
Bring the vehicle to a halt and have it recovered by a breakdown service. The brake system should be checked at a specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Changing the starting gear


To block change up by two gears from
the gear you have currently engaged,
move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt.
To change up by one gear from the gear
you have currently engaged, press the
function button and move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be
felt.
To change down by one gear from the
gear you have currently engaged, press
the function button and move the gear
lever backwards until a resistance can
be felt.
To change up one half-gear, move the
half-gear rocker upwards until a resistance can be felt.
To change down one half-gear, move
the half-gear rocker downwards until a
resistance can be felt.

8
9

240

Changing gear
Risk of accident

If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm,


the Telligent automatic gearshift automatically disengages the gear. This could lead to
critical driving situations when driving up or
down hill. Do not allow the engine speed to
drop below 550 rpm.

The influencing factors which aid the


Telligent automatic gearshift in determining the optimum gear are
Road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Engine load
Status of continuous brake
Laden weight of vehicle

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Using the accelerator pedal you can actively influence the point of gear change and
the target gear.
Easy on the
accelerator
Heavy on the
accelerator

Shift up early
Shift up late

Accelerating
Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the maximum speed is reached
for the driving situation and the gear
engaged, Telligent automatic gearshift selects the next highest optimum
gear.

Kickdown

Decelerating

The kickdown function provides maximum


acceleration for the vehicle.

Take your foot away from the accelerator pedal.

Depress the accelerator past the pressure point until stop.

Slowly depress the brake pedal.


The Telligent automatic gearshift
shifts down into an optimum gear.

The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a lower gear.


Once the desired speed has been
reached, ease back on the accelerator.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a higher gear.

1
2
3

or

Activate the continuous brake


( page 262).
The Telligent automatic gearshift
shifts down into an optimum gear.

5
6
7

Manual gearshift
To advance the point of gear change,
move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt.

The Telligent automatic gearshift engages the next highest optimum gear.

241

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Shifting down manually


2

Move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt.


The Telligent automatic gearshift
shifts down into an optimum gear.

3 or
Press function button.

i
A warning signal heard when changing
down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving of the engine, the Telligent automatic gearshift
only shifts down into a "safe" gear.

The Telligent automatic gearshift


shifts down a gear.

5
or

6 Move half-gear rocker downwards.


7

The Telligent automatic gearshift


shifts down a half-gear.

8
9

242

Risk of accident

Do not allow the engine to run unnecessarily

Brake the vehicle


The Telligent automatic gearshift disengages the gear just before idling
speed is reached.

Stopping

4 Move gear lever backwards.

Environmental note

The vehicle could roll away with the engine


running and a gear engaged. The Telligent
automatic gearshift disengages the gear
when idling speed is reached.
When you bring the vehicle to a halt, always
hold it using the service/or parking brake.

When the vehicle is stationary, a pullaway gear is selected.

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Manual mode

If the vehicle is left to stand for 60 seconds with a gear engaged, a warning
signal sounds. N flashes on the right in
the gear indicator.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you select manual mode if you intend driving the
vehicle off-road to avoid undesired upshifting, for example.

After another 30 seconds, another


warning signal sounds and the
Telligent automatic gearshift selects
neutral.

Manual mode has the following differences


compared to automatic mode:

To keep the transmission in the selected gear, briefly press the accelerator
pedal or the function button within
90 seconds of the vehicle having been
brought to a halt.
The pull away gear remains engaged
for another 90 seconds.

The pull away gear is 2nd gear in the


high splitter group

The options for changing gear with the


vehicle in motion are

using Telligent automatic gearshift by moving the gear lever


(Telligent driver's choice) or

using the function button and gear


lever for a full gear or via the halfgear rocker for a half-gear.

3
4

The driver must actuate gear change

The kickdown function is not available


When the vehicle is brought to a halt,
the Telligent automatic gearshift does
not select a pull away gear

6
7
8
9

243

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Pulling away

Press function button 1.

Push the gear lever forwards 2.

If the gear you select with the


Telligent automatic gearshift is unsuitable, change the pull away gear.

The selected gear flashes briefly on


the right in the gear indicator. The
Telligent automatic gearshift selects
2nd gear in the high splitter group.
When the gear is engaged, the indicator shows the gear on the left.

2
3
4

Release the parking brake and slowly


depress the accelerator.

The vehicle starts to move.

6
7
8

i
If a gear is selected when the auxiliary
consumer reservoir pressure is
too low, a system fault could occur. The
engine must be stopped and restarted.

244

When you stop with manual mode activated, the Telligent automatic gearshift will not engage a pull away gear.
Select a suitable gear in which to pull
away.

Changing the pull away gear


To change up by one gear from the gear
you have currently engaged, press the
function button and move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be
felt.
To change down by one gear from the
gear you have currently engaged, press
the function button and move the gear
lever backwards until a resistance can
be felt.
To change up one half-gear, move the
half-gear rocker upwards until a resistance can be felt.
To change down one half-gear, move
the half-gear rocker downwards until a
resistance can be felt.

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Upshifting with Telligent driver's
choice

Changing gear
Risk of accident

If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm,


the Telligent automatic gearshift automatically disengages the gear. The engine braking effect will be lost or traction will be
interrupted. This could lead to dangerous
driving situations. Do not allow the engine
speed to drop below 550 rpm.

Move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 1.


The selected gear flashes briefly on
the right in the gear indicator. The
Telligent automatic gearshift shifts
into a higher optimum gear. It will shift
up by at least a half-gear. When the
gear is engaged, the indicator will show
the gear on the left.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

245

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Downshifting with Telligent driver's

choice

2
3

The Telligent automatic gearshift


shifts into a lower optimum gear. It will
shift down by at least a half-gear. The
selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator. When the
gear is engaged, the indicator will show
the gear on the left.

Upshifting by one gear

i
4

A warning signal heard when changing


down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent automatic gearshift
will only shift down into a "safe" gear.

5
6
7 Move the gear lever backwards until a
resistance can be felt 1.

8
9

246

Press and hold function button 1.

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2.

Downshifting by one gear

The selected gear flashes briefly on


the right in the gear indicator. The
Telligent automatic gearshift shifts up
by one gear. When the gear is engaged,
the indicator will show the gear on the
left.

Move the gear lever backwards until a


resistance can be felt 2.
The selected gear flashes briefly on
the right in the gear indicator. The
Telligent automatic gearshift shifts up
by one gear. When the gear is engaged,
the indicator will show the gear on the
left.

1
2
3
4

i
A warning signal heard when changing
down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent automatic gearshift
will only shift down into a "safe" gear.

5
6

Press and hold function button 1.

7
8
9

247

Controls in detail
Gearshift

1 Upshifting by one gear

Downshifting by one gear

A warning signal heard when changing


down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent automatic gearshift
will only shift down into a "safe" gear.

2
3
4
5 Move the half-gear rocker upwards un- Move the half-gear rocker downwards
6
7

til a resistance can be felt 1.

until a resistance can be felt 2.

The selected gear flashes briefly on


the right in the gear indicator. The
Telligent automatic gearshift shifts up
by one half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear
on the left.

The selected gear flashes briefly on


the right in the gear indicator. The
Telligent automatic gearshift shifts
down by one half-gear. When the gear
is engaged, the indicator will show the
gear on the left.

8
9

248

Controls in detail
Gearshift
Stopping
Risk of accident

The vehicle could roll away with the engine


running and a gear engaged. The Telligent
automatic gearshift will disengage the gear
when idling speed is reached.
Always hold the vehicle using the service
brake or the parking brake when you stop.

Environmental note

Do not allow the engine to run unnecessarily

Brake the vehicle.

If necessary, change down a gear.

If the vehicle stands still for longer than


60 seconds, a warning signal will sound
and N will flash on the right in the gear
indicator.

The Telligent automatic gearshift will


disengage the gear just before idling
speed is reached.

!
When you stop with manual mode activated, the Telligent automatic gearshift will not engage a pull away gear.
Select a suitable gear in which to pull
away.

After another 30 seconds, another


warning signal will sound and the
Telligent automatic gearshift selects
neutral.
To keep the transmission in the selected gear, briefly press the accelerator
pedal or the function button within
90 seconds after the vehicle has been
brought to a halt.
The gear will remain engaged for another 90 seconds.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

249

Controls in detail
Gearshift

Parking the vehicle

Risk of accident

If you do not use the parking brake to hold


the vehicle, there is a risk of it rolling away.
The Telligent automatic gearshift always
selects neutral when the engine has been
switched off. You cannot park the vehicle
with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle
using the parking brake.

2
3
4

Stop the vehicle.

Apply the parking brake ( page 62).


Select neutral 1.

Switch off the engine.

7
8
9

250

Controls in detail
Driving
Driving
Tachograph

An event message is displayed in the


multi-function display by the driver information system if there are any faults
in the tachograph or its equipment.

Use the tachograph to record and comply


with the legal requirements in respect of
Driving time
Working time
Tachograph,
SIEMENS VDO Automotive "KIENZLE"

Short breaks
Long breaks
Speed limits.
Observe the separate Operating Instructions in the vehicle document wallet.
Risk of injury

G
Tachograph, TVI

When you enter and exit the vehicle or move


about in the cab, there is a danger of you injuring yourself on the opened tachograph.
Always keep the tachograph closed.

i
A correctly filled out disc must always
be inserted in the tachograph for any
journey.

1
2

Tachograph discs with recorded information must be kept for at least 1 year.

Repair work and removal and installation of the tachograph may only be
carried out by an authorised workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

5
6
7
8
9

251

Controls in detail
Driving

Transfer case

You can only engage the transfer case


when the vehicle is stationary and in
neutral.

On vehicles with Telligent automatic


gearshift:

Selector positions of transfer case

Press operating mode selector switch


M.

On-road selector position

The multi-function display shows man.

Turn transfer case switch to


position 1.
On-road operation is engaged.

Off-road selector position

Turn transfer case switch to


position 2.

Off-road operation is engaged.

6
7
8

Switch for transfer case

1 On-road selector position


2 Off-road selector position

252

3 Operating mode selector switch


A Automatic mode
M Manual mode

Controls in detail
Driving

i
The transfer case off-road position is
intended primarily for driving off-road
or up steep slopes.
In neutral position 0, there will be no
drive from the transfer case to the driving axles. The neutral position 0 of the
transfer case is only required for
switching from position 1 to 2.

Differential locks
If necessary, engage differential locks on
slippery roads or for off-road use for example.
Engaging differential locks

The individual differential locks can


only be operated in sequence.

Risk of accident

Steering is impaired when a differential lock


is engaged. Never drive on a surface with
high grip when the differential locks are engaged.

3
4
5

Turn differential lock switch to


position 1.

When the vehicle is in motion, the


transfer case switch must always be in
on-road 1 or off-road position 2.

The inter-axle lock/through-drive is


engaged.
0 Off
1 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/throughdrive
2 Cross-axle lock, rear axle
3 Cross-axle lock, front axle

6
7
8
9

253

Controls in detail
Driving

1 Turn differential lock switch to

position 2.

2
3
4
5

If the driving wheels slip, do not engage


the differential locks. There is a danger
of the differential locks becoming damaged.

The rear axle lateral lock is also engaged.


Turn differential lock switch to
position 3.

Engage only when the vehicle is stationary or creeping forwards slowly.

The front axle lateral lock is also engaged.


The multi-function display shows the relevant status once the switch process has
completed.

1 Cross-axle lock, front axle


2 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/throughdrive
3 Cross-axle lock, rear axle
# Differential locks engaged
+ Differential locks disengaged

7
8
9

254

Pull away carefully. In certain circumstances, the locking function of the differential locks may not be fully
engaged.

Controls in detail
Driving
Disengaging differential locks

Turn differential lock switch from 1 to


position 0.
The inter-axle lock/through-drive is
disengaged.

Turn differential lock switch from 3 to


position 2.
The lateral lock of the front axle is disengaged.
Turn differential lock switch from 2 to
position 1.

Power take-offs
The engine must run at a specified speed
to drive auxiliary equipment (e.g. pumps).

The differential lock indicator in the multifunction display will be deactivated.

the accelerator pedal

If the indicator is not deactivated when the


lateral lock is disengaged:

the multi-function lever on the steering


column ( page 265)

Drive the vehicle backwards and forwards slightly.


If the indicator does not go out when the
inter-axle lock is disengaged:

The engine speed can be controlled with

3
4

an overspeed switch
or automatically with the constant engine speed switch

depending on the equipment level.

Stop the vehicle and drive the vehicle


backwards for a short distance.

6
7

The lateral lock of the rear axle is disengaged.

8
9

255

Controls in detail
Driving

i
Vehicles with engine speed governor:

When the power take-off is activated, it


is possible to exceed the governed engine speed.

3
!

4
5

In the case of custom vehicle conversions, observe manufacturer's operating instructions.


Do not switch on power take-off until
the vehicle is stationary

the parking brake is applied


neutral is selected

7
8
9

256

The multi-function display shows the Apply


the parking brake ! event message.

If the J power take-off symbol flashes


in the multi-function display, the power
take-off cannot be engaged. The electronics system has not automatically recognised the vehicle's operating state
(transmission in neutral, vehicle stationary, parking brake applied).

Apply the parking brake and repeat the


selection process.

Check the vehicle's operating state


and repeat the selection process.

Notes for vehicles with programmable


special module (PSM)
If the parking brake is released, the power
take-off cannot be engaged.

i
If the display flashes again, consult a
workshop.

Controls in detail
Driving
Engaging transmission-dependent
power take-off

Press the upper section of switch 1.


The indicator lamp in the switch and
the J power take-off symbol flash
in the multi-function display.
Note on power take-off symbol:
# Power take-off engaged

1 Power take-off switch 1

i
The transmission-dependent power
take-off can only be engaged when:
the vehicle is stationary
the parking brake is applied

Transmission with electronic gear


change inhibitor:
When the power take-off is engaged, the transmission cannot be
operated

+ Power take-off disengaged

Transmission without electronic gear


change inhibitor:

Disengaging transmission-dependent
power take-off

PTO can be operated with vehicle


stationary

Press the upper section of switch 1.

PTO can be operated only if 1st,


2nd or 3rd gear is selected with vehicle in motion

The indicator lamp in the switch and


the J power take-off symbol go out
in the multi-function display.

2
3
4
5
6

!
If the power take-off is engaged, do not
change gear when the vehicle is in motion.

neutral is selected

7
8
9

257

Controls in detail
Driving

power take-off with splitter group

Vehicles with Telligent automatic


gearshift

The power take-off can be run at 2 differ-

With the engine running at idling speed:

splitter group.

preselect fast or slow speed using the


half-gear rocker on the control panel of
the Telligent gearshift.

1 Engaging transmission-dependent
2 ent speeds by selecting the low or high

3 Vehicles without Telligent automatic


gearshift

4 With the engine running at idling speed:


5
6

preselect fast or slow speed using the


split-shift on the gear lever or the halfgear rocker on the control panel of the
Telligent gearshift.
Up = fast
Down = slow

7 Depress the clutch pedal fully.


8

After about ten seconds, press the upper section of the power take-off
switch 1. The PTO will be engaged or
disengaged.

9 Release the clutch pedal.

258

Engaging engine-dependent power


take-off (NMW)

Press the upper section of power takeoff switch 1. The PTO will be engaged
or disengaged.

i
Clutch actuation is automatic with the
Telligent automatic gearshift.

1 Power take-off switch 1

i
The engine-dependent power take-off
can only be engaged when:
the vehicle is stationary
the parking brake is applied
neutral is selected

Controls in detail
Driving
Press the upper section of switch 1
with the engine running at a maximum
speed of 1,700 rpm.
The indicator lamp in the switch and
the J power take-off symbol in the
multi-function display flash.
Power take-off display:
# PTO engaged
+ PTO disengaged

Transmission with electronic gear change


inhibitor:

The transmission cannot be operated


when the power take-off is engaged.

Transmission without gear change inhibitor:

The power take-off can be engaged


whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion.

Disengaging engine-dependent power


take-off (NMW)

Engaging engine-resident power takeoff

Press the upper section of switch 1.

The engine-resident power take-off can


only be engaged when:

The indicator lamp in the switch and


the J power take-off symbol in the
multi-function display go out.

4
1 Power take-off switch 1
Press the upper section of switch 1.
The indicator lamp in the switch and
the J power take-off symbol in the
multi-function display flash.

the vehicle is stationary

Power take-off symbol:

the parking brake is applied

# PTO engaged

neutral is selected

+ PTO disengaged

5
6
7
8
9

259

Controls in detail
Driving

1 Disengaging engine-resident power


take-off

2
3

Press the upper section of switch 1.


The indicator lamp in the switch and
the J power take-off symbol in the
multi-function display go out.

Switching on constant engine speed


function
The constant engine speed function can
only be switched on when:
the vehicle is stationary
the parking brake is applied
neutral is selected

Press the upper section of switch 1.


The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up.

i
When the constant engine speed function is switched on, the working speed
will remain constant regardless of the
engine load.

4
Switching off constant engine speed
function

Press the lower section of switch 1.


The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out.

6
7
1 Constant engine speed switch

8
9

260

Controls in detail
Driving

Continuous brake
Risk of accident

Do not operate the engine brake or retarder


on a slippery road surface. The wheels could
lock. The vehicle could skid.

1 Green

Economical operating range

2 Yellow

Engine brake operating range

3 Red

Overrevving range

4 Green diode
strip

Econometer

On long downhill stretches, downshift


in good time and operate the engine
brake to make use of the engine braking effect. Note the effective engine
braking range (yellow section) marked
on the rpm counter.

5
6
7
8
9

261

Controls in detail
Driving
Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift:

1 Operating the continuous brake


2
3
4

Pull multi-function lever, continuous


brake (engine brake/retarder) from
position 0 to position 1, 2, 3, 4
or 5.

If the d brake indicator lamp lights up


in the instrument panel when the continuous brake is operated, the speed of the vehicle is too high for a lower gear to be
selected:

When the continuous brake is operated, the b indicator lamp lights up in


the instrument panel.

When the lever is in position 1, the


braking effect is at its least.

When the lever is in position 5 the


braking effect is at its greatest.

7
8
9

262

Decelerate using the service brake.


Multi-function lever, continuous brake (example)

i
If the service brake is applied when the
continuous brake is active, the transmission will shift down in accordance
with the driving situation.

Controls in detail
Driving
Deactivating the continuous brake

Engine brake

Move multi-function lever to


position 0.

The engine braking effect is dependent on


the engine speed. High engine speed
means high engine braking effect.

The continuous brake is deactivated


and the b indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument panel.
If the b indicator lamp does not go out:
Have the continuous brake serviced or
repaired as necessary.

1
2

At an engine speed of below 900 rpm,


the engine brake is ineffective. The engine brake can only be used in a rev
range between 900 rpm and approximately 2,300 rpm.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

5
1 Optimum engine braking efficiency

6
7
8
9

263

Controls in detail
Driving

1 Retarder
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Risk of accident

If the multi-function display shows a retarder event message F, it is possible to deactivate the retarder during ABS regulation
or by depressing the accelerator. At the
same time, the status indicator will light up
red. Drive with particular care. Have the retarder serviced or repaired as necessary.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

264

The retarder's braking effect is reduced automatically depending on the coolant temperature.
Adjust driving style.
On long downhill stretches, in particular, downshift in good time to make use
of the engine braking effect.

i
If the retarder's braking effect is reduced automatically due to the coolant
temperature, the multi-function display
will show an event message G.
If the retarder indicator lamp b
lights up with the lever in position 0,
do not operate the retarder. Have the
retarder checked.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning and care of retarder
( page 416).

Controls in detail
Driving

Idling speed
After the engine has been started, the
idling speed is regulated automatically according to the coolant temperature.
It is possible to increase the engine speed
using the multi-function lever on the steering column. In this way, it is possible to
provide the necessary speed for auxiliary
equipment, such as pumps.

Adjusting idling speed

Using the multi-function lever on the steering column it is possible to set the idling
speed between approximately 550 rpm
and a maximum of 750 rpm with the vehicle stationary.

2
3
4
Vehicles with ART

1 To increase idling speed


2 To reduce idling speed
3 To switch off increased idling speed

Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.

5
6

Vehicles without ART

7
8
9

265

Controls in detail
Driving

1 Increase idling speed by approximately


2
3

20 rpm

Decrease idling speed by approximately


20 rpm

Move the multi-function lever to


position 1 .

Move the multi-function lever to


position 2 .

The idling speed will be increased in increments of approximately 20 rpm.


Increase idling speed

4 Hold the multi-function lever in


position 1 .

The idling speed will be increased to a


maximum of approximately 750 rpm

6
7
8
9

266

The idling speed will be decreased in increments of approximately 20 rpm.


To reduce idling speed
Hold the multi-function lever in
position 2 .
The idling speed will be decreased to a
maximum of approximately 550 rpm.

Deactivate increased idling speed


Move the multi-function lever to
position 3 5.
The increased idling speed is deactivated.

i
When the vehicle is in motion, the increased idling speed will switch off automatically at a speed of above
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
Switching between various driving
systems
You can switch between the following driving systems:
Limiter
Cruise control
Telligent distance control

i
Switching between driving systems is
immediate. The multi-function display
is deactivated for approximately three
seconds. During this period there is no
indication of road speed or distance in
the multi-function display.

Switching from limiter to cruise control


and back

i
You can switch between the limiter and
cruise control:

1
2

whether these are active or inactive

with the vehicle stationary or in motion

4
5
6
7
8
9

267

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching from Telligent distance
control to limiter and back

1
2

The limiter is activated. The multi-function display shows c.


Press button 1 briefly.
The Telligent distance control is activated. The multi-function display
shows b.

3
4
Vehicles without ART

5 1 Changeover button
Press button 1 briefly.

Press button 1 briefly.

Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows d.

7 Press button 1 briefly.


The limiter activated. The multi-function display shows c.

8
9

268

Vehicles with ART

1 Changeover button

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching from Telligent distance
control to cruise control and back
Switching between Telligent distance
control and cruise control is only possible
when the vehicle is in motion and cruise
control is activated.

Press rotary switch 1 briefly.


Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows d.
Press rotary switch 1 briefly.
The Telligent distance control is activated. The multi-function display
shows b.

To maintain the set maximum speed on


downhill stretches, the limiter will operate
the continuous brake automatically at the
set maximum speed +4 km/h.
The limiter cannot be activated until the vehicle is moving faster than 2 km/h.
Risk of accident

Limiter
Using the limiter, you can limit the road
speed above approximately 10 mph
(15 km/h). You can accelerate using the
accelerator pedal up to the set maximum
speed.

The limiter is intended to assist the driver


only. The driver is responsible at all times for
the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining
an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.

1
2
3
4
5
6

1 ART rotary switch

7
8
9

269

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Increasing speed in increments of


0.5 km/h

Move multi-function lever to


position 1 .

Moving the multi-function lever, activates and stores the current speed.

Moving the lever again will have the effect of increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h.
Multi-function lever (example)

5 Activating limiter
6

Press button 2 continually until c


is shown in the multi-function display.
The limiter is selected.

7
8
9

270

i
If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set
speed limit. After about five seconds,
the display will go out.

1 Selected driving system


2 Set maximum speed
3 Limiter symbol
4 Current distance from vehicle in front

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increasing speed in increments of
5 km/h

Reverting to set speed limit

If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set
speed limit. After about five seconds,
the display will go out.

2
3
4

Hold the multi-function lever in


position 1 .
Holding the multi-function lever increases the speed in increments of
5 km/h.
Releasing the multi-function lever
stores the current speed after it has
been increased.

Precondition: The limiter was previously


deactivated.

Move the multi-function lever to


position 2 .

Moving the multi-function lever will select the previously stored speed.
The multi-function display will show the
previously stored speed.

7
8
9

271

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1
2
3

i
If the lever is moved again, the speed
will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.

Decreasing the speed in steps of


0.5 km/h

If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set
speed limit. After about five seconds,
the display will go out.

4
5

Precondition: The limiter is active.


Move the multi-function lever to
position 2 .

Moving the lever will cause the speed


to be reduced in steps of 0.5 km/h.

7
8
9

272

i
If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set
speed limit. After about five seconds,
the display will go out.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing the speed in steps
of 5 km/h

Hold the multi-function lever in


position 2 .
Holding the multi-function lever decreases the speed in steps of 5 km/h.
Releasing the multi-function lever
stores the current speed after it has
been reduced.

If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set
speed limit. After about five seconds,
the display will go out.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

273

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Switching off limiter

Exceeding stored speed limit

Even after the engine has been


switched off, the stored speed limit is
still available.

If it is necessary to exceed the stored


speed limit to overtake, for example:

3
4
5 Move the multi-function lever to
position 3 5.

The limiter is deactivated. The c


display in the multi-function display will
be cancelled.

7
8
9

274

If you drive downhill and downshift


without adjusting the speed, the limiter
will set a temporary engine speed of
approximately 2,200 rpm. The set maximum speed remains in the system and
will be recalled as soon as this is possible in a higher gear.

Depress the accelerator briefly past


the maximum speed point to the stop.
As soon as the overtaking manoeuvre
is over, release the accelerator pedal
and depress it again.
This will bring the set limiting speed
back into effect.

i
If at this time the vehicle is travelling
faster than the stored maximum speed,
the vehicle will be slowed down automatically with the continuous brake.

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Cruise control (combined


acceleration/braking control)
Vehicles without Telligent distance control (ART):
Cruise control can store any road speed
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Cruise control brakes the vehicle when
the set speed is exceeded by 2.5 mph
(4 km/h).
Cruise control accelerates the vehicle on
uphill climbs. On downhill stretches, the
continuous brake brakes the vehicle (engine brake/ retarder).

Risk of accident

Do not operate the retarder on slippery road


surfaces. The wheels could lock. The vehicle
could skid.
Cruise control is intended to assist the driver only. The driver is responsible at all times
for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle
in front.
Use cruise control only when it is safe to
maintain the vehicle's speed at a constant
level in traffic situations. The cruise control
system is not able to read the road and traffic conditions.

On uphill or downhill stretches, there is


a possibility that the cruise control system may not be able to maintain the set
speed

If you drive downhill and downshift


without adjusting the speed, the limiter
will set a temporary engine speed of
approximately 2,200 rpm. The set maximum speed remains in the system and
will be recalled as soon as this is possible in a higher gear.
When cruise control is activated, there
is no need to depress the accelerator.

3
4
5
6
7

!
Do not exceed the maximum speed in
each of the gears. Keep an eye on the
rev counter ( page 144).

8
9

275

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating cruise control/Increasing


speed

Increasing the speed in increments of


0.5 km/h

Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator to above 10 mph (15 km/h).

Move the multi-function lever to


position 1 .

On vehicles with all-wheel drive: Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal to above 30 mph (approximately
50 km/h).

4
Vehicles without ART

Hold the multi-function lever in


position 1 .
Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows . The vehicle will accelerate.

Release the multi-function lever. The


current speed is stored in the memory.

7
8
9

276

Moving the multi-function lever, stores


the current speed.
Moving the lever again will have the effect of increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h.

i
When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current
set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will be cancelled.

Controls in detail
Driving systems

If the lever is moved again, the speed


will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.
When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current
set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Decreasing speed in steps of 0.5 km/h
1 Selected driving system
2 Set speed
3 Cruise control symbol
4 Current distance from vehicle in front

Vehicles without ART

Precondition: Cruise control active.

Reverting to the set speed limit

Move the multi-function lever to


position 2 .

Precondition: Cruise control was previously deactivated.


Move the multi-function lever to
position 2 .

2
3
4
5

Moving the multi-function lever decreases the speed in steps of


0.5 km/h.

6
7

Moving the multi-function lever will select the speed previously stored.

The cruise control system accelerates


the vehicle to the speed previously set.

277

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Automatic cruise control deactivation

When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current
set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current
set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

Cruise control is deactivated automatically:

3 Reducing speed
4
5
6

Hold the multi-function lever in


position 2 .
Holding the multi-function lever decreases the speed.
Releasing the multi-function lever
stores the current speed.

Deactivating cruise control


Move the multi-function lever to
position 3 5.
Cruise control is deactivated. The indicator in the multi-function display
will be cancelled.

i
Even after the engine has been
switched off, the stored speed is still
available.

7
8
9

278

if the vehicle is braked using the service brake when the cruise control system is currently accelerating the
vehicle. A short warning signal will
sound.
The speed setting remains in the memory.
if the speed drops below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h), a short warning signal will sound.
The speed setting remains in the memory.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
if you switch over to limiter. A short
warning signal will sound.
The speed setting remains in the memory.

Reverting to stored speed

if the clutch is kept depressed for longer than five seconds, e.g. during gear
changing. A short warning signal will
sound.
If you depress the clutch for less than
five seconds, cruise control will remain
active.
when the gearbox is left in neutral for
longer than five seconds.

Multi-function lever (example)

1 Revert to stored speed


To revert to the stored speed:

Move the multi-function lever to


position 1 .

The vehicle continues at the stored


speed again.

Special note on using the cruise control


system

To overtake a vehicle, you can accelerate past the stored speed using the accelerator pedal. As soon as the
overtaking manoeuvre is completed
and pressure is taken off the accelerator pedal, the cruise control system reverts to the stored speed.

On vehicles with all-wheel drive, the


cruise control system is deactivated
automatically when the speed
drops below approximately 30 mph
(45 km/h). A short warning signal will
sound. The speed setting remains in
the memory.

4
5
6
7
8
9

279

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 If the anti-lock braking system or the

acceleration skid control (ASR) is deactivated or defective:

2
3
4

the cruise control system will only


store speeds above 30 mph
(50 km/h)
the cruise control system will be deactivated automatically when the
speed drops below approximately
28 mph (45 km/h)

5 Additional braking with the continuous


brake is possible. The cruise control
system will remain active.

6
7
8
9

When the continuous brake is deactivated, the vehicle will accelerate to the
last stored speed.
If you brake the vehicle using the continuous brake, you can also use the
service brakes. The cruise control system will remain active.
Further information on the continuous
brake ( page 261).

280

Telligent distance control (ART)


The Telligent distance control (ART) is a
convenience system that supplements the
controlling function of the cruise control
system (accelerating/braking control)
with a distance control function.
If the Telligent distance control detects a
slower vehicle ahead, it will slow your vehicle down automatically. Your vehicle will
then be driven at the same speed as that of
the vehicle ahead at a preset distance. The
speed stored in the cruise control memory
remains unaffected.
As soon as the traffic situation permits,
e.g. if the vehicle ahead changes lanes,
your vehicle will accelerate up to the
stored speed in the cruise control memory.

Telligent distance control works like a


conventional cruise control system when
there is no vehicle driving in front.
Risk of accident

Do not use ART on icy roads or in the fog, for


example.
The Telligent distance control cannot automatically adapt the distance to the vehicle in
front to changing road and visibility conditions.
Telligent distance control is merely a tool
to assist the driver.
The driver is responsible at all times for the
speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an
adequate distance to the vehicle in front.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Telligent distance control cannot be activated:

when the vehicle is stationary

during the electronics system self-diagnosis after the engine has been started

at a speed below 10 mph (approximately 15 km/h)


if the clutch is depressed

if the service brake is applied

1 Unsuccessful attempt at activation

during ABS, ASR (acceleration skid


control) or SR control (Telligent stability control)

Activating Telligent distance control

An unsuccessful attempt to activate the


Telligent distance control is shown in the
multi-function display for approximately
three seconds by , km/h.

Telligent distance control can only be activated when the vehicle is travelling at a
speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).

Multi-function lever, cruise control with


integrated ART

Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator pedal to above 10 mph


(15 km/h),
Move the multi-function lever to
position 1 or 2 briefly,
The current speed is stored in the
memory.

5
6
7
8
9

281

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Changing the specified distance to the
vehicle in front

Using the ART rotary switch 3, you can


change the specified distance to a vehicle
travelling ahead. The minimum specified
distance to a vehicle in front is approximately 15 m.

2
3

Turn ART rotary switch 3 to position


1 or 2 and select desired distance
specification.
Release ART rotary switch.
The specified distance is stored in the
memory.

i
When changes are made to the distance specification, the multi-function
display shows information about the
specified distance h.

4
5
6
7

If ART is activated, the multi-function display shows:


1 Current distance from vehicle in
front
2 Telligent distance control symbol
3 Current set speed
1 To reduce specified distance
2 To increase specified distance
3 ART rotary switch

8
9

282

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increasing the set speed

i
When the set speed is changed, the
multi-function display will show the
current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

Increasing speed in increments of


0.5 km/h

Move the multi-function lever to


position 1 .

The current set speed increases in increments of 0.5 km/h.


Release lever. The current set speed is
stored.

3
4

i
When the set speed is changed, the
multi-function display will show the
current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

Hold the multi-function lever in


position 1 .
The set speed is increased to the next
highest speed in increments of 5 (e.g.
62 km/h to 65 km/h and then
70 km/h and so on).
Release the multi-function lever. The
current set speed is stored.

1 Set speed
2 ART symbol
3 Current distance from vehicle in front

5
6
7
8
9

283

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Reducing the set speed

When the set speed is changed, the


multi-function display will show the
current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

Decreasing the speed in steps of


0.5 km/h
Move the multi-function lever to
position 2 .

4
5 Hold the multi-function lever in
position 2 .

6
7

Deactivating Telligent distance


control

The set speed is reduced to the next


lowest speed in steps of 5 (e.g.
62 km/h to 60 km/h and then
55 km/h and so on).
Release the multi-function lever. The
current set speed is stored.

8
9

284

The current set speed decreases in


steps of 0.5 km/h.
Release the multi-function lever. The
current set speed is stored.

i
When the set speed is changed, the
multi-function display will show the
current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

Move the multi-function lever to


position 3 5.
Telligent distance control is deactivated. The stored speed and the specified distance remain in the memory.
The indicators in the multi-function display will be cancelled ( page 282).

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching from Telligent distance
control to cruise control

Automatic deactivation of Telligent


distance control
Telligent distance control is deactivated
automatically
when the speed drops below 6 mph
(10 km/h)
when cruise control accelerates the vehicle and the service brake is applied at
the same time

Move ART rotary switch briefly in


direction 1.
The multi-function display shows the
symbol for the activated cruise
control function and the current specified distance to the vehicle ahead.

when the chassis on vehicles with


pneumatic suspension is not in the
standard position

if the clutch is kept depressed for longer than five seconds, e.g. during gear
changing
If you depress the clutch for less than
five seconds, the Telligent distance
control remains active
if the transmission is set at R or N

1
2
3

If the distance control is automatically


switched off, the warning buzzer will
give a single signal.

if a fault develops in the ART electronics system

6
7
8
9

285

Controls in detail
Driving systems

The multi-function display shows

2
3
4
5

After Telligent distance control has


been switched off automatically, the
cruise control function can still be activated.
If Telligent distance control cannot be
activated, e.g. if there is a fault in the
system, the warning buzzer will sound
once. The control function of the cruise
control system is automatically activated.

Current distance from vehicle in


front

Symbol for activated cruise control function

Current set speed

Driving with Telligent distance control


Telligent distance control is designed for
use on motorways or expressways.
Risk of accident

If a stationary obstacle is encountered, the


vehicle will not be braked automatically. Do
not use ART on B roads, for example, or in
built up areas.

7
8
9

286

Telligent distance control function only


works in interaction with vehicles travelling
ahead. It does not respond to stationary obstacles on the road (e.g. broken down vehicles or a traffic congestion).
Telligent distance control slows the vehicle
down automatically to maintain the set distance to the vehicle travelling in front.
Telligent distance control will be activated
if the vehicle in front changes lanes, for example.
It is absolutely essential to brake the vehicle
using the service brake in addition to the automatic braking function of the vehicle if:
the warning symbol l lights up in the
multi-function display
the warning buzzer sounds twice in succession.

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Risk of accident

If a stationary obstacle is encountered, the


vehicle will not be braked automatically. If
Telligent distance control detects a stationary obstacle, only a distance warning is
activated:
The multi-function display shows warning symbol l,
The warning buzzer sounds twice in addition. Decrease driving speed using the
service brakes.
Switch Telligent distance control (ART) off
before leaving motorways or expressways. If
the system cannot detect an obstacle ahead
(e.g. vehicle travelling in front), the vehicle
will accelerate to the stored set speed.

Telligent distance control cannot detect oncoming traffic.


The acoustic warning from Telligent
distance control (ART) can be switched
on or off under Cruise Control acoustic in the Configuration submenu of
the Settings menu ( page 184).

Telligent distance control distance


sensor
Unfavourable weather conditions (e.g.
snow, slush) or heavy soiling of the sensor
cover can impair the Telligent distance
control function.

2
3
4

The retarder and/or engine brake can


be switched on even when ART is active.
If the vehicle is slowed down by the
cruise control system with the continuous brake (engine brake/retarder) and
you depress the brake pedal, the cruise
control system will not be deactivated.

5
6
1 ART distance sensor cover
Keep the sensor cover in the front
bumper clean.

7
8
9

287

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Telligent distance control distance

warning

This function is also active even when

2 Telligent distance control is switched off.


If there is a danger of colliding with a mov-

3 ing obstacle in your lane, a distance warning will be activated.


Telligent distance control cannot detect

4 oncoming traffic. There will be no distance


warning.

5
6
7
8
9

288

Distance warning
The multi-function display shows the l
distance warning. The warning buzzer
sounds twice in addition.
Risk of accident

There is no automatic distance control (automatic braking), i.e. the driver must slow
the vehicle down using the brakes.
The system cannot always detect complex
driving situations clearly. This may lead to
missing or incorrect distance warnings.

If a distance warning is activated when the


vehicle is in motion:
Pay particular attention to the traffic
situation,
If necessary, avoid the vehicle ahead,
If necessary, brake the vehicle using
the brakes.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Special driving situations with
Telligent distance control
Cornering, entering and exiting corners

Risk of accident

When cornering, or entering and exiting corners, the system may have difficulty in detecting oncoming traffic. Your own vehicle
may then brake unexpectedly or late.

Problems may occur in detecting oncoming traffic:

on slip roads, whether joining or leaving the main road

if there are moving vehicles on the


verge (e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles)

Problems may occur in detecting oncoming


traffic:

Slip roads, verges


Risk of accident

When cornering, or entering and exiting


corners, the system may have difficulty in
detecting oncoming traffic.

on slip roads, whether joining or leaving


the main road,
if there are moving vehicles on the verge
(e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles).
Your own vehicle may then brake unexpectedly or late.

6
7
8
9

289

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Offset driving style, lane change

Cutting in

Telligent level control


Pneumatic suspension

The chassis can be lowered or raised using


the control panel to pickup or offload demountable rack systems, containers or
semitrailers. To use the control panel outside the cab,

3
4

remove the control panel from its


bracket.

5 An offset driving style to the vehicle ahead


6
7

can cause problems in detection.


Telligent distance control may have trouble detecting the vehicle ahead if it is offset (i.e. not inline with your vehicle). The
distance to the offset vehicle ahead is too
short. The driver must brake the vehicle to
increase the distance to the vehicle ahead.

Vehicles that cut into your lane without


keeping a safe distance will only be detected by Telligent distance control when the
sensors can pick up the vehicle. The distance to the vehicle cutting in is too short.
The driver must brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the cutting in vehicle ahead.

8
Control panel next to driver's seat

290

Controls in detail
Driving systems

If Telligent level control is active, this


will be shown automatically in the
multi-function display, e.g. chassis
frame below normal position B or
chassis frame above normal
position A.
The level control display is deactivated
when the vehicle leaves the factory.
The level control can be switched on or
off permanently in the Configuration
submenu of the Settings menu in the
driver information system
( page 186).
When the key in the ignition lock is
turned to position 2, the height of the
chassis will be adjusted automatically.

Risk of injury

If you do not replace the control panel in the


bracket designed for this purpose, there is a
danger of tripping on the cable, as you get
out of the cab. Always replace the control
panel in the bracket designed for this purpose to ensure that the cable is routed towards the cab rear.

!
Lower the chassis frame completely
before offloading demountable platforms or containers. Otherwise the
chassis could rebound suddenly when
the exchange body is offloaded. This
could damage the shock absorbers.

If the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is insufficient, leave


the engine running to build up the pressure in the compressed-air system.

When coupling to semitrailers or picking up demountable platforms or containers, leave the engine running. This
ensures that there is always sufficient
reservoir pressure in the compressedair system.
The multi-function display will indicate
Telligent level regulation by means of
the K system abbreviation/symbol
in the driver information system.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

291

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Storing the chassis height

1 Operation indicator
Front chassis,
raise/lower

Saving chassis height:

2 Operation indicator
Rear chassis,
raise/lower

Press preselect button 3 or 4.


1 or 2 will light up.

3 On/off
Front chassis preselection,
raise/lower

The chassis height can be stored and recalled using buttons "M1" 5 and "M2" 6.

4 On/off
Rear chassis preselection,
raise/lower

5
6

Control panel

5 M1 chassis height memory 1


6 M2 chassis height memory 2
7 Travel position

8 Raise
9 Lower

a STOP (raising/lowering)

292

Apply the parking brake.


Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. 1


or 2 will light up.
The multi-function display shows chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B.
Once the required height is achieved,
press and hold STOP button a and
then press button M1 5 or M2 6.
The chassis height is stored.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Loading and unloading the vehicle

Turn key in ignition lock to position 0.

When you load and unload the vehicle and


wish to maintain a constant chassis height,
this height can be stored.

Release STOP button a.

Apply the parking brake.


Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the
trailing axle.
If necessary use buttons 8 or 9 on
the control panel to set the desired
height of the chassis.
Run the engine until the pressure regulator cuts out.
Press and hold STOP button a.

i
The key can be removed and the cab
can be locked.

Using buttons 8 or 9 on the control


panel, the desired height of the chassis
can be set.

Run the engine until the pressure regulator cuts out.

Press and hold STOP button a.

Standby switch

Turn key in ignition lock to position 0.

If the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air circuit is sufficient, the stored


chassis height will be kept constant for approximately 5 hours.

Release STOP button a.

The chassis height set will remain constant.

Apply the parking brake.


Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the
trailing axle.

6
7
8
9

293

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Raising or lowering the chassis


Apply the parking brake.

2 Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.


3
4
5
6

Press preselect button 3 or 4.


1 or 2 will light up. To raise the front
and rear of the chassis equally, press
preselect button 3 and 4. 1 and 2
will light up.
Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. The
multi-function display shows chassis
above normal position A or chassis
below normal position B. Once the
required height is achieved, press the
STOP button a.

7
8

If there is a stored chassis height:


Press button M1 5 or M2 6. The
chassis frame will be raised or lowered
automatically to the stored height.
Driving position
Press the driving position button 7.
The operating lamp will go out. The
chassis will be raised or lowered automatically to the stored height.

i
When the normal position is achieved
(driving position), the indicator for
chassis above normal position A or
chassis below normal position B will
go out in the multi-function display.

Risk of accident

If the chassis is above the normal position


and you do not observe maximum headroom
notices when driving through underpasses,
there is a danger of the vehicle becoming
damaged. Ensure that the vehicle is not
higher than the permitted maximum headroom when it is being driven. In Germany,
for instance, maximum vehicle height must
not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply
with national legislation in other countries
(also when the vehicle is used for international transport work).
The driving and braking properties of the vehicle can be affected if chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal
position B is shown in the multi-function
display.
Only drive the vehicle when the chassis is in
the normal position (driving position) S.

294

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicles for high-volume goods transport raised driving position
To improve ride comfort, the chassis can
be raised while the vehicle is being driven.

Raising the chassis


Press upper section of switch 1.
The multi-function display shows raised
driving position C.
Lowering the chassis
Press the lower section of switch 1.
The C raised driving position indicator in the multi-function display will be
cancelled when the driving position is
reached.

If the chassis is in the raised position and


you do not observe maximum headroom notices when driving through underpasses,
there is a danger of the vehicle becoming
damaged. Make sure that the permissible
height limit is not exceeded when the suspension is raised. In Germany, for instance,
maximum vehicle height must not exceed
4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply with national
legislation in other countries (also when the
vehicle is used for international transport
work).

Risk of accident

1 Raised driving position switch

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

295

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1
2

Starting-off aid, three-axle vehicles


If the driving wheels slip on snowy or icy
road surfaces, activate the starting-off aid.

i
The starting-off aid with speed limiter is switched off automatically
when the speed exceeds approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Not
until the speed drops below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) can the
starting-off aid be activated again.
The starting-off aid without gear selection lock is switched off automatically after 120 seconds and
can be switched on again immediately thereafter.

4
5

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension


and vehicles with steered leading axle
Activating the starting-off aid on 6x2
vehicles
Press upper section of starting-off aid
switch 1.
2 will flash in the multi-function display as long as the starting-off aid is active.

6 1 Starting-off aid switch


7
8
6x2 vehicles

2 Starting-off aid/trailing axle display

296

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating the starting-off aid for 6x2/4
vehicles
Press upper section of starting-off aid
switch 1.
3 will flash in the multi-function display as long as the starting-off aid is active.

Hendrickson leading axle

i
Raise leading axle before pulling away.
If reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low, run the
engine.

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2,

Press upper section of leading axle


switch 1.
The multi-function display shows raise
leading axle 2.

2
3

Raising leading axle

4
5
6
2 "Raise leading axle" indicator

7
6x2/4 vehicles

3 Starting-off aid/leading axle display

1 Leading axle switch

8
9

297

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Lowering the leading axle

Trailing axle
Raise the trailing axle of an unladen or
only partially laden vehicle before starting.

2
3

If reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low, run the


engine.

Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane:

5 1 Leading axle switch

Study the operating instructions issued


by the body manufacturer before raising the trailing axle.

Press upper section of leading axle


switch 1.
The indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension


Raising the trailing axle

1 Trailing axle switch


High-volume transport vehicles:

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

The trailing axle cannot be raised.

Press upper section of trailing axle


switch 1.
The multi-function display shows raise
trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.

8
9

298

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle

Raising Nummek trailing axle

Press upper section of Nummek trailing axle switch 1.


The multi-function display shows trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.

2
3
4

2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display


To lower the trailing axle

1 Nummek trailing axle switch

Press upper section of trailing axle


switch 1.
The indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.

6
2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display

Before loading or unloading the vehicle:


lower the trailing axle.

8
9

299

Controls in detail
Driving systems

1 Lowering the Nummek trailing axle


2
3
4
5 1 Nummek trailing axle switch
6
7

Press the upper section of Nummek


trailing axle switch 1.
The trailing axle/starting-off aid indicator in the multi-function display will
be cancelled.

8
9

300

Telligent trailing axle


The Telligent trailing axle is a speed-dependent, hydraulically steered trailing axle.
It reduces the turning circle of the vehicle
and has a positive effect on tyre wear in
corners. When the road speed exceeds
30 mph (45 km/h) or when the trailing
axle is raised ( page 298), the electronics system locks the wheels in the straightahead position and disengage the trailing
axle steering function. When you lower the
trailing axle, the Telligent trailing axle will
begin steering the next time the front axle
is turned from the straight-ahead position.

Risk of accident

When you drive up to kerb stones or drive


through tight passages, there is a danger of
the tyres or obstacles on the edge of the
road becoming damaged. In this case, lock
the Telligent trailing axle steering function.

When you turn the steering lock to position


2, the j indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up. When the indicator
lamp goes out, the Telligent trailing axle
is ready for operation.
If the indicator lamp does not go out or
comes on when the vehicle is in motion
and the ZL system abbreviation is shown in
the multi-function display, have the trailing
axle checked.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that
you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

Locking the trailing axle steering


function

Releasing the trailing axle steering


function

Press upper section of trailing axle


steering lock switch 1.

The electronics system releases the


steering lock of the trailing axle. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

3
4
5

1 Trailing axle steering lock switch


Press upper section of trailing axle
steering lock switch 1.

The electronics system sets the wheels


in the straight-ahead position and locks
the steering function of the trailing axle. The indicator lamp in the switch
lights up.

7
8
9

301

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility

1
2

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

The vehicle is equipped with the following


exterior mirror types:

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

electrical, heated exterior mirror on


driver's and co-driver's side

Select the exterior mirror by pressing


button 1 or 2.

3 manual, heated wide-view mirror on co-

Adjust the exterior mirror in the required direction by pressing button 3.

driver's side

4 manual down-view mirror on co-driver's side

5 The switch unit for adjusting the exterior

mirrors and for the heating function is located in the driver's door.

6
1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror
2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror
3 To adjust the mirrors

7
8
9

302

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Mirror heating

Switching on mirror heating

With the mirror heating function you can


keep the exterior mirrors free of mist and
ice in damp and cold weather conditions.
The switch and indicator lamp are located
in the switch unit of the driver's door.

Press button 2.

Indicator lamp 1 lights up.

Switching off mirror heating

Press button 2.

The 1 indicator lamp shows that the mirror heating is active.

Indicator lamp 1 goes out.

4
5
6

1 Mirror heating indicator lamp


2 To switch mirror heating on/off

i
The down-view mirror is not heated.

8
9

303

Controls in detail
Good visibility

1
2

Windscreen wipers
Further information about the use of windscreen wipers can be found in the "Getting
started" section ( page 61).

3 Intermittent wipe
The intermittent wipe action can be adjusted infinitely from 2 20 seconds.

Setting the wipe action interval

Turn rotary switch to position 5 and


wait for 1st wiping action.

If the rotary switch is left in the


position for more than 20 seconds, the
electronics system will set the interval
time to two seconds.

Turn rotary switch to position .


Wait period required for interval.
Turn rotary switch to position 5
once again.
The electronics system stores the time
between switching on and off as a new
wipe interval.

5
6
7
8
9

304

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Construction-site vehicles

Windscreen cleaning platform


Vehicles with plastic bumper: The steps
and the platform for cleaning the windscreen are in the bumper.
Risk of accident

Construction-site vehicles have folding


steps to increase the ground clearance.

Fold the step down to clean the windscreen.

Dirty or loose steps do not provide a secure


foothold. You could slip and fall. Keep the
steps clean. Secure folding steps before
use.

4
5
Construction-site vehicles (example)

1 Pin
2 Step

7
8
9

305

Controls in detail
Good visibility

1 Folding the step down


2
3

Remove safety clip and withdraw


pin 1.
Fold step 2 down.
Insert the pin and secure.

4
5
6
7
8
9

306

Folding the step up

If you drive the vehicle with the step


down, the step could become damaged. Always fold the step up before
starting the vehicle.

Remove safety clip and withdraw


pin 1.
Fold step 2 up.
Insert the pin and secure.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

307

Controls in detail
Climate control

1
2
3
4
5

Function

The vehicle can be equipped with the following air-conditioning systems:

Demister vents

Swivelling side vents

Side vent airflow thumbwheel

Heating, heater air conditioning

309

Air conditioning and auxiliary


heating switch unit

Automatic air conditioning

315

Auxiliary air-conditioning

323

Air-conditioning control panel

Auxiliary heating

327

Swivelling centre vents

Centre vent airflow thumbwheel

Footwell vents

6
7
8
9

308

Page

The systems were designed as combined


fresh and recirculating air systems. A particulate filter or reusable construction-site
filter is fitted to clean the fresh air, depending on the equipment level.

Heating/heater air conditioning


The heating and heater air conditioning are
operational when the engine is running.
When the engine is warm, the air temperature can be regulated infinitely.

i
On vehicles with heater air conditioning, there is an air conditioning system
integrated in the heating with manual
regulation.

!
Switch on the air conditioning at least
once a month for about ten minutes to
avoid corrosive damage to the refrigerant compressor.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Control panel for heating/heater-air
conditioning

Airflow

Air conditioning

Switching on the air conditioning system


affects the airflow as follows

Air distribution, air recirculation

Temperature

Air-recirculation mode indicator


lamp

Switches the air conditioning on/


off

Switches the auxiliary heating


on/off

Auxiliary heating quick-start


menu

the air temperature is reduced


the air is dehumidified

2
3

the air is additionally filtered

6
7
8
9

309

Controls in detail
Climate control
To switch off

Warmer
Turn the rotary switch 2 to the right.

Press air conditioning switch 1 p


to switch the air conditioning system
off.

The indicator lamp in the switch goes


out.

Regulating temperature

Colder
Turn the rotary switch 2 to the left.
Colder air will flow out of the heater
vents.

4
To switch on

If necessary, press the upper section of


the air conditioning switch 1 p.

5 Press air conditioning switch 1 p


6

Warmer air will flow out of the heater


vents.

to switch the air conditioning system


on.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up.

7
To regulate the temperature, turn the rotary switch 2 to the relevant position.

8
9

310

Controls in detail
Climate control
If the cab is too hot before commencing a
journey:

Open the side window.


Press air conditioning switch 5 p
to switch the air conditioning system
on.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up.

Once the hot air has been expelled from


the cab:
Close the side window.
Press rotary switch for air distribution
2 to switch on the air-recirculation
mode.

Turn rotary switch for airflow 1


to P.

Once the air in the cab has been cooled


sufficiently:

Turn rotary switch for air distribution


2 to .

Press rotary switch for air distribution


2 to switch off the air-recirculation
mode.

Turn rotary switch for temperature 3


fully to the left.

Turn rotary switch for airflow 1 to


position 1 or 2.
Set the temperature using rotary
switch 3.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

311

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 Regulating airflow
2

To regulate the airflow, turn rotary


switch 1 to the relevant position.

Higher

When the rotary switch for airflow is at


position 0, a small amount of air will
still flow out of the vents when the vehicle is in motion.

Turn the rotary switch 1 to the right.

To temporarily prevent outside air from


entering the cab, activate the air-recirculation mode ( page 313).

Lower

The flow of air from the heater vents


will increase.

Turn the rotary switch 1 to the left.


The flow of air from the heater vents
will decrease.

4
5
6
7
8
9

312

Controls in detail
Climate control
Regulating air distribution
Rotary switch 1, may be used to adjust
the air distribution to different areas of the
cab as required.

The following settings are available:


P

Air to front and side windows

Air to centre vents

Air to full cab interior

Air to footwell vents

i
Two additional stages between the
switch settings allow individual fine adjustment of air distribution.

Air-recirculation mode

If unpleasant odours are encountered or a


high level of contaminated air, e.g. in traffic or in a tunnel, switch on the air-recirculation mode. In air-recirculation mode, the
system will recirculate the air in the cab
only.
Risk of accident

At ambient temperatures below 5 C, only


switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly.
Condensation could build up on the windows and impair your vision. You would be
putting yourself and other road users at risk.
Do not start the vehicle if the windows are
icy or misted over.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

313

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 To switch on

To switch off
Press rotary switch 1.
The indicator lamp for air-recirculation
mode in the control panel 2 will go
out.

2
3

Demisting

Risk of accident

5 Press rotary switch 1.


6

The indicator lamp for air-recirculation


mode in the control panel 2 lights up.

Icy windows impair your vision. You could be


putting yourself and other road users at risk.
Do not start the vehicle if the windows are
icy or misted over.

3 Thumbwheel
4 Side vents
If the windows are icy or misted over:
Open side vents fully using the thumbwheel 3.
Direct swivelling side vents 4 onto the
side windows.

7
8
9

314

Controls in detail
Climate control
Turn rotary switches 1, 2 and 3 in
the control panel to position P.
A large quantity of fully heated air will
flow onto the windscreen and the side
windows.
In addition on vehicles with heating-heater
air conditioning:
Press upper section of air conditioning
switch 5 p.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up.
Maintain the setting until the windscreen
and the side windows are clear.

Automatic air conditioning


Automatic air conditioning is ready for operation when the engine is running. It regulates the airflow and air distribution and
maintains the set temperature automatically.
The system heats or cools the air depending on the temperature setting and the ambient temperature.
On vehicles with auxiliary heating, automatic air conditioning switches the auxiliary heating on when the engine is cold.

2
3
4
5
6

i
The air conditioning system dehumidifies the air. Misted over windows will
be cleared more quickly.

7
8
9

315

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 If there are high levels of air contamina-

Automatic air-conditioning control


panel

Airflow in automatic mode

Air distribution in automatic


mode

Airflow

Air distribution, air recirculation

Temperature

Switches off the air conditioning

Charges the auxiliary air conditioning

Switches the auxiliary heating


on/off

Switches the refrigerator on/off

tion, e.g. in traffic congestion or in tunnels,


automatic air conditioning switches to airrecirculation mode.

The automatic air conditioning system can


be supplemented by an auxiliary air conditioning system ( page 323).

Warning and indicator lamps

7
8
9

316

Air-recirculation mode

Air conditioning off

Auxiliary air conditioning charging

Controls in detail
Climate control
Automatic mode

Manual mode

Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to position U 1.

In manual mode, all of the automatic air


conditioning functions can be regulated
manually. The air conditioning system is
activated automatically when a lower temperature is selected.

Turn rotary switch for air distribution


4 to position U 2.
Set desired temperature using rotary
switch 5.

i
Automatic mode is activated as soon
as the rotary switch for air flow 3 or
air distribution 4 is at U.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a temperature between 20 23 C for optimum comfort.
If you leave the vehicle frequently on
hot days, set the temperature to approximately 25 C.

If you wish to operate the automatic air


conditioning in manual mode, the rotary
switch for airflow 3 and air distribution 4
should not be at the U position.
Vehicles with auxiliary heating:

3
4
5

The automatic air conditioning activates


the auxiliary heating if
the coolant temperature is too low
one of the rotary switches for either airflow or air distribution is on U

6
7
8
9

317

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 the rotary switch for temperature is not


fully on cold

2
3
4
5

in order to heat up the cab.

i
Manual mode is best:
on warm days to quickly set the cab
temperature before commencing
your journey
when windows are icy or misted
over to quickly clear your vision

AC OFF switch

To switch air conditioning off

If use of the air conditioning system is not


desired or not necessary, you can switch it
off completely.
Environmental note

Switching the air conditioning off will not


just save you fuel, it is also environmentally
friendly.

Press upper section of AC OFF switch


1.
The right-hand indicator lamp 2 lights
up in the switch.

To switch air conditioning on

Set AC OFF switch 1 to centre position.

The indicator lamps 2 in the AC OFF


switch go out.

318

Controls in detail
Climate control
Regulating the temperature

Warmer

Colder

To regulate the temperature in automatic


and manual mode, turn the rotary switch
for temperature 5 to the relevant position.

Turn rotary switch for temperature 5


to the right.

Turn rotary switch for temperature 5


to the left.

The automatic air conditioning regulates the temperature to the prescribed


level.

The automatic air conditioning regulates the temperature to the prescribed


level.

i
Vehicles with auxiliary heating:
If necessary, the automatic air conditioning system will also activate the
auxiliary heating so that the set temperature can be achieved.

If the cab is too hot before commencing a


journey:
Open the side window,

2
3
4

Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to


level 4,

Turn rotary switch for air distribution


4 to ,

Turn rotary switch for temperature 5


fully to the left.

7
8
9

319

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 Once the hot air has been expelled from


the cab:

2
3
4
5
6
7

Close the side window.


Press the rotary switch for air distribution 4 to activate air-recirculation
mode.
Once the air in the cab has been cooled
sufficiently:
Press the rotary switch for air distribution 4 to deactivate air-recirculation
mode.
Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to
U 1.
Turn rotary switch for air distribution
4 to U 2.
Set desired temperature using rotary
switch 5.

8
9

320

Airflow

i
The airflow is regulated automatically
in automatic mode.
To regulate the airflow in manual mode,
turn rotary switch 3 to the relevant position.

Higher
Turn the rotary switch 3 to the right.
The flow of air from the vents will increase.
Lower
Turn the rotary switch 3 to the left.
The flow of air from the vents will decrease.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution

The following settings are available:

Air to front and side windows

Air distribution is regulated automatically in automatic mode.

Air to windscreen and side windows and to centre vents

Air to centre vents

Air to full cab interior

Air to footwell vents

Automatic mode

i
Additional stages between the switch
settings allow individual fine adjustment of air distribution.
Rotary switch 1 may be used to adjust
the air distribution in manual mode to different areas of the cab according to requirements.

Air-recirculation mode
Risk of accident

At ambient temperatures below 5 C, only


switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly.
Condensation could build up on the windows and impair your vision. You would be
putting yourself and other road users at risk.
Do not start the vehicle if the windows are
icy or misted over.

2
3
4
5

In air-recirculation mode, the system will


recirculate the air in the cab only.
Automatic air conditioning features a manual and an automatic air-recirculation
mode.

6
7
8
9

321

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 The automatic mode is always active and


2

detects carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide concentrations in the outside air. When
contaminated air is detected, automatic air
conditioning will activate the air-recirculation mode.

3 You can also select air-recirculation mode


at any time manually.

To select air-recirculation mode

Press rotary switch for air distribution


1.
The 2 indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode lights up in the control panel.
To deactivate air-recirculation mode
Press rotary switch for air distribution
1.
The 2 indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode goes out.

If the windows are icy or misted over:

Demisting

6
Risk of accident

Icy windows impair your vision. You could be


putting yourself and other road users at risk.
Do not start the vehicle if the windows are
icy or misted over.

8
9

322

1 Thumbwheel
2 Side vents
Open side vents fully using the thumbwheel 1.
Direct swivelling side vents 2 onto the
side windows.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to
level 4.
Turn rotary switch for air distribution
4 to P.
Turn rotary switch for temperature 5
fully to the right.
A large quantity of fully heated air will
flow onto the windscreen and the side
windows.
Maintain the setting until the windscreen
and the side windows are clear.

Auxiliary air conditioning


Vehicles with automatic air conditioning:
Auxiliary air conditioning can be used to
cool the cab interior prior to a journey or it
can maintain a comfortable temperature in
the cab interior during short or long
breaks. In addition, auxiliary air conditioning dehumidifies the flow of air in the cab.
When the refrigerant accumulator is full,
the maximum operating time is approximately eight hours.

2
3
4
5

i
Auxiliary air conditioning is ready for
operation when the refrigerant accumulator is charged.

6
7
8
9

323

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 DaimlerChrysler recommends that the re2

frigerant accumulator should be kept


charged during hot weather or for journeys
in subtropical and tropical climates.
Charging the refrigerant accumulator

3 Approximately four hours is necessary to


fully charge the refrigerant accumulator.

i
The refrigerant accumulator can only
be charged when the engine is running.
To prevent freezing of the refrigerant
accumulator, the electronics system
switches the auxiliary air conditioning
off when the engine is started.

4
With the engine running:
Press switch 1 u.

The left-hand indicator lamp 2 in the


switch lights up.

6
7
8
9

324

Controls in detail
Climate control
Auxiliary air conditioning switch
The control panel for the auxiliary air conditioning system is in the head area of the
lower berth. The rotary switch has
4 positions.

Auxiliary air conditioning off

Night use, cooling duration


approximately eight hours

Day use, cooling duration


approximately three hours

If the curtains are closed, heat will not


be able to penetrate into the cab and
the auxiliary air conditioning will be
more effective.

To cool cab before starting a


journey

Rotary switch

AUS

If the berth is being used, efficiency can


be improved more by pulling the curtains closed in front of the berth.

3
4

To switch off auxiliary air conditioning


To switch on auxiliary air conditioning
Turn rotary switch to relevant position.
The u indicator lamp for the auxiliary air conditioning in the instrument
panel lights up. The auxiliary air conditioning blower blows refrigerated air
out of the openings in the cab rear.

Turn rotary switch to position OFF.


The u indicator lamp for the auxiliary air conditioning in the instrument
panel goes out.

5
6
7
8
9

325

Controls in detail
Climate control

Construction-site filter

Fresh air filter

For construction-site vehicles, a construction-site filter is available. Information is


available from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.

Particulate filter

2 The vehicle heating is equipped with a par3

ticulate filter. It filters particles out of the


outside air, such as
fine dust

4 pollen and
spores,

5 before it enters the interior.


6
7

The filter element should be replaced annually at a specialist workshop or a


Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required.

8
9

326

1 Particulate filter for vehicle heating behind maintenance flap

The filter is designed to filter out large particles found typically on a construction
site. The filter can be reused. When the filter becomes soiled, it can be cleaned at a
specialist workshop or Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Auxiliary air conditioning particulate
filter

Auxiliary heating

The auxiliary air conditioning has its own


air intake. The particulate filter in the air intake filters out particles in the air, such as

Risk of fire and poisoning

dust
pollen and
spores
The filter element should be replaced annually at a specialist workshop or a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required.

Operation of the auxiliary heating creates


hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of
fire and poisoning.
Do not operate the auxiliary heating
at filling stations
in enclosed spaces, such as garages.
Vehicles for the transport of hazardous
goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.

The auxiliary heating is designed as either


a hot air heater or warm water heater. The
hot air heater heats the air flowing into the
cab exclusively. The warm water heater
heats the coolant which also preheats the
engine.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning
and auxiliary heating:
Automatic air conditioning activates the
auxiliary heating even when the vehicle is
in motion if the coolant temperature is insufficient to heat the cab.

1
2
3
4
5
6

You can heat up the cab


before commencing the journey

when the vehicle is in motion


when the engine is switched off

with the auxiliary heating.

327

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 The auxiliary heating has the following

To switch on continuous heating

modes of operation:

Page

2
3

Continuous heating

328

Timed heating

332

Preselected heating

334

4
5
6

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Press upper section of auxiliary heating


switch 1 .

Turn key in ignition lock to position 1


or

7
8

Continuous heating, hot air heater

1 Auxiliary heating
2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp

1 Auxiliary heating
2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp
3 Auxiliary heating shortcut menu

328

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

Indicator lamp 2 lights up in the


switch. The multi-function display
shows the operating data. The auxiliary
heating is switched on.

Controls in detail
Climate control

To set run-on time

Continuous heating operation is possible at any time when the vehicle is in


motion.

The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heating.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Set runon time.

The auxiliary heating switches to runon mode when, during continuous operation, you
turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 0
remove the key from the ignition
lock
without switching the auxiliary heating
off.
If you turn the steering lock to position
1 or 2 while the heater is in run-on
mode, the auxiliary heating switches to
continuous heating.

Press the lower section of auxiliary


heating switch 1 .

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


1 Auxiliary heating switch

Run-on time increases in increments of


five minutes.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Run-on time decreases in steps of
five minutes.

Run-on mode is adjustable.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

329

Controls in detail
Climate control
Press the lower section of auxiliary
heating switch 1 .

1 Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The multi-function display shows Auxi-

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

liary heat.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Set temperature.

3 Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system accepts
the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

4
5

To set the temperature


Setting range:

from +10 C to +45 C


or

from +50 F to +110 F


Changing temperature units ( page 205).

8
9

330

1 Auxiliary heating switch

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


The temperature increases in 1 increments.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The temperature decreases in 1
steps.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Set heating time.

i
To accelerate the setting procedure,
press and hold down the button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
Vehicles with warm water heater/
automatic air conditioning:
You can only set the heating temperature using the rotary switch for temperature in the heater control panel
( page 316).
To set the heating time

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

1
2
3

The heating time increases in increments of five minutes.


Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 hrs
Press the lower section of auxiliary
heating switch 1 .
The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The heating decreases in steps of


five minutes.

To accelerate the setting procedure,


press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

7
8
9

1 Auxiliary heating switch

331

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 Timed heating
2

To switch on heating timer

The heating timer allows operation of the


auxiliary heating when the key is not in the
steering lock. The auxiliary heating will operate for the period specifies.

The procedure for setting the temperature and the heating duration is the
same as for continuous heating. Setting temperature ( page 330).

1 Auxiliary heating
2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

Press upper section of auxiliary heating


switch 1 .
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch will
light up. The multi-function display
shows the operating data. The auxiliary
heating is switched on.

8
9

332

15 minutes operating time remaining


(example)

i
In timer mode, the heating time previously set determines the time the auxiliary heating switches on.
The remaining period of operation is
the same as the auxiliary heating's remaining operating time. It can be
changed during operation.

Controls in detail
Climate control
To change remaining time
Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 h

The auxiliary heating is in timer or preselect heating mode:


Press the lower section of auxiliary
heating switch 1 .
The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Set remaining time.
1 Auxiliary heating switch

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The remaining time increases in increments of five minutes.

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The remaining time decreases in steps


of five minutes.

8
9

333

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 Preselected heating
2
3

Risk of fire and poisoning

Operation of the auxiliary heating creates


hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of
fire and poisoning.
Do not operate the auxiliary heating

at filling stations
in enclosed spaces, such as garages.

Vehicles for the transport of hazardous


goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.

6
7

With the preselected heating mode, the


auxiliary heating can be switched on in the
absence of the driver:
at the programmed time

8 for the set period of heating operation


9

334

This allows the cab to be warmed up before the journey starts. Two memory slots
are available for preselected heating operation ( page 335).

i
Vehicles transporting hazardous
goods:
Preselected heating operation is not
possible.

i
In preselect mode, the heating time
previously set determines the switchon time of the auxiliary heating.
The remaining period of operation is
the same as the auxiliary heating's
remaining heating time. It can be
changed during operation.
The procedure for setting the temperature and the heating time is the same
as for continuous heating.
Setting heating time ( page 331).
Setting temperature ( page 330).
The procedure for setting the remaining time is the same as for timed heating. Changing remaining time
( page 333).

Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating/programming preselect
heating mode

Programming is not possible when the


auxiliary heating is in operation.

Programming is still possible when the


key has been removed from the steering lock.
A programmed pre-setting will activate
the auxiliary heating only once. For repeated activation, the preselection
should be reprogrammed or reactivated.

4
1 Auxiliary heating switch
Press the lower section of auxiliary
heating switch 1 .
The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Set memory.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Timer: 1
or Timer: 2.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the
setting and to progress to setting the
day.

5
6
7
8
9

335

Controls in detail
Climate control

1 Press the or button on the


2
3
4
5

multi-function steering wheel until the


multi-function display shows the day
required.

Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the


setting and to progress to setting the
hour.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows the desired minutes.

i
The Timer: --, switches the auxiliary
heating on at the preset time regardless of the day of the week.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

To accelerate the setting procedure,


press and hold down the button.

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

To set the hours

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows the desired hour.

8
9

336

Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the


setting and to progress to setting the
minutes.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system accepts
the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating preselect function

Switching off auxiliary heating

Call up the auxiliary heating menu


( page 335).

The indicator lamp in the switch goes


out. The multi-function display shows

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Set memory.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows
Timer: off.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system accepts
the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.

Press the upper section of auxiliary


heating switch 1.

Auxiliary heating has been switched


off.

1
2
3
4

All modes of operation

1 Auxiliary heating
2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp
3 Auxiliary heating menu shortcut

6
7

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The driver information system accepts


the selected settings and continues
onto the next function.

337

Controls in detail
Open-air
Open-air

Opening and closing the side


windows

Risk of injury

The side windows open and close electri-

Always keep an eye on the closing operation


of the side windows to see that no-one becomes caught. Release the switch if danger
threatens.

2 cally. Switches for the driver's and co-driv3

er's door are located in the driver's doors.


A switch for the co-driver's door is located
in the co-driver's door.

Always remove the key from the ignition


lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just
a short period.

Do not leave children unsupervised in the


vehicle. They could injure themselves.

1 To close left-hand side window


2 To open left-hand side window
3 To close right-hand side window
4 To open right-hand side window

7
8
9

338

Controls in detail
Open-air
Opening left-hand/right-hand side window
Press switch 2 or 4 for approximately one second.
The left or right-hand side window will
open fully.

i
Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt
the motion of the window.
Opening left-hand/right-hand window
partially
Press switch 2 or 4 briefly.

Closing left-hand/right-hand window

Vehicles with central locking:

Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt


the motion of the window.

Press and hold switch 1 or 3 until


the window is at the required height.

Closing left-hand/right-hand window


fully

Protection against entrapment stops


the closing procedure of the window
concerned if an obstacle prevents complete closure.

Vehicles with enhanced central locking


system:

A locking procedure closes any opened


windows.

Press switch 1 or 3 for approximately one second.

2
3
4
5

The left or right-hand window will close


fully.

The left or right-hand window will open


while the switch is being pressed.

7
8
9

339

Controls in detail
Open-air

Opening and closing the sliding/


tilting sunroof
The sliding/tilting sunroof opens and clos-

2 es electrically. The switches are located in


3
4

the switch unit above the windscreen and


in the switch unit of the lower berth.
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be darkened for breaks. A screen prevents insects
from entering the cab if required.

Risk of injury

When closing the sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody becomes trapped in it. Release the switch if danger threatens.
Always remove the key from the ignition
lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just
a short period.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could injure themselves.

5
To raise
Press switch 1 briefly.

The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into


the raised position.

To open

8 1 To open
2 To close

Press switch 1 and then release.


The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into
the raised position.
Press and hold switch 1 until the roof
is opened to the required position.

340

To close
Press and hold switch 2 until the roof
is closed to the required position.
To close sliding/tilting sunroof fully
Press switch 2 briefly.
The sliding/tilting sunroof will close
fully.

Controls in detail
Open-air
Disabling the sliding/tilting sunroof
closure lock

i
Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt
the motion of the sunroof.

Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out. The lock is deactivated.

Protection against entrapment stops


the closing procedure of the sunroof if
an obstacle prevents complete closure.

To switch on sliding/tilting sunroof


closure lock
Vehicles with enhanced central locking
system:
The lock switch prevents automatic closing of the sliding/tilting sunroof by the enhanced central locking system. This is wise
e.g. to maintain air circulation in the cab
when it is locked up.

2
3

Vehicles with enhanced central locking


system:
A locking procedure will close the
sliding/tilting sunroof if it is open.

4
1 Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock
Press switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up. The next time the vehicle is locked,
the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain
open.

Once enabled, the closure lock is active


for just one locking procedure with the
key removed from the ignition lock.

8
9

341

Controls in detail
Open-air

1 Insect screen and tinting


2

The insect screen is located in the front of


the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening.
The tinting screen is located in the rear of
the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening.

Pull the tinting or insect screen to the


other side of the opening and hook in
place.

Opening and closing the tilting roof


The tilting roof opens and closes electrically. The switches are located in the switch
unit above the windscreen and in the
switch unit of the lower berth.

To close

Unhook tinting or insect screen.


A retractor will draw the tinting or insect screen back.

4
5

To open

1 Insect screen
2 Tinting screen

6
1 To open
2 To close

7
8
9

342

Controls in detail
Open-air
To open

Opening and closing the roof hatch

To open

Press and hold switch 1 until the tilting roof is opened to the required
height.

The roof hatch can be opened to three different positions:


Tilted at the front

Apply pressure to the roof hatch and


push it to the desired position.

To close

Completely raised

To close

Press and hold switch 2 until the tilting roof is closed.

Tilted at the rear

Grab hold of both handles 1.

The 3 positions allow different levels of


ventilation.

Pull roof hatch downwards until the


locking mechanism audibly engages.

Grab hold of both handles 1.

4
5
6
7
8

1 Handles

343

Controls in detail
Features
Features

Ashtray

To remove insert

Cigarette lighter

Lift up insert on one side and remove


from retainer.

To fit insert
Place insert in retainer.

To close the ashtray

Hold cover plate by grip and close.

5 1 Cover plate
2 Insert

6 To open ashtray
Hold cover plate at grip and open.

7
8
9

344

1 Cigarette lighter

i
The socket for the cigarette lighter can
also be used as a power source for
electrical equipment up to a maximum
of 240 W. Other sockets ( page 356).

Controls in detail
Features

Risk of injury, fire and accident G


You could burn yourself on a hot cigarette lighter. Only hold the cigarette
lighter by its handle.
If children are travelling with you, remove the cigarette lighter from its socket. They could injure themselves on the
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire.
The priority is to focus your attention on
the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter if the traffic situation permits.

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.


Push cigarette lighter button until it engages.
When the spiral is glowing, the button
will spring out automatically.

Cab stowage compartments


(interior)
Risk of injury

Do not carry heavy objects, e.g. bottles, in


the stowage compartments.

To ensure that occupants are not injured by


falling objects in the cab as a result of sudden deceleration:

all stowage compartments must be


closed and locked when the vehicle is in
motion,

the load in each stowage compartment


should not exceed

8 kg above the windscreen with cover


4 kg above the windscreen without
cover
2 kg above the doors

7
8
9

345

Controls in detail
Features

interior are located:

Stowage compartment above windscreen

above the windscreen

L cab/MEGASPACE cab:

1 Cab stowage compartments in the vehicle


2

above the driver's and co-driver's


doors

Spring pressure will hold the cover in


the open position.

behind the driver's and co-driver's


seats beneath the berths ( page 348)

To close stowage compartment

in the side trim behind the driver's and


co-driver's seats

Swing the cover down until it audibly


engages.

in the instrument panel

Drinks holders for the driver and codriver are located in the instrument
panel.

8
9

346

Press together both release buttons on


the catch in the direction of the arrows.
Lift stowage compartment cover upwards.

3 in the driver's and co-driver's doors


4

To open stowage compartment

Stowage compartment above windscreen


(example)

1 Catch

Controls in detail
Features
Engine tunnel compartment

To fold out table

Cool box for mounting on engine tunnel

Pull table 1 upwards and fold out.


To fold table away

Fold up table 1 and push it in downwards.

To open drawer

Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and pull


out drawer.
1 Table
2 Upper drawer handle
3 Lower drawer handle

!
Do not place more than
12 kg on the table

To close drawer
Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and push
drawer in to the stop.

1 Cool box lid

To open cool box


Pull handle of sliding compartment upwards and pull out.

Fold out cool box lid.

30 kg in the drawers

Read also the manufacturer's operating instructions.

347

Controls in detail
Features

1 To close cool box


Fold away cool box lid.

2 Pull sliding compartment handle upwards and push in to the stop.

3
4
5
6

i
Please comply with the manufacturer's
operating, care and maintenance instructions for the cool box.

!
Switch the cool box off before tilting
the cab back and wait for ten minutes
after the cab has been tilted back before switching it on.

7
8
9

348

Cab stowage compartments


(exterior)
L cab
The stowage compartments are on the
sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.
Both stowage compartments can be accessed from the outside via the exterior
flap and from the inside via the stowage
compartment flaps beneath the berth.
The stowage compartment lighting will be
switched on whether the stowage compartments are opened from the outside or
from the inside.

1 Release lever in entrance


To open stowage compartment
Pull release lever 1 once and release.
The exterior flap will open until restrained by the retaining hook.

Controls in detail
Features
Pull release lever 1 once more and release.
The exterior flap is released.
Open exterior flap by swinging it towards the entrance until the flap engages on the limit stop.
To close stowage compartment
Close exterior flap until it audibly engages.
MEGASPACE cab
Upper stowage compartments

Lower exterior stowage compartments

The two stowage compartments are at the


sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.

The two lower stowage compartments can


be accessed only via the exterior flap.

When the stowage compartments are


opened, the stowage compartment lighting will be switched on.

4
MEGASPACE cab stowage compartment

1 Lower exterior stowage compartment


release lever
2 Lower exterior flap

5
6

The two upper stowage compartments are


opened and closed in the same way as the
those in the L cab ( page 348).

7
8
9

349

Controls in detail
Features

1 Opening exterior stowage compartment To close exterior stowage compartment


Open the driver's or co-driver's door.

2 Pull release lever 1 once and release.


3
4

The exterior flap will open until restrained by the retaining hook.
Pull release lever 1 once more and release.
The exterior flap is released.
Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.

5 Press the hinge joint up.


6

Swing the exterior flap down. The hinge


joint will engage.

Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.


The hinge joint will disengage.
Swing exterior flap 2 down until you
hear it engage in the lock.

Telephone
The telephone bracket for the hands-free
equipment is located above the windscreen on the right of the audio unit.
If you wish to use the hands-free device,
the bracket must be fitted with a phone
holder compatible with your mobile telephone. For further information contact a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
A detailed description of how to assemble
the phone holder and the mobile telephone
is included with the phone holder.

!
Bank cards, credit cards or other cards
with magnetic strips should not be
brought in the vicinity of the telephone
bracket. The magnet installed in the
bracket could otherwise delete or alter
the information stored on the cards.

7
8
9

350

Controls in detail
Features
You can operate your telephone using the
and buttons on the multi-function steering wheel once it is fitted in the
phone holder.

Empty telephone bracket

When you remove the key from the


steering lock, the telephone will remain
on for approximately 60 minutes.

If you make or receive a call within this


time, the telephone switches off
60 minutes from the end of use.

The hands-free capability is not guaranteed, if you use a commercially available phone holder.

4
1 Connector
2 Telephone bracket

1 Telephone bracket
2 Connector
3 Microphone

If no phone holder is fitted:

Insert connector 1 in telephone


bracket 2.

7
8
9

351

Controls in detail
Features

1 Making/receiving calls with the hands-

When the telephone is switched off, the


multi-function display will show Telephone off.

free device

2
3
4
5
6

Risk of accident

When the telephone is switched on but


the PIN has not yet been entered, the
multi-function display will show Enter
telephone PIN.

Operating mobile telephones that have an


aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.
As a result, the operating reliability and road
safety is at considerable risk.
Only use the telephone with a permanently
installed hands-free system and if the traffic
conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.

Enter PIN using the mobile telephone


keypad and confirm.
1 Network operator logo
2 Network signal display

The telephone will search for a cellular


network.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied

When the network logo 1 and network reception bar 2 are shown in the
multi-function display, the mobile telephone is ready for operation.

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.


Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The multi-function display switches to


the telephone menu.

8
9

352

Controls in detail
Features
To dial a new number
Enter the telephone number on the
telephone keypad.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to dial the
number.
To receive a call

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to take the call.
The multi-function display will show:
The number or call or
the entry from your personal telephone book
the call duration

If the phones rings, the multi-function display will show:

To finish a call

Press the button to finish the call.


The driver information system returns
to the basic menu screen for the telephone.

3
To reject a call
It is possible to reject a call.
Press the button to reject a call.
The driver information system returns
to the menu that was active before the
call was made, e.g. Monitoring info
menu.

Call
Telephone number of caller (as long as
this has not been suppressed)

4
5
6
7

Taken call

8
9

353

Controls in detail
Features

1 To select a number from the telephone


book

The mobile telephone must be ready for

2 operation.
3

i
New numbers should be entered using
the telephone keypad.

When the Please wait event message


goes out, the transfer of data is complete.
Press button j or k on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the required
entry.

The driver information system selects


the relevant number.
When a connection is made, the name and
number of the person you are calling is
shown in the display as well as the duration
of the call.

4 Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The driver information system changes


to the telephone menu.

6 Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

7
8

The driver information system imports


the telephone book entries that are
stored on the SIM card or in the telephone. This can take up to 30 seconds.
The multi-function display shows
Please wait.

354

Duration of call
Telephone book entry

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

If no connection is made, the driver information system stores the selected number
in the redial memory.

Controls in detail
Features
Telephone book quick find function

Last number redial

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The driver information system stores the


most recently dialled numbers in the order
they were entered in the redial memory.

The driver information system changes


to the telephone menu.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows the entry
required.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Press and hold button j or k on


the multi-function steering wheel.

1
2
3

The driver information system selects


the relevant number.

The driver information system switches


from one initial letter to the next.

When the display shows the initial letter you are looking for, release the button.

The display will show the first entry beginning with the letter you have chosen.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows the entry
required.

Redial memory entry

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The driver information system selects


the first entry in the redial memory.

8
9

355

Controls in detail
Features

1
2

Sockets
The vehicle can be equipped with up to
4 sockets.
Page
24 V/0 A socket in ashtray

356

24 V/10 A socket in
dashboard

356

24 V/10 A socket in battery


tray

358

12 V/15 A socket in
dashboard

357

Voltage transformer

3
4

12 V/8 A

358

12 V/15 A

358

8
9

356

24 V/10 A socket in ashtray

24 V/10 A socket in dashboard

The housing for the cigarette lighter in the


ashtray is also a socket. The socket is designed for equipment with a maximum
power draw of 240 W.

The socket is located in the stowage compartment above the ashtray. The socket is
designed for equipment with a maximum
power draw of 240 W.

1 24 V/10 A socket

2 24 V/10 A socket

Controls in detail
Features
12 V/15 A socket in dashboard

To switch on the 12 V socket

To switch off the 12 V socket

The socket is located in the dashboard on


the co-driver's side. It can be switched on
and off. Power is supplied through a 12 V/
15 A voltage transformer.

Press the upper section of the 12 V


switch.

Press the lower section of the 12 V


switch.

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up.

The indicator lamp in the switch goes


out.

It is designed for the use of equipment with


a maximum power draw of 180 W.

2
3
4
5
6
7

3 12 V/15 A socket

8
9

357

Controls in detail
Features

1 24 V/10 A socket in battery tray


All vehicles except tractor units:

Voltage transformer
12 V/8 A voltage transformer

2 The socket is designed for the use of an in- The vehicle features a 12 V/8 A voltage
spection lamp. It is located on the righthand side in the battery tray.

3 It is designed for the use of equipment with


a maximum power draw of 240 W.

transformer as standard for the use of

CB radio equipment

The voltage transformer is intended to


supply power to the socket only. The
connection of further equipment to the
12 V source is not permitted. Further
information is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

12 V audio equipment

6
7
4 24 V/10 A socket (example)

8
9

358

The voltage transformer supplies the


12 V/15 A socket with power. It is
switched on or off with the 12 V switch
( page 22).

Radio equipment
Telephone/fax machine

12 V/15 A voltage transformer

The voltage transformer is intended for


the operation of this equipment only.
The connection of further equipment to
the 12 V source is not permitted. Further information is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Controls in detail
Features
To switch the audio equipment on/off

Operating audio equipment

You can switch the audio equipment on or


off using switch 2 in the berth switch unit.

The buttons on the multi-function steering


wheel 1 and the audio equipment switch
in the berth switch unit 2 may be used to
operate the basic functions of the following audio equipment

Press and hold switch 2 y for approximately three seconds.

Truckline CC30
Truckline CC70
Truckline CD70
You must select the Audio menu to
choose a radio station ( page 361)

1 Multi-function steering wheel buttons


2 Audio equipment switches in the berth
switch unit

operate the CD player ( page 363)

operate the cassette player


( page 364)

Commercially available audio equipment cannot be operated using the buttons in the multi-function steering
wheel or the audio equipment switches
in the berth switch unit. For further information contact a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

using the buttons of the multi-function


steering wheel.

1
2

If the radio is switched off, it will be


switched on.

If the radio is switched on, it will be


switched off.

When you are seated in the driver's


seat, you can only switch the equipment on or off at the radio. Observe the
operating instructions issued by the
manufacturer.

6
7
8
9

359

Controls in detail
Features

1 To adjust the volume


2

You can adjust the volume of the audio


equipment with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel and the audio
equipment switch in the berth switch unit.

3 With multi-function steering wheel buttons

4 Press the button.


The volume will increase

5 Press button .
The volume will decrease.

i
You can still adjust the volume of the
audio equipment even if the audio
menu is not shown in the multi-function
display.
If the driver information system shows
the ? symbol in the multi-function
display, you can use the and
buttons on the multi-function
steering wheel to make a selection or
adjustment. The volume control then
no longer works.

With the audio equipment switch in


the berth switch unit

Press switch $ briefly.


The volume will increase

Press switch y briefly.


The volume will decrease.

7
8
9

360

Controls in detail
Features
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel.

To select a radio station


When you have selected the audio menu,
use the arrow buttons to

If the radio station search function is


active, the audio equipment will search
for the next or previous station in the
selected frequency band.

activate the station search function


change between stored radio stations

i
The arrow button function in radio
mode can be adjusted in the Configuration sub menu of the Settings menu
( page 362).
You can only store new radio stations
at the audio equipment.
The audio equipment can also be used
in the normal way.

If the store function is active, the audio


equipment will change to the next or
previous stored radio station.
1 Frequency and stored station number
2 Radio traffic information1
3 Frequency or station name1

1
2
3
4
5

Switch on the audio equipment. Observe the operating instructions issued


by the manufacturer.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Audio.

7
8
9

1. On RDS only

361

Controls in detail
Features

1 To set the function of the arrow buttons

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Configuration.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Arrow
buttons in radio mode.

in radio mode

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight


is on Station search.

4
5
6

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Settings.

7
8
9

362

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight


is on Memory.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to move on to the next
menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.

Controls in detail
Features
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

To operate the CD player


Audio equipment: Truckline CD70

The CD player selects the next track.

Switch on the audio equipment and select the CD player. Observe the operating instructions issued by the
manufacturer.

Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel.


The CD player selects the previous
track.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Audio.

1
2
3
4

1 Current CD CD changer operation


2 Radio traffic information1
3 Current track

5
6
7
8
9

1. On RDS only

363

Controls in detail
Features

2 Once you have selected the audio menu,

Switch on the audio equipment and select the cassette player. Observe the
operating instructions issued by the
manufacturer.

3 to fast forward or reverse the cassette

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Audio.

1 To operate the cassette player


Audio equipment: Truckline CC30 or CC70
you can operate the cassette player using
the arrow buttons

to the next or previous track in cassette search mode.


to fast forward or reverse the cassette
in wind/rewind mode

1 Cassette operation
2 Radio traffic information1
3 Cassette side

6
7
8
9
1. On RDS only

364

Controls in detail
Features
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
If the rewind/wind function is active,
the cassette player will rewind 8 or
wind 9 the cassette.
If the track search function is active,
the cassette player will rewind 0 to
the start of the current track or fast forward to the beginning of the next
track .

To set the function of the arrow buttons


in cassette mode

Press button or on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Settings.

1
2

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is on Configuration.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Arrow
buttons in cassette mode.

3
4

The audio equipment will stop the


winding function when

the end of the cassette, the start of


the current track or the next track is
detected

you press the arrow button again

8
9

365

Controls in detail
Features

1 Press the button on the multi-

function steering wheel. The highlight


is on Track search.

2 Press the button on the multi3

function steering wheel. The highlight


is on Fast forward and Rewind.

4
5
6
7
8
9

366

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to accept
the setting and to move on to the next
menu.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
function in the configuration menu.

Operation
Driving tips
Refuelling
Trailer/semitrailer 1
Wind deflector
Tippers
Tyres and wheels

2
3

Winter operation
Care 4
Maintenance

5
6
7
8
9

367

Operation
Driving tips
Driving tips

1 The "Operation" section contains detailed


information about operating, maintaining
and caring for your vehicle.

Risk of accident

Distribute the load on the vehicle uniformly.


Avoid excessive loads on one side. The vehicle's driving, braking and steering characteristics vary with the type of load, the
weight and the centre of gravity of the load.
Secure loads if necessary.

2
3
4

Excessive loading at the rear will have a particularly adverse effect on the vehicle's handling characteristics. For this reason,
greater care and attention are called for
when driving with a load at the rear.

5
6

Do not exceed the permissible axle loads,


the wheel loads ( axle load) or the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight.
There is otherwise the risk of damage to
tyres, the chassis frame and axles.

7
8
9

368

Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift: The Telligent automatic gearshift


switches off automatically at idling speed
(approximately 550 rpm). On uphill or downhill slopes, do not allow the engine speed to
drop to idling speed (approximately
550 rpm).

!
When driving the vehicle on rough terrain, ensure that the drive wheels always have sufficient grip.
Vehicles without ASR: Do not allow the
drive wheels to spin. There is otherwise
a risk of damage to the differential.
Switch on the differential locks.
During the journey, check the instrument readings periodically.

Operation
Driving tips

Environmental note

Regular vehicle maintenance is one of the


preconditions for moderate fuel consumption.

Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption depends on
the vehicle design
the driving style
the operating conditions
the type of fuel used (diesel fuel, FAME
fuel)

i
Fuel consumption values can be called
up in the Trip computer menu in the
driver's information system
( page 166).

Vehicle design

Operating conditions

Tyre size, tyre tread, tyre pressures,


tyre condition

trailer towing and tipper operation

Body, wind deflector

dense urban traffic and frequent short


journeys

Gear ratios in the drive train


Additional equipment (air conditioning,
auxiliary heating, PTO, viscous fan
clutch)

mountainous terrain

vehicle load
operation when stationary

frequent cold starts

Driving style

To keep fuel consumption low,

As a result of the numerous superstructure variants, it is impossible to provide


a precise fuel consumption value in
these Operating Instructions.

avoid frequent acceleration and braking


anticipate road and traffic conditions

maintain an economical engine speed


range

5
6
7
8
9

369

Operation
Driving tips

1
2
3

Engine oil consumption


When the engine is run in, oil consumption
may reach 0.5% of the fuel consumption
recorded in actual operating circumstances. A longer distance covered and more arduous operating conditions could lead to
certain vehicles exceeding this value.

The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km)


Running the vehicle in
It is of decisive importance for the engine
not to be subjected to its full rated load
during the running-in period.
Run the vehicle in gently. Drive at varying road and engine speeds.
Avoid high engine speeds. Do not drive
any more than of the maximum road
speed for each gear.

Change gear in good time. Do not shift


down to brake the vehicle.

6
7
8
9

370

After a distance of 1,250 miles (2,000 km),


you can gradually bring the vehicle up to
full road and engine speed.
Wheel nuts
Risk of accident

On new vehicles there is the risk that the


wheel nuts could work loose if they are not
tightened. The wheel nuts must be tightened
after driving 30 miles (50 km). Observe the
notes on page 392 and torques on
page 577.

Operation
Driving tips
After dark, the vehicle must have its parking lamps on if it is standing on the public
After driving on a wet surface, particuhighway. In urban areas, it is also possible
larly if road salt has been spread, apply
to attach reflective overnight parking
the brakes firmly before parking the veboards. Observe the legal requirements.
hicle. The heat generated will help to dry
the brake discs. The prevents corrosion Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift: If in an emergency it is necessary to
of the brake discs.
park the vehicle without the parking brake
applied, engage a gear. Chock the vehiParking
cle's wheels additionally to prevent it from
Always stop the engine with the parking
rolling away.
brakes applied. For notes on applying the
parking brake ( page 130).
!
When parking the vehicle, do not allow
When the vehicle is parked, it must be prethe wheels to mount the kerb. This
vented from rolling away by chocking at
could damage the tyres or steering
least one wheel. Carrying a wheel chock in
components.
an easily accessible position on the vehicle
is a legal requirement.

Brakes

The vehicle is equipped with a Telligent


brake system. For notes on braking with
anti-lock protection ( page 84).

Activate the continuous brake to make full


use of the engine braking effect on long
downhill sections ( page 261).
Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift: If the continuous brake is selected,
the transmission will automatically shift
down to the next appropriate gear, depending on the road and engine speed.

!
Do not park the vehicle immediately after the brakes have been subjected to
severe loads, such as driving through
valleys. Drive on a short distance to allow the airflow to cool the brakes
down.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

371

Operation
Refuelling
Refuelling

1
2
3
4

Risk of injury/explosion

Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames


and smoking are therefore prohibited when
fuel is being handled.
Switch off the auxiliary heating when refuelling to prevent fuel vapours from igniting in
the auxiliary heating exhaust system.
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
skin, eyes or clothing.

5
6

Your health is at risk:


if your skin or eyes come into direct contact with fuel
if you inhale fuel vapours

Clean affected areas of skin with soap


and water.
If fuel comes into contact with the eyes,
wash them thoroughly with clean water
and consult a doctor.
Change out of soiled clothing without
delay.
If fuel is swallowed, a doctor should be
consulted immediately.
Keep fuel away from children.

Refuelling the vehicle from drums or canisters could introduce impurities into the
fuel system. This can lead to fuel system
malfunctions.
Filter the fuel before filling the tank.

!
Do not add bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel),
petrol or fuel additives to diesel fuel.

8
9

372

You will find information about fuel in the


"Technical data" section ( page 562).

i
Check the fuel prefilter with heated water separator regularly for condensation.

Environmental note

Unless they are handled properly, fuels constitute a risk both for people and for the environment. Fuels must not be allowed to get
into the sewage system, surface waters, the
ground water or the ground itself.

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
Trailer/semitrailer
Trailer/semitrailer coupling

Coupling up

The trailer tow hitch or semitrailer coupling


is one of the vehicle components with particular importance for road safety. Please
comply precisely with the manufacturer's
operating, care and maintenance instructions. For further information, also see
page 416.
Risk of accident and injury

Risk of trailer breaking away.


Check longitudinal play in the trailer tow
hitch every day. To do this, move the towbar
body of the hitch firmly forwards and back.
Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play
is detected, have it eliminated at once.

Towing semitrailers
Before coupling (if "one-man operation" is
possible) make sure that the semitrailer
plate is at least 50 mm lower than the upper edge of the coupling plate.
Reverse and couple up the semitrailer.
After coupling up a semitrailer, lock the
levers to prevent unauthorised operation which could lead to the coupling
becoming detached.
Connect cables and compressed-air
lines ( page 375).

Driving could cause the centre of the


mudguard to come into contact with
the tyres. In order to prevent damage
during operation with a semitrailer,
DaimlerChrysler recommends that the
middle mudguard is removed, provided
this is legally permitted.

2
3
4

Risk of accident and injury

Objects thrown up by the road surface could


injure or endanger other road users. For this
reason, make sure that the rear wheels are
protected by mudguards when the semitrailer tractor vehicle is driven without a trailer.
If various semitrailers are towed, too much
play could be present between the kingpin
and the coupling plate. This is not permissible. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

5
6
7
8
9

373

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer

1 Truck/trailer combination
2

Before coupling to a trailer, apply the


parking brake and release the service
brake.

Chock the trailer's rear wheels to prevent it from rolling away.

Check that the coupling tracer of the


trailer coupling is secured correctly in
the appropriate locating pin or safety
knob.

Caution should be taken when guiding the


rail since there is a risk drawbar impact as a
result of an uncontrolled movement.

Reverse and couple up the trailer.

Nobody should be present between the vehicle and the trailer as the vehicle is reversed towards the trailer.

Do not uncouple trailers with overrun brakes


when the brakes have been applied by the
overrun mechanism.

Position the towbar at the height of the


trailer coupling.

5
6

Do not allow the trailer to run onto the tractor vehicle when coupling.

The unbraked front axle of the trailer


must be able to turn.

Risk of accident and injury

Risk of accident and injury

Trailer tow hitch (example)

1 Locating pin for coupling pin


Connect cables and compressed-air
lines ( page 375).

There is a risk that the trailer may break


away. Check the trailer coupling regularly
for longitudinal play. To do this, move the
towbar body of the hitch firmly forwards and
back. Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it eliminated at
once.
Check the tightness of the trailer coupling
securing bolts at the end cross-member of
the vehicle's frame regularly, and retighten
if necessary.

374

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer

Risk of accident and injury

There is a risk that the trailer may break


away. Clean the trailer coupling regularly as
stated in the manufacturer's instructions.
Check the towbar mountings and end nut.

Connecting cables, compressed-air and


hydraulic lines

Vehicles intended to carry containers or demountable bodies: Objects thrown up by the


road surface could injure or endanger other
road users. For this reason, make sure that
the front and rear wheels are protected by
mudguards when the vehicle is driven without a trailer.
Vehicles with centre-axle trailer: No load is
to be carried on trailers of this type if there
is no load on the towing vehicle.

Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane:


Centre-axle trailers are not to be towed.

4
Connections for semitrailer (example)

Connections for semitrailer (example)

1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow)


2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red)
3 Blank socket
4 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin
5 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin

5
6
7
8
9

375

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer

1 On semitrailer tractor vehicles with sidemounted wind deflectors:

2
3

Before connecting or disconnecting the


compressed-air lines and cables, swing
the right-hand wind deflector inwards
( page 381).

4
5
6

Semitrailer tractor vehicles may only


tow semitrailers with a 24 V lighting
system.
Connecting the cable brake system
When driving with the semitrailer tractor
vehicle

Route cables, compressed-air and hydraulic lines so that they can yield
when the vehicle is cornered without
incurring tension, kinking or abrasion.

without a semitrailer

Before connecting electrical cables,


check that the voltage rating of the
consumer equipment on the trailer/
semitrailer is correct.

with a semitrailer without ABS:

with a semitrailer not equipped with an


electronically controlled brake system
or
Insert the connector cable into the
"blank" socket.
Check the function checks of the
Telligent brake system in the multifunction display after connecting the
connector cable ( page 77).

7
8
9

376

When driving with the semitrailer tractor


vehicle
with a semitrailer with ABS or
an electronic brake system:
Remove the connector cable from the
"blank" socket and insert it in the trailer's connector.
Connecting the cable voltage supply to
the trailer/semitrailer
Remove the connector cable from the
"blank" socket and insert it in the trailer's connector.
Check that the lighting on the trailer/
semitrailer, including turn signals and
brake lamps, is clean and in working order.

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
Connecting the compressed-air lines

Disconnecting the compressed-air


lines

Connect the brake line coupling head


(yellow).

Risk of accident and injury

Connect the reservoir line coupling


head (red).

After connecting the compressed-air


lines to the trailer, adjust the brake
pressure regulator (if installed).
After pulling away, check the operation
of the trailer/semitrailer brake system.

Always keep to this order of work when detaching the coupling heads, otherwise the
trailer brake will be released and the unbraked trailer could be inadvertently set in
motion.

i
The shutoff valves in the coupling
heads open automatically when the
connection is made.

3
4

Connections for trailer (example)

1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow)


2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red)
3 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin
4 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin
5 Duomatic coupling
Reservoir line and brake line

Secure the towing vehicle by applying


the parking brake ( page 62).

Apply the parking brake on the trailer/


semitrailer. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

Detach the reservoir line (red).

The brakes of the trailer/semitrailer


will be applied automatically.

8
9

377

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer

1 In addition, apply the mechanical park2


3

ing brake on the trailer/semitrailer.


Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.

Detach the brake line coupling head


(yellow).

Trailer/semitrailer monitoring
Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding
sensor system:

Minimum and maximum values for the load


monitoring can be programmed in the
"Settings" menu ( page 189).

Depending on the equipment fitted, the


trailer/semitrailer monitoring system is
able to monitor the following functions on
a maximum of 5 trailers/semitrailers simultaneously:

The current load data and the identification


number (VIN) of the trailer/semitrailer can
be called up in the "Monitoring info" menu
( page 161).

Load temperature

Load pressure
Load liquid quantity

Automatic bulb check.

i
7

Observe the legal requirements regarding the permissible number of trailers


in all countries concerned.

8
9

378

Load monitoring

The driver information system in the multifunction display shows an event message
if the set values are too low or are exceeded.

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
The driver information system checks the
bulbs on the trailer in connection with the
instrument panel function check.

i
An event message appears if the driver
information system detects a faulty
bulb.

Falling short of/exceeding the load


temperature specified value

1 Symbol for trailer 1


2 Status indicator

Replace faulty bulbs before starting a


journey.

Loading platform approach aid


Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding
sensor system:
Risk of accident

The loading platform approach aid does not


relieve the driver of his duty to make sure
that there are no persons/obstacles in the
danger area behind the truck/trailer combination.
If necessary, a second person should assist
during manoeuvring.

2
3
4
5
6

Automatic bulb check


Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding
sensor system:

7
8
9

379

Operation
Trailer/semitrailer

1 The loading platform approach aid is acti-

vated when reverse gear is engaged.

2
3

The warning buzzer will also sound at


distances less than 50 cm.

When reversing, the distance between the


trailer/semitrailer and a fixed obstacle is
indicated by the driver information system
in the multifunction display as a numerical
value and a bar chart.

When the ramp is reached, the loading


platform approach aid activates the
brake system to stop the truck/trailer
combination.

4
Distances less than 100 cm

5
6
7
8

Distance in centimetres

1 Loading platform approach aid symbol


Distances less than 50 cm

380

Operation
Wind deflector
Wind deflector
Wind deflector on cab
Risk of accident

Two persons are needed to adjust the wind


deflector.
Make sure that the working surface is suitable, firm and anti-slip.

Adjust the wind deflector according to the


size and shape of the vehicle's body or
semitrailer.
Take the wind deflector adjustment values from the instruction plate on the inside of the driver's door.

When adjusting the wind deflector, do


not exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted height. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must
not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in).

Observe the relevant national and international regulations if the vehicle is


used for cross-border transport.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

381

Operation
Wind deflector

1 Adjusting the wind deflector

Read off the wind deflector adjustment


values on the instruction plate on the
inside of the driver's door.

Loosen the securing bolts on the adjustment rails and hold the wind deflector.

Environmental note

4
5 1 Securing bolts

2 Adjustment rails

Measure the height difference (H) and


separation (S) between the cab and the
body/semitrailer ( page 383).

7
8
9

382

A correctly set wind deflector reduces both


fuel consumption and environment impact.

Select and adjust to the best possible


retaining point on the adjustment rails.
Make sure that the right and left-hand
adjustment heights are the same.
Tighten the securing bolts on the adjustment rails.

Operation
Wind deflector
Adjustment diagram (example)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Adjustment example: Vehicles with long cab and high roof


H Height difference between the cab roof and the upper edge of the body/trailer = 1,250 mm

S Height difference between the back wall of the cab and the body/trailer = 150 mm
A Number of adjustment detents (1 14) = Adjustment detents 12

383

Operation
Wind deflector

Side wind deflector on the cab


Semitrailer tractor vehicle:

2 The right wind deflector can be swung in3


4

wards to maintain accessibility to the compressed-air lines and cables during


coupling/uncoupling.
Swing the wind deflector inwards by
applying pressure to the rear of the
side wing via the turning point of the
pressurised gas spring.

5 Swing the wind deflector to the drive


6

position by pulling the side wing via the


turning point of the pressurised gas
spring.

7
8
9

384

1 Side wing
2 Gas spring

Operation
Tippers
Tippers
Tipper operation
Risk of accident and injury

Ensure that no persons are

When tipping the load, there is a risk that the


vehicle could overturn.
When tipping, ensure that the vehicle is
standing firmly and remains horizontal.
The wheels subjected to extra load as the
tipper operates must be on a firm surface.
Three-way tipper: insert the pins into the pivots on the side at which the load is to be
tipped.

in the slewing range of the gate


in the tipping area or under the raised
tipper body

under the container

under the tipping body or interchangeable platforms.


When working underneath the raised tipper
body (e.g. to access the spare wheel) support the tipper body with the tipper body
support.

4
1 Tipper body support (example)

5
6

Comply with safety regulations and the operating instructions issued by the tipper
manufacturer.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: before


tipping, lower the chassis frame to the stop.

8
9

385

Operation
Tippers

1 Loading
2
3

Tipping

Three-way tipper:

Load the tipper body so that the centre


of gravity is as central as possible.

Insert the pins into the pivots on the


side at which the load is to be tipped.

Load large rocks or pieces of rubble


carefully and do not drop them into the
body from a great height.

Switch the tipper pump (power takeoff) on.

1 Tipper body indicator lamp

4
Before tipping
Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:


Lower the chassis frame to the stop.

The multi-function display shows the


chassis in its normal position B.

For how to lower the chassis, see


( page 294).

8
9

386

The indicator lamp in the switch lights


up and J is shown in the multi-function display.

Operation
Tippers
After tipping

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:

Before driving off:

Raise the chassis to its normal (travel)


position.

Lower the tipper body fully.


Close the gate.
Lock the gate.

Multi-function display

1 Display showing chassis in its normal


position for vehicles with pneumatic
suspension
2 Power take-off display

The B chassis in normal position


display in the multi-function display
must go out.

1
2
3

Switch the tipper pump (power takeoff) off. Engage the tipper valve level in
the driving position.

Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.

The c tipper body indicator lamp on


the instrument panel and the J
power take-off display in the multifunction display must go out.

6
7
8
9

387

Operation
Tippers

1 Demountable tipper
2

With the vehicle stationary, the parking


brake applied and the engine running:

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension and


automatic chassis lowering feature:
Risk of accident and injury

Engage the power take-off


( page 255).

3
When connecting/removing

Containers
Tipping bodies
Interchangeable platforms

ensure that the vehicle is standing firmly


and remains horizontal.

Comply with safety regulations and the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.

7
8
9

388

Multi-function display

1 Display showing chassis in its normal


position for vehicles with pneumatic
suspension
2 Power take-off display

The J symbol appears in the multifunction display to indicate that the


power take-off is engaged. The chassis
frame lowers automatically to the lowest position. The multi-function display
shows the chassis in its normal
position B.

Operation
Tippers
After picking up/setting down a
container/tipper body
Switch the power take-off off.
The J power take-off display in the
multi-function display goes out.
To raise the chassis frame to the normal (driving) position, see "Telligent
level control", raising/lowering the
chassis ( page 290).
The B symbol for chassis in normal
position in the multi-function display
goes out.

When picking up or setting down a container, the wheels on the front axle
must not be allowed to lift clear of the
ground. Risk of damage to the chassis
frame.

2
3

Run the engine when coupling to a


semitrailer or picking up demountable
bodies or containers.

Observe the operating instructions issued


by the body manufacturer.

If a chassis height has been stored:


Press memory button M1 ( page 292).

The chassis raises to the stored height.

7
8
9

389

Operation
Tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheels

1
2
3
4

Checking the tyres


Tyre damage is one of the most frequent
causes of the failure of commercial vehicles.
Risk of fire and accident

6
7
8

External tyre damage

Tyres age from the influence of sunlight and


the environment. The rubber of the tyre
gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become
harder and more brittle and they begin to
split through age.

Sufficient tread depth

is prejudicial to operating safety

Foreign objects between the twin


tyres

Check tyre pressures regularly before starting a journey and correct as necessary.

Environmental note

Tyre pressures which are too low may result


in increased fuel consumption.

390

Risk of accident

Foreign objects in the tyre tread

leads to overheating of the tyres up to


the point of ignition

Determining the age of the tyres

Correct tyre pressures


( page 579)

Insufficient tyre pressure


damages or destroys tyres

Before starting a journey, check the


tyres on the trailer/semitrailer for:

i
Observe the legal requirements regarding the minimum tread depth in all
countries concerned.
In Germany, the minimum tread depth
is 1.6 mm.

Tyres more than six years old are no longer


safe for use.
Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after
six years at the latest. This also applies to
the spare wheel.

Operation
Tyres and wheels
You can establish the age of the tyre using
the four digit DOT code number on the side
wall of the tyre.

Changing the tyre size

The braking characteristics of a vehicle with


a Telligent brake system could be affected
if a non-approved tyre size is used.

Comply also with the required tyre load


capacity and the speed index for your
vehicle.

After fitting another tyre size the Telligent


brake system, the tachograph and the
speedometer must be reprogrammed.

i
Details about tyre and wheel rim size,
tyre load capacity and speed index can
be found in the vehicle's certificate.

Risk of accident
1 DOT code number
2 Calendar week
3 Year of production

Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply
in particular with the permissible tyre
specifications for each country. These
specifications may specify a certain
type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit
the use of certain types of tyres which
may be permissible in other countries.

You can obtain information about how


to program the Telligent brake system from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.

2
3
4

7
8
9

391

Operation
Tyres and wheels

Tightening wheel nuts

i
2
3
4
5

Check wheel nuts regularly for tightness. Tighten if necessary.


On light-alloy wheels, the wheel nuts
are not flush with the wheel bolts when
tightened.
Replace damaged cover caps and
wheel nut covers.

Wheel nut cover caps (front axle)

Observe the wheel nut tightening torques ( page 577).

1 To release
2 To tighten

6
7
8
9

392

1 Wheel nut cover

Operation
Tyres and wheels
Loosen wheel nut cover caps with the
wheel nut wrench (in vehicle tool kit)
and remove them.

Risk of accident

Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern.

Tighten the wheel nuts of a newly changed


wheel after driving 30 miles (50 km).

Place the wheel covers on the wheel


nuts and tighten hand-tight with the
wheel stud wrench.

If new or repainted wheels are fitted, the


wheel nuts must be retightened again after
approximately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to
5,000 km) have been covered. Observe the
wheel nut tightening torques ( page 577).

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

393

Operation
Winter operation
Winter operation

1 Before the onset of winter, make sure that


2

the coolant contains sufficient antifreeze ( page 561)


the fuel used is winterproof
( page 562)

3 when using single-grade engine oils the


4
5
6

changeover is completed in good time


( page 557)
the windscreen washer/headlamp
cleaning system contains sufficient antifreeze ( page 574)
tyres with a high grip tread pattern, if
possible M+S tyres, are fitted
snow chains are fitted to the vehicle

7
8
9

394

Winter driving
Adapt your driving style to suit road conditions.

!
Vehicles without acceleration skid control (ASR): a rapid change from smooth
to rough road surfaces and spinning of
the drive wheels at the same time may
result in damage to the axle differential. Avoid wheelspin at the drive
wheels.

i
In snow and slush and on icy roads, fit
snow chains to the drive wheels in
good time.
All-wheel-drive vehicles:
Activate inter-axle locks on the transfer
case ( page 253).
Vehicles with Telligent stability control (SR):
In wintry road conditions, the optimum
effectiveness of the Telligent stability
control system is only achieved when
M+S tyres are fitted.

Operation
Winter operation
Snow chains increase traction in wintry
road conditions.

Snow chains
Risk of accident

Driving too fast with snow chains fitted may


result in the chains tearing, injury to other
road users or damage to the vehicle. Do not
exceed the maximum permissible speeds
for operation with snow chains. Observe the
legal requirements in all countries concerned.
In Germany, the legally permissible maximum speeds when using snow chains is
50 km/h.

!
You should only use snow chains that
have been approved by MercedesBenz.
There is a risk when fitting to the front
axles that the snow chains could damage the steering linkage components.
After fitting, make sure that the snow
chains have adequate clearance from
steering linkage components
( page 396).

The law specifies that snow chains


should be removed as soon as possible
once road surfaces are clear of snow.
The driving and braking characteristics
are worsened by driving with snow
chains fitted on roads clear of snow.
Vehicles with Telligent stability control (SR):
If traction problems occur when driving
with snow chains, deactivate stability
control ( page 90).

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

395

Operation
Winter operation

1 Checking the tyre clearance


When fitting snow chains on the front axle:

Start the engine.

Turn the steering wheel towards the


front-passenger side to the stop.

With the steering on full lock, there


must be a clearance of at least 30 mm
between the snow chain and the steering pushrod.

4
5
6
7

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake applied:

Clearance between snow chain and steering


pushrod

Fit snow chains in accordance with the


fitting instructions of the chain manufacturer.

8
9

396

!
If the distance is less than 30 mm,
there is a risk that the snow chains
could damage the steering linkage
components. Remove the snow chains
and have the steering geometry
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Operation
Care
Care
Information is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if impurities or damage cannot be removed or repaired by care products.
Risk of accident

Always keep care products sealed and out


of the reach of children. Always follow the
instructions for using the care products.
Fuels must not be used as cleaning agents.
Fuels are highly flammable and constitute a
health hazard.

Environmental note

Wash the vehicle only at a properly


equipped wash bay. Dispose of empty containers, used cleaning materials and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible
manner.

High-pressure cleaners
Observe the operating instructions issued
by the manufacturer.

Keep the water jet constantly moving while


cleaning. To prevent damage do not point
the water jet directly at

Door joints

Air spring bellows

Brake hoses
Electrical components

Connectors or
Seals

Minimum distance between high-pressure


nozzle and item being cleaned:

Risk of accident

approximately 70 cm for round-spray


jets

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with


round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or airspring bellows. The water jet could damage
the tyres or air spring bellows. Replace damaged wheels or air spring bellows.

approximately 30 cm for flat-spray jets


and concentrated power jets

5
6
7
8
9

397

Operation
Care

Caring for the exterior of your


vehicle

Dirt

Care product

Care

Tree resin, bird droppings

Stain remover

Remove the stain using a damp cloth, and


buff up the area using a dry cloth.

Grease stains

Cleaning petroleum

Carefully remove using a soft cloth and a


dab of cleaning petroleum.

Do not use petroleum for vehicles.

Insect remains

Insect remover

Spray the insect remains and leave for a


while for the insect remover to take effect.

Remove insect remains before using an automatic car wash.

Wash off the insect remains with water.

Do not allow insect remover to dry


in the sun.

3
4
5

Dry with a soft cloth.

6
7
8
9

398

Notes

Operation
Care

Dirt

Care product

Corrosion

Tar stains

Tar remover

Care

Notes

Remove corrosion on the chassis components and underbody of the cab. Protect the
exposed areas with primer, paint, PVC underseal or wax as appropriate.

Corrosion results from damage


caused by stone impact, chippings
or salt residue.

In the winter, wash the vehicle more


frequently in order to remove salt
residue.

Spray soiled areas. Leave for one minute for


the tar remover to take effect.
Wipe the tar off with a soft cloth.

Remove tar stains as soon as possible. Tar stains which have been
present for a long time are difficult
to remove.

4
5
6
7
8
9

399

Operation
Care

1
2

Vehicle components

Care product

Care

Notes

Aluminium gates

Car shampoo

Brush down with water.

Do not use abrasive cleaners.

Clean with water.

Do not use paint, spray or lubricating


products, petroleum ether, benzene,
kerosene or mineral oil. Do not point the
water jet on the high-pressure cleaner
directly at the compressed-air lines.

Compressed-air lines

3
4

Vehicle exterior

Car shampoo

Wash the vehicle down with plenty of wa- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunter.
light.
Wash the sponge out regularly.

Rinse off with clean water.

Clean the air inlet for the ventilation


carefully.

In the winter, remove salt residue as


quickly as possible and thoroughly.

Do not forget the wheel arches when


you are washing the underside of the vehicle.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with
round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or
air-spring bellows.

8
9

400

Operation
Care

Vehicle
components

Care product

Care

Paintwork and painted attachments

Gloss preserver

Protects the paint and maintains its shine. Do not use any care products in direct
sunlight or if the bonnet is warm.
For heavy dirt and to remove minor

Polish

scratches on varnished wooden components.

Paintwork cleaner
Polishing wad

Cleans ageing or weathered paintwork.

Touch-up stick
Spray can
Polishing paste
Light-alloy wheels

Car shampoo
Cleaning agent for
light-alloy wheels

Notes

Keep care products away from unpainted attachments (e.g. door handles or
seals). This will prevent stains.

Have the vehicle checked regularly for


minor paintwork damage at a specialist
For temporary touching up of minor paintworkshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service
work damage.
Centre.
Polishes very dirty or weathered paintwork and polishes out minor scratches.
Clean light-alloy wheels weekly using a
soft sponge and warm water.
Remove stubborn dirt (grease, oil, brake
dust) using a soft cloth and petroleum
ether.

Only use cleaning agents. Acidic or alkaline cleaning agents may cause the
wheel bolts or the retainer springs of the
balance weights to rust. Do not use
abrasive cleaners.

4
5
6
7
8
9

401

Operation
Care

Vehicle
components

Care product

Care

Notes

Engine cleaning

Preservative agent

Have the engine preserved.

Protect the belt drive system from wax.


When using high-pressure or steam
spray cleaners, do not point the spray
directly onto electrical components and
electric cables.

3
4
5

Spare wheel retaining bolts

Rust solvent

Retarder (Telma)

Remove dirt rust. Spray using rust solvent.


Regular cleaning using high-pressure
cleaner.

Retarder must be cold. High-pressure


cleaning without solvent.
Take particular care when cleaning the
stator and any electrical connections.

6
Windows

Car window cleaner


with anti-misting
agent

Use a cleaning agent regularly. It is also


suitable for the plastic panes on the headlamps.

Windows

Intensive car window


cleaner

Use this cleaning product on stubborn or


oily dirt. It is not suitable for the plastic
panes of the headlamps.

7
8
9

402

Do not use this cleaning product for the


headlamps.

Operation
Care

Vehicle
components

Care product

Care

Notes

Window guides, win- Talcum


dow and door weatherstrips

Rub talcum into clean, dry window guides


and door/window seals.

Windscreen wiper
blade

Clean the wiper rubber with a cloth and a


washing solution.

Replace the wiper rubbers once or twice


a year.

Clean using a soft sponge and plenty of


warm water.

Do not scrub or scratch the plastic


panes of the headlamps. Avoid applying
lots of pressure.

Suitable for all locks.

Headlamps, rear
lamps, additional
turn signals

Car shampoo

Door lock

Door lock de-icer

6
7
8
9

403

Operation
Care

Caring for the interior of your vehicle


Care product

Vehicle
components
Floor covering

Car shampoo

Care

Use antistatic spray to prevent electrostatic charges from building up in the


vehicle.

Antistatic spray

Notes

Cockpit

Cockpit care agent

Distribute the care product evenly using a


soft cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.

Do not spray the care product on the


dashboard or its cover.

Roof lining

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

Always brush or vacuum dust away first.

Do not allow the roof lining to become


damp.

Clean heavy soiling with dry foam.


Dry foam fabric upholWash the roof lining using a cloth and car
stery cleaner
shampoo as a washing solution or stain reStain remover
mover if necessary.

5
6
Floormats

Car shampoo
Antistatic spray

8
9

404

Use antistatic spray to prevent electrostatic charges from building up in the


vehicle.

Operation
Care

Vehicle
components

Care product

Care

Notes

Cup holder

Upholstery cleaning
foam

Apply the cleaning product and wipe off


with a damp cloth.

Do not use any other product.

Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Rubber parts

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

3
Do not use any other care agents.
Do not oil or wax parts.

Cockpit care agent


Plastics care agent
Plastic parts

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

5
Do not use any other care agents.
Do not oil or wax parts.

Cockpit care agent


Plastics care agent

7
8
9

405

Operation
Care

Vehicle
components

Care product

Care

Leather upholstery

Leather care foam

Remove stains immediately.

Steering wheel

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

Wipe the steering wheel with a soft cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

Wipe the gear lever with a soft cloth.

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

Only clean the seat belts with these clean- Do not dry the seat belts in direct suning products or soap and clean, lukewarm light or at temperatures above 80 C.
water.
Do not bleach or dye the seat belts. This
could adversely affect the seat belt's
performance.

3
4
5

Gear lever
Seat belts

Upholstery cleaning
foam

7
8
9

406

Notes

Avoid making the perforated leather exWipe leather upholstery down with a damp cessively damp.
cloth and wipe dry.
Dry if necessary.
Do not use abrasive cleaners.

Dry if necessary.

Operation
Care

Vehicle
components

Care product

Care

Notes

Fabric upholstery

Car shampoo as a
washing solution

Remove stains immediately.

Seat covers or articles of clothing


which are not colourfast may discolour
the upholstery. Such stains cannot be
removed. Therefore use a suitable underlay on the upholstery.

Fabric upholstery
cleaner
Upholstery cleaning
foam
Stain remover

Curtains

Mild-action detergent

Always brush or vacuum dust away first.


Clean heavy soiling with dry foam.
Only use stain remover on stubborn
stains.

Do not use a stain remover or solvent.

Remove beer, wine and juice stains with a


clean cloth moistened with washing solution. Dab the affected areas with a clean
cloth moistened with washing solution.
Then clean the surface with a clean cloth
and clean water. Then dry.
Wash at 30 C.

3
4
5
6

The curtains are suitable for driers.

7
8
9

407

Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance

Telligent maintenance system

The Telligent maintenance system calculates service due dates for


oil change in mechanical assemblies
and

3 general service work,


4
5
6
7
8

depending on the vehicle's operating conditions.


The "Maintenance" menu of the driver information system provides a constant
overview of the service due dates required
for the vehicle and assemblies
( page 171).
An initial warning that service work is required appears 14 days before the service
due date. Additional messages are displayed if the service due date is reached or
exceeded ( page 172).

408

The initial service warning can be programmed to appear from 0 30 days


before the work is due. Further information is available from any MercedesBenz Service Centre.

If the work is carried out at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the fact that the
work has been carried out professionally will be confirmed in both the driver
information system and the Maintenance Booklet.

Any service work carried out should be


confirmed in the Maintenance menu. For
notes on confirming service due dates, see
( page 174).

!
If you confirm service work but do not
have the work carried out, this can lead
to increased wear and damage to the
vehicle and assemblies. Only confirm
service due dates if the service work
has been carried out.

Operation
Maintenance

Risk of injury

Before having maintenance or repair work


carried out, it is essential that you read the
authoritative sections of the technical documentation relating to maintenance and repair measures e.g.
Operating Instructions and workshop information.
Also familiarise yourself in particular with
the legal regulations, e.g.
work safety and accident prevention
regulations.
Otherwise you may not recognise dangers
and could injure yourself or others.

Use only operationally-safe support blocks


to raise the vehicle for work on the vehicle
underside. Do not use the vehicle's jack for
this purpose. The vehicle's jack should only
be used to raise the vehicle for a short period of time.

i
Mercedes-Benz original parts undergo
rigorous quality control checks. Each
part has been specifically developed
and manufactured or selected and
adapted to the requirements of
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The function,
safety and value of your vehicle are
thus maintained.
In Germany and some other countries,
certain parts are only officially approved for installation and attachment if
they comply with legal requirements.

Mercedes-Benz original parts satisfy


this requirement. If other parts are
used, this could lead to reduced safety
standards. The vehicle's warranty and
its operating permit could be invalidated. Every Mercedes-Benz Service Centre maintains a stock of MercedesBenz original parts required for maintenance and repair work.

1
2
3
4

Clean the chassis before extensive


maintenance work is carried out.

5
Reconditioned components/
reconditioned parts

To ensure economical repairs, MercedesBenz also offers reconditioned parts and


assemblies. These are of the same quality
and have the same warranty as new parts.
Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be
happy to provide further information.

7
8
9

409

Operation
Maintenance

High-pressure grease guns

2
3
4
5
6

If the grease gun has no safety device,


it may damage bearing points, seals,
etc.
If a high-pressure grease gun is used,
its delivery pressure must not exceed
400 bar. Before lubricating, clean lubricating nipples thoroughly.
If a special-purpose body or special
equipment is fitted, comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when using the high-pressure grease gun.

Regular checks
Checking the clutch mechanism fluid
level
Risk of fatal accident

Brake fluid is highly toxic. If you inadvertently swallow brake fluid, consult a doctor immediately.
Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes. In the event of contact
with the eyes when the eyelids are open,
rinse thoroughly with clean water. Consult a
doctor if you experience any pain.
When renewing brake fluid, always wear eye
protection.

Store brake fluid only in the sealed original


container and out of the reach of children.
Comply with safety regulations when handling brake fluid.

8
9

410

Brake fluid damages paintwork. If


brake fluid comes into contact with
paintwork, rinse it off with lots of clean
water.

Operation
Maintenance
!

If the hydraulic system loses brake fluid, it is not sufficiently sealed. Have the
hydraulic system checked.

The hydraulic system is a closed circuit.

Maintenance work should always be


carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The reservoir must be filled sufficiently, although not above the maximum mark.

Open the maintenance flap


( page 417).

Use only tested and approved brands.


Observe the boiling point (DOT 4 plus)
( page 569).

Environmental note

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Brake fluid must not be allowed to get into


the sewage system, surface waters or
ground water.
Dispose of brake fluid in an environmentally
responsible manner.

3
4
5
6

Clutch reservoir

1 Max. mark
2 Min. mark

8
9

411

Operation
Maintenance

1 Checking vehicle assemblies


2
3
4
5
6
7

Checking compressed-air lines

Thoroughly check the assemblies, e.g.


engine and transmission, each week or
whenever you refuel.

Examine the compressed-air lines regularly to ensure that they are in perfect
condition.

If assemblies are leaking, have these


checked immediately. The maintenance work should always be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have compressed-air lines replaced if


they show

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a specialist workshop.

8
9

412

buckling
chafe marks
dents
or other external damage
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it


has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Check the compressed-air brake system for tightness.
Checking compressed-air brake system
for leaks
Before checking the compressed-air
brake system, the compressed-air lines
should be checked.

Operation
Maintenance

Risk of accident

Checking with the parking brake applied

A leaking compressed-air system jeopardises vehicle and road safety. Have leaking
compressed-air systems repaired.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 1


2 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 2
With the vehicle stationary and the parking
brake applied:
Uncouple the compressed-air lines
from the trailer/semitrailer
( page 377).

Start the engine.

Press the or button until


Monitoring Info appears in the multifunction display.

Press the j or k button until


Pressure stored appears in the display.

Run the engine until the pressure in


brake circuits 1 and 2 is 10 bar.

Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

Then turn the key back to position 2 in


the ignition lock.
The compressed-air system is free from
leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure
in brake circuits 1 and 2 after three minutes.

This prevents any leakage from the


compressed-air system on the trailer/
semitrailer.

6
7
8
9

413

Operation
Maintenance

1 Checking with the parking brake released or partially applied

2
3

i
The check provides information on
leaks in the reservoirs, valves and
brake cylinders on the tractor vehicle.

Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle


against rolling away.

With the vehicle stationary and the parking


brake released:

Uncouple the compressed-air lines


from the trailer/semitrailer
( page 377).

This prevents any leakage from the


compressed-air system on the trailer/
semitrailer.

8
9

414

Run the engine until the pressure


stored in brake circuits 1 and 2 is
10 bar.
Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
Turn the key back to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Depress the brake pedal enough for a
partial brake application (half pedal
travel).
Do not change the pedal position.
The compressed-air system is free from
leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure
in brake circuits 1 and 2 after holding the
pedal in the same position for three minutes.

Checking the seat belts


Pull the seat belt from the inertia reel
towards the rear.
The inertia reel locks the seat belt.
Pull out the seat belt completely from
the inertia reel.
Check the seat belt strap for visible
damage, such as tears or fraying.
Release the fully-extended seat belt.
The inertia reel must roll up the belt
completely.

Operation
Maintenance

Risk of injury

Replace the following items


seat belts
belt tensioners
airbags
if these have been subjected to a load in an
accident. These systems, particularly seat
belt anchorages, should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking anticorrosion protection


The cab is fitted as standard with body cavity protection and underbody protection.

!
Note that road salt has a corrosive effect. In the winter, wash the vehicle
more frequently in order to remove salt
residue.

Frequently examine the vehicle for


signs of corrosion damage. Pay particular attention to

1
2

compressed-air lines
hydraulic lines.
As a precautionary measure, spray the
underside of the vehicle with a waxbased protective agent.
Repair any damage to the anticorrosion protection provided by
the works.

3
4
5

i
No anti-corrosion protection is necessary for the transmission housing.
Changes in the colour of the transmission casing do not limit the operation or
durability of the transmission.

6
7
8
9

415

Operation
Maintenance

1
2
3
4

Scope of maintenance
Axle-load compensation joints of
all-wheel-drive vehicles
930.083/930.182/930.183/
932.072/932.073/932.083/
932.182/932.183/932.325/
932.336/934.082/934.182

Lubricate every four weeks with multi-purpose grease ( page 569).

Steering swivel

Lubricate more frequently with multi-purpose grease under arduous operating conditions
( page 569).

Trailer tow hitch

See the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions in the vehicle's documentation
wallet.

All-wheel-drive vehicle universal


joints

Grease more frequently depending on operating conditions ( page 569).

Retarder (Telma)

Check the distances between the rotor and the terminal plates of the stator.

5
6

Specific specialist knowledge is necessary for this. You are therefore advised to have these
checks carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or specialist workshop.

7
Semitrailer coupling

See the corresponding manufacturer's operating/maintenance instructions in the vehicle's


documentation wallet.
Observe the type of coupling (standard or low maintenance).

Special-purpose bodies and


special equipment

416

Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when lubricating.

Operation
Maintenance

Environmental note

Maintenance flap
Opening

When maintenance work is complete, dispose of


service products
empty containers
cleaning materials
parts which came into contact with service products (e.g. filters)
used semitrailer coupling sliders
in an environmentally responsible manner.

2
Risk of injury

G
3

The maintenance flap opens automatically


and could injure persons standing its slewing range.
Ensure that nobody is standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap.

4
1 Release lever
Press the two release levers to the right
in the direction of the arrow.
Lift up the maintenance flap gently.

5
6

The maintenance flap opens automatically as far as the safety catch stop.

7
8
9

417

Operation
Maintenance

1 Closing
2

Risk of injury

Engine oil level

When you close the maintenance flap, persons standing in the slewing range of the
maintenance flap could be injured.

Ensure that nobody is standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap.

Swing the maintenance flap down and


make sure that it audibly engages in its
retaining catches.

6
7
8
9

418

Checking the engine oil level


The engine oil level can only be called up in
the driver information system. Calling up
the engine oil level ( page 163).
Topping up the engine oil
If the engine oil level is too low or too high,
an event message will appear in the multifunction display.

i
Only add the amount of oil required after the event message with system
abbreviation/symbol N has been
displayed. Then add the complete
quantity recommended.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
add the amount of oil displayed in the
Monitoring Info menu before embarking on long journeys.

Operation
Maintenance
!
Use only approved engine oils in the
specified SAE viscosity classes
( page 557).
Drain or siphon off excess oil.
Unscrew the oil filler cap, check for
tightness and leakage,
Maintenance flap opened (example)

1 Oil filler cap


Open the maintenance flap
( page 417),
Unscrew the oil filler cap,
Top up the oil

Close the maintenance flap


( page 418).

Topping up the windscreen washer/


headlamp cleaning system

Windscreen washer/antifreeze concentrate


is highly flammable.

Avoid fire and naked flame and refrain


from smoking when handling windscreen
washer/antifreeze concentrate.

Risk of fire and explosion

Add a commercially-available windscreen


washer concentrate for summer or winter
to the water. DaimlerChrysler recommends Mercedes-Benz windscreen washer
concentrate S for summer or W for Winter.

5
6
7
8
9

419

Operation
Maintenance

1 Use windscreen washer concentrate

Open the maintenance flap


( page 417),

marked with S at temperatures above


freezing.

Unscrew the cap,

2 Use antifreeze concentrate marked

Refill the reservoir,

with W when driving in icy conditions.

The windscreen washer concentrate


containers are marked with S for summer or W for winter. Observe the correct mixing ratio.

5
6
7
8
9

420

Replace the cap on the reservoir and


turn it firmly as far as the stop,
Close the maintenance flap
( page 418).
1 Cap on the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system reservoir

Operation
Maintenance

Coolant level
Only check the coolant level with the vehicle standing on a level surface, with the
engine switched off and a coolant temperature below 50 C.

Risk of injury/poisoning

When opening the cooling system, there is a


risk of scalding due to hot coolant spraying
out. The cooling system and the coolant expansion tank are pressurised when the engine is at normal operating temperature.

Check the cooling and heating systems


regularly for leaks. If considerable coolant loss from the coolant pump leak-off
hole occurs, have the pump replaced or
repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre or specialist workshop.

Wear gloves and eye protection.

2
3
4

Only open the expansion tank when the


coolant is at a temperature below 90 C.

Coolant contains glycol and is toxic. Do not


swallow coolant.

6
7
8
9

421

Operation
Maintenance

1 Checking the coolant level


2

Open the maintenance flap


( page 417).

Undo the coolant expansion tank cap


completely.
The coolant in the expansion tank must
be at the lower marking on the filler
neck.

3
4

Adding coolant

5
6

To dump any excess pressure, slowly


turn the coolant expansion tank cap
anti-clockwise through a turn.

Maintenance flap opened

1 Coolant expansion tank cap

7
8
9

422

Observe the correct coolant mixture ratio and the required water quality
( page 561).

Set the heating temperature selector


to full heat output.
For heating systems with automatic
temperature control, turn the key to
position 0 in the ignition lock.
Add coolant up to the lower marking on
the filler neck.
Replace the coolant expansion tank
cap and screw it on tight.
Run the engine briefly with varying engine speeds.
Check coolant level and top up if necessary.
Close the maintenance flap
( page 418).

Operation
Maintenance

Batteries
The batteries are located on the left-hand
side of the chassis tractor frame or, on
semitrailers, between the longitudinal
members, depending on the rear design.
To achieve a long service life, the batteries
should always be fully charged.
The charge status of the batteries should
be checked more frequently if the vehicle
is used mainly for short journeys or is left
unused for long periods of time.
The batteries should be charged when the
vehicle is left unused for long periods of
time in order to ensure that the vehicle always starts.

Risk of injury/explosion

Risk of explosion
Explosive oxy-hydrogen is produced
when the batteries are charged.
Only charge the batteries in a wellventilated area.
As a result of the risk of explosion,
avoid the creation of sparks
through fire, naked flames or smoking.
Battery acid is caustic. Battery acid
must not come into contact with
the skin, eyes, clothing or the vehicle's paintwork.

The fluid may spray into your eyes


when mixing water and acids.

For this reason, wear eye protection.

Children are unable to recognise


the dangers posed by handling batteries. For this reason, keep children away.
Observe the safety notes, safety
measures and recommendations
contained in these Operating Instructions.

3
4
5
6

Rinse off acid splashes immediately


with tap water. If necessary, consult
a doctor.

7
8
9

423

Operation
Maintenance

Environmental note

Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of


used batteries with the household rubbish.

Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.

Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz


Service Centre or a collection point for used
batteries.

Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.

6
7

Disconnecting the batteries

Risk of injury

There is a risk of short circuit. Do not place


metal objects or tools on the batteries.

Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end


of the vehicle

Semitrailer tractors with batteries in the


rear end of the vehicle between the longitudinal members:
The batteries are only accessible with an
unsaddled trailer.

8
Removable battery support frame on side of
chassis frame

424

When disconnecting the batteries, always


disconnect the negative terminal first and
then the positive terminal. There is a risk of
short circuit if the positive terminal on the
connected battery comes into contact with
the vehicle components.

Operation
Maintenance
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Switch off all electrical consumers.
Open and remove the battery cover.
Disconnect the negative terminal.
Disconnect the positive terminal.
Disconnecting the batteries
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
All electrical consumers must be
switched off.

Risk of injury

There is a risk of short circuit. Do not place


metal objects or tools on the batteries.
When connecting the batteries, always connect the positive terminal first and then the
negative terminal. There is a risk of short circuit if the positive terminal on the connected battery comes into contact with the
vehicle components.

Disconnect the positive terminal.

Disconnect the negative terminal.

Do not loosen or disconnect the battery


terminals when the engine is running.

Do not interchange the battery terminal


clamps.
Fit the battery cover.

Retrofitting additional electrical consumers or electronic equipment requires specialised knowledge.


Maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only tow start a vehicle with the battery


connected.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

425

Operation
Maintenance

1 Following a circuit break (e.g. when recon- Checking the battery fluid level
necting the batteries), the following work
i
should be carried out:
The fluid level in each battery cell must
2 set the clock ( page 197),
3

deactivate the anti-theft system for the


audio equipment (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

be approximately 15 mm above the top


of the plate. Observe the "Min./Max."
mark on the battery casing.

Take off the battery cover.

4
5

426

Secure the battery support frame by


bolting.
Connect the battery ( page 425).

Fit the battery cover.

Feed water lowers the battery power


output. Add only distilled or deionised
water. Do not use a metal funnel when
adding distilled water. There is a risk of
short circuit.

Undo securing bolt on the battery support frame.

Slide the battery support frame back.

Disconnect the battery ( page 424).

Check the battery fluid level.

Check the battery fluid level.

Vehicles with removable battery support


frame:

Remove the battery support frame and


batteries.

Fit the battery cover.

Operation
Maintenance
Battery care

!
Petrol, benzene, kerosene or similar
products attack the battery casing. Do
not therefore use any of these products
to clean the batteries. Stickers or imprints on the batteries could be removed or become illegible.

Grease the terminals, especially the undersides, with acid protection grease.

Recharge batteries which are out of use


with an open-circuit voltage of < 12.4 V.

2
3
4

Clean batteries only when their stoppers


are inserted.
The vent holes in the stoppers must be
open and the cell vent tubes must not be
blocked.

Removable battery support frame on side of


chassis frame

5
6

Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end


of the vehicle

7
8
9

427

Operation
Maintenance
Unscrew the stopper from the batteries.

1 Charging the batteries


2
3
4
5

Risk of explosion

Gas emitted from the battery may explode if


ignited. Avoid creating sparks. Avoid naked
flames and do not smoke when handling the
batteries. Remove the battery terminal
clamps from the battery charger only when
the battery charger is switched off and no
more gas is escaping from the batteries. Ensure that the area is well-ventilated when
charging the batteries.

Do not detach the connecting cables


between the batteries.

8
9

428

Disconnect the battery terminals.


Follow the operating instructions for
the battery charger.
Connect the battery charger to the batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Environmental note

Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of


used batteries with the household rubbish.
Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.

Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz


Service Centre or a collection point for used
batteries.

Make sure that the charging voltage is


correct. Use a commercially-available
battery charger to charge the batteries.

Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.

Do not fast charge new batteries.

Practical advice
Where will I find...?
Troubleshooting
Cab 1
Engine
Fuel system
Transmission

2
3

Brake system
Compressed-air system 4
Pneumatic suspension
Trailing axle 5
Steering system/Telligent steering system
Wheels and tyres
Electrical system

6
7

Unlocking and locking in an emergency


Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing 8

429

Practical advice
Where will I find...?
Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit and emergency


equipment

2
3
4
5

S-Cab

Stowage compartment on cab rear wall

On right near
co-driver's seat

Stowage compartCab rear wall


ment on cab rear wall

M-Cab

Stowage compartment behind co-driver's


seat

Stowage compartment behind


co-driver's seat

Stowage compartment behind


co-driver's seat

Cab rear wall: 6 kg

6
L-Cab

Exterior stowage compartment, right

7
8

Stowage compartment behind driver's


seat: 2 kg

Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage compartment, right
partment, left
partment, left 2 kg
Exterior stowage compartment, right 6 kg

MEGASPACE cab

2-section
Pump lever in outside stowage compartment, bottom right

Wheelbrace in exterior stowage compartment, bottom left

430

Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage


partment, bottom
partment, top left
compartment, botright
tom left

Practical advice
Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit pocket

1
2

S-Cab

Stowage compartment
in driver's door

Stowage compartment on
cab rear wall

Stowage compartment on
cab rear wall

M-Cab

Stowage compartment
in driver's door

Stowage compartment be- Stowage compartment be- Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat
hind co-driver's seat
hind co-driver's seat

L-Cab

Exterior stowage compartment, left

Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compartment, left
ment, left
ment, right

Stowage compartment
in driver's door

Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compartment, bottom left
ment, bottom left
ment, bottom right

MEGASPACE cab

Stowage compartment on
cab rear wall

7
8
9

431

Practical advice
Where will I find...?

1
2

Special tools

(depending on vehicle equipment)

Recommended to supplement vehicle


tool kit:

Vehicle tool kit


1 Fitting sleeve for changing a wheel
( page 494)
2 Spacer for spare wheel holder
( page 494)
3 Installation lever for poly-V-belt
( page 462)

3
4
5

Vehicle document wallet


Allen key:
4 Sliding/tilting sunroof emergency operation ( page 535)
5 Hexagon bolts (4 bolts): for fan clutch
lock-up ( page 467).

6
7
8
9

432

Hexagon bolts M 8 x 120 mm (specialist dealer), for removal of rear axle


(HL 7, HD 7) drive shaft ( page 548).

Practical advice
Where will I find...?
Pump lever

To assemble the pump lever

The pump lever is used to operate

Engage the retaining pin 3 in the


cutout 5.

the jack

1
2

the wheelbrace
the spare wheel winch
the cab tilt pump

Pump lever (2-section)

1 Cutout for operating lowering screw on


jack
2 Mounting for wheelbrace (tilting cab or
unscrewing/tightening wheel nuts)
3 Retaining pin
4 Cutout for operating winch
5 Cutout for retaining pin
6 Retaining sleeve for hand crank (operation of spare wheel winch).

4
5
6
7
8
9

433

Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

1
2

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS)


Problem

Possible cause

Transmission has problems with gearshifts

Risk of accident
Loss of hydraulic fluid

Suggested solutions

Tilt the cab.


Check fluid level in HPS reservoir.
If necessary, top up with DOT 4 brake
fluid.

Select 1st, 2nd, 7th and 8th gears several times to bleed the hydraulics.
If this is unsuccessful, select gears
manually at the transmission
( page 470).

5
6
7
8
9

434

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried


out by an authorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

435

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Gearshift does not operate

Risk of accident

Suggested solutions

Select gears manually at the transmission ( page 470).


Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried
out by an authorised specialist workshop.

Leak in gearshift hydraulics

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

4
5
6
7

Risk of accident
Transmission damage

8
9

436

G
Tow vehicle away ( page 542).

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Electronic-pneumatic gearshift
(EPS III S/EPS III SA)
Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Gearshift no longer operates

Risk of accident

Activate transmission control back-up


mode ( page 473).

Event message:

Malfunction or failure of
the transmission electronics
drive control
the sensor unit
the transmission data cable

Tow the vehicle away ( page 542).


Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried
out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

437

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Event message:

Risk of accident

Suggested solutions

Charge pressure too low in auxiliary consumer circuit

3
4

Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions permitting).


Apply the parking brake.
Wait until sufficient charge pressure is
available in auxiliary consumer.
Charge pressure event message goes
out.
Switch off engine.

After waiting approximately ten seconds, re-start engine.

If multi-function display still shows


event message Clutch: failed, carry
out a "short teach-in procedure"
( page 478).

If short teach-in process is unsuccessful, carry out a "long teach-in procedure" ( page 479).

8
9

438

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Event message:

Risk of accident

Suggested solutions

Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions permitting).


Apply the parking brake.
Switch off the engine.
Carry out a "long teach-in procedure"
( page 479).

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

439

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

1
2

Opening and closing the vehicle


Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the radio remote control

Batteries of the radio remote control are


discharged.

Open doors with the key


( page 103).
Check batteries of the radio remote
control. If the radio remote control
batteries needs to be replaced, an
event message appears in the multifunction display.

3
4

Replace batteries in good time


( page 534).
Batteries are obtainable from any specialist workshop or from your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

5
6
You have pressed the radio remote control
too often outside the range of vehicle.

7
8
9

440

Press the button on the radio remote control twice and start the engine within 60 seconds.
The radio remote control will then
function normally again.

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

You receive feedback from the turn signal


lamps when you prime anti-theft alarm
system.

One of the monitored components/


entrances is not in the normal position.

Deactivate anti-theft alarm system


( page 103)

Check whether all monitored


components/entrances, such as:

both doors
the maintenance flap

the stowage box on driver and codriver's side

the cab tilt lock


all contacts or sensors of optional
body attachments
are in the normal position.

7
8
9

441

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions
Repeat priming procedure ( page 111).

If this is unsuccessful, have the anti-theft


alarm system examined. The maintenance
work should always be carried out by an
authorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

4
5
6
7
8
9

442

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Vehicles with enhanced central locking


system:

Faulty travel detection by door electronics. Hold down the q button in the control panel until the side window is completely open.

The side windows no longer close automatically.

Suggested solutions

Hold down the H button in the control panel until the side window is completely closed.

If this is unsuccessful, have the power


window mechanism examined.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

5
6
7
8
9

443

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

1
2
3

Engine
Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Engine cannot be started with vehicle's


own key and multi-function display shows
CODE.

Immobiliser has not recognised the key.

Turn key slowly and hold it for a short


period (approximately 0.5 seconds)
between ignition lock positions 2 and
3 ( page 125).

You have not held key between ignition lock After four unsuccessful attempts at
positions 2 and 3 for the required period.
starting, use spare key for further
starting attempts.
You have used an invalid key.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


carry a spare key at all times, for emergency use.

5
6
7
8
9

444

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

If this is unsuccessful, have cause of the


fault traced and rectified. The maintenance work should always be carried out
by an authorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

445

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Engine does not start.

Engine electronics are faulty.

Before next starting attempt, turn key


back to position 0 in the ignition lock.

Multi-function display shows the event


message with short symbol A.

Starter batteries are discharged.

After approximately ten seconds, repeat starting procedure ( page 462).

2
3

Note that starting attempts lasting too


long will discharge the batteries.
Have your vehicle jump-started from
another vehicle ( page 537).

4
Fuel supply is faulty.

Check the fuel tank.


If fuel tank level has fallen to 14% of total
capacity, an event message appears in the
multi-function display.

Check fuel system for leaks.


Bleed fuel system ( page 468).

7
8
9

446

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Engine fails to start up when ambient tem- The flows properties of the diesel fuel are
perature is low.
inadequate due to paraffin separation.

Suggested solutions
Malfunctions resulting from paraffin
separation can only be corrected by
heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by
parking in a heated area.
Add flow improver or petroleum to the
fuel ( page 563).
If this is unsuccessful and the engine cannot be started after several attempts,
have the cause traced and rectified.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out by an authorised specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

447

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting


system

Problem

Possible cause

Cab cannot be tilted.

Valve lever of mechanical-hydraulic cab tilt- Position valve lever of the mechanicaling pump is positioned in the direction of
hydraulic cab tilting pump in the directhe vehicle chassis.
tion of the entrance ( page 453).

Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics.

Suggested solutions

Have tilting hydraulics overhauled.


The maintenance work should always be
carried out by an authorised specialist
workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

5
6
7
8
9

448

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system


Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Cab cannot be tilted.

Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting


system is not switched on.

Press the main switch of the electrohydraulic cab tilting system upwards
( page 457).

Valve lever of electro-hydraulic tilting pump Position valve lever of electro-hydrauis positioned to the right, in the direction of
lic tilting pump to the left, in the directhe driving position.
tion of the tilting position
( page 457).
Fuse for electro-hydraulic tilting pump has
blown.

Replace fuse F2 in module A2 of electrical compartment ( page 522, 526


and 531)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

449

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics.

Have tilting hydraulics overhauled.


The maintenance work should always be
carried out by an authorised specialist
workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

450

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

STOP lamp

Risk of accident

If the STOP lamp does not go out, or lights


up while vehicle is being driven, safe operation of the engine is endangered. If road and
traffic conditions permit, stop the engine at
once and determine the cause.

the charge pressure in the tractor vehicle's spring-loaded parking brake release circuit drops below 5.5 bar
the charge pressure in the trailer/
semitrailer brake circuit drops below
5.5 bar (e.g. if air consumption is too
high while manoeuvring trailer).

1 STOP lamp
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
The STOP lamp goes out after not more
than 10 seconds or when the engine is
started.
The STOP lamp lights up if

1
2
3
4

The STOP lamp lights up and additionally


the multi-function display shows a system
code/symbol, when:

the charge pressure in brake circuit 1


or 2 of the tractor vehicle drops below
6.8 bar

the engine oil pressure is too low


the engine oil level is too low.

7
8
9

451

Practical advice
Troubleshooting

Risk of accident

The operating and driving safety of the vehicle is endangered when an event message
with a red status display is present. Observe
the traffic situation and immediately stop
the vehicle.

2
3
4
5

1 Status indicator (red)


2 Charge pressure, brake system
3 Fault location

6
7
8
9

452

The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change. Check the brake system
and have it overhauled.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If air consumption is high, e.g. when manoeuvring a trailer, do not drive any further
until the STOP lamp has gone out.

Practical advice
Cab
Cab
Before tilting the cab:

Tilting the cab

Apply the parking brake.


Additionally secure the vehicle with
wheel chocks.
Select neutral N at the transmission.
Switch off engine and turn key in the ignition lock back to position 0.
Switch off auxiliary air conditioning or
auxiliary heating.
Risk of injury

As the cab is tilted it can suddenly fall forwards to end position. Persons remaining
within cab tilting area can be injured.

Close all doors, stowage compartments inside cab, and outside flaps
making sure that they audibly engage.

Vehicles with refrigerator: Switch off


and empty refrigerator.

For safety reasons, keep area in front


of gear lever and in front of cab unobstructed.

The front coupling pin must be properly


inserted.

MEGASPACE, car transporter,


LowLiner and vehicles with electrohydraulic cab tilting system: Open
maintenance flap ( page 417) and
swing it fully upwards.

4
5
6

Remove all loose objects (e.g. cans,


bottles, tools, bags, etc.) from cab and
stowage pockets in the doors.

Only tilt the cab when the tilting area is


clear.

8
9

453

Practical advice
Cab

Always tilt the cab fully, as far as its limit of travel.

Have tilting hydraulics examined if failure occurs or leaks are present.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

4
System graphic, cab tilting

5 1 Open maintenance flap


2 Tilt the cab

6
7
8
9

454

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice
Cab
Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting
system

To tilt forwards

Open the flap in the entrance, and


swing it up.

Position valve on tilting pump towards


entrance 1.

Fit pump lever with wheelbrace (vehicle


tool kit) onto tilting pump 2.
Operate tilting pump until cab is fully
tilted to end position.

i
Tilting pump (example)

1 Flap
2 Tilting pump

The cab is unlocked automatically.

4
Graphic, tilting pump valve lever position
(example)

1 To tilt forwards
2 To tilt back and travel position

Tilting pump is located on co-driver side.

7
8
9

455

Practical advice
Cab
Swing the flap in the entrance down
and listen for it to engage.

1 To tilt back to driving position


2
3
4
5

Risk of accident

If the valve lever is pushed forwards the entrance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the
cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab
can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a
heavy jolt.
Make sure that the valve lever is positioned
in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2
when the vehicle is being driven.

Close the maintenance flap


( page 418).
Vehicles with refrigerator:
Ten minutes after the cab has been tilted back to the driving position, switch
on the refrigerator. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Risk of accident

Position valve on tilting pump in the direction of vehicle chassis 2.

Operate tilting pump until cab has


reached the driving position.
The lock must audibly engage.

i
The cab locks automatically.

456

If indicator lamp does not go out after


the engine is started, then cab is not locked.
There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards
if the vehicle is subjected to a heavy jolt. Ensure that cab lock indicator lamp goes
out when the engine is started.

i
Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a
failure occurs or if leaks are present.
The maintenance work should always
be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice
Cab
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system

Press the upper section of switch 1.


The cab tilting system is ready for operation. The indicator lamp in the switch
lights up.

To tilt forwards

1
2

i
The electric tilting pump is located:

for road and construction site vehicles, on co-driver side, in entrance

1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab


tilting system
Turn key in the ignition lock to position
2.

for car transporters and LowLiner


vehicles, on right behind cab
Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab
tilting pump (example)

1 To tilt forwards
2 To tilt back and driving position

6
7
8
9

457

Practical advice
Cab

1 Open the flap in entrance, and swing it

To tilt back to driving position

up.

Position valve lever on electric cab tilting pump to left 1.

Risk of accident

Remove switch for the electric tilting


pump from mounting on the co-driver
side under the maintenance flap.

Hold switch pressed down until cab is


tilted fully to end position.

If the valve lever is pushed forwards the entrance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the
cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab
can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a
heavy jolt.

5
6

i
The cab is unlocked automatically.
The cab has reached its limit of travel
when the pump noise becomes louder.

7
8
9

458

Make sure that the valve lever is positioned


in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2
when the vehicle is being driven.

Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab


tilting pump (example)

Position valve lever on the electric cab


tilting pump to the right 2.

Practical advice
Cab
Swing flap in the entrance down and
listen for it to engage.
Insert switch of electric tilting pump
into the mounting.
Close the maintenance flap
( page 418).
Press the lower section of switch 1.
1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab
tilting system
Hold switch of electric tilting pump
pressed down until cab is tilted into
driving position and is locked.

If indicator lamp does not go out after


the engine is started, the cab is not locked.
There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards
if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt. Make sure
that cab lock indicator lamp goes out
when engine is started.

Risk of accident

The cab tilting system is switched off.


The indicator lamp in the switch will go
out. Cab tilt lock indicator lamp in
the instrument panel must go out once
engine has been started.

3
4
5
6

The cab locks automatically.

7
8
9

459

Practical advice
Cab

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

i
If a loud pumping noise can be heard
when the tilting pump is operated:
Check that the valve lever on electric
tilting pump is set to desired tilting direction. Have the tilting hydraulics
checked if a failure occurs or if leaks
are present.
The maintenance work should always
be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

460

Cab tilting system checking oil level/


topping up

i
Cab tilting system is filled for the life of
the vehicle. A need for topping up with
oil is not envisaged. Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if
leaks are present.
The maintenance work should always
be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Environmental note

Hydraulic oil is an environmental hazard.


Collect any oil which may have spilled and
clean the tilting pump.

Practical advice
Cab

Starting and stopping the engine


with the cab tilted
Risk of injury

When the cab is tilted and the engine is running, there is a risk of injury from hot or moving parts of the engine, e.g. exhaust
manifold, poly-V-belts, fan, etc.

Tilt the cab ( page 453).

To start the engine

To stop the engine

Press starter button 1 at the engine


until the engine starts.

Press shutoff button 2 on the engine.

i
If a gear is selected, the starter button
on the engine will not operate.
To increase the engine speed
With the engine running, press starter
button 1 again and hold it pressed until the desired engine speed is reached.

To turn the engine over without starting up

Press and hold down both starter button 1 and shutoff button 2 on the
engine simultaneously.

The starter will turn over the engine


without the engine starting up.

4
5

i
6

It is possible to increase the engine


speed until the governed speed is
reached.

7
8

1 Starter button
2 Shutoff button

461

Practical advice
Engine
Engine

1
2
3

Engine emergency running mode


Activate engine emergency running mode
when
the multi-function display shows the
event message with code/symbol
A
the accelerator pedal does not function

4 or the engine runs at a constant speed


of approximately 1,300 rpm

Activate engine emergency running


mode
Observe the traffic conditions and stop
the vehicle.

To check the condition of the


poly-V-belt

Apply the parking brake.

Poly-V-belts must not show longitudinal


tears in the running surfaces. Damaged,
oily or glazed poly-V-belts must be replaced without delay.

Switch off engine.


After approximately ten seconds, restart the engine.

i
In engine emergency running mode,
the engine speed is limited to about
1,300 rpm.

6
7
8
9

462

Poly-V-belt

Practical advice
Engine

To remove and refit poly-V-belts

Small lateral cracks appear in the polyV-belts after approximately 3,000 to


6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km) of
normal use. It is not necessary to replace poly-V-belts that show small lateral cracks.

2
3

Specialist technical knowledge is required to replace the poly-V-belts.


The maintenance work should always
be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

4
Special tool (vehicle tool kit)

1 Screwdriver
2 Assembly lever

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

6
7
8
9

463

Practical advice
Engine

1 To remove the poly-V-belt


2
3
4

Insert the special tool with assembly lever into tensioning mechanism.
Turn tensioning mechanism anti-clockwise and upwards, and insert a screwdriver in the retainer hole provided.
Risk of injury

The tensioning mechanism is spring-loaded.

5
6

Remove the poly-V-belt.


Check tensioning mechanism, tension
pulley, return pulley and main pulleys
for perfect condition.

7
8
9

464

Fitting the poly-V-belts

Have worn bearings in tensioning


mechanism, tension pulley or return
pulleys replaced and also replace worn
main pulleys.

Place new poly-V-belt in position on all


the pulleys.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

!
Observe the illustration showing correct routing of the poly-V-belt
( page 465).

Practical advice
Engine
Pivot tensioning mechanism anti-clockwise and remove screwdriver from the
retainer hole.
Swing tensioning mechanism back into
place.

Remove special tool with assembly lever and check that the poly-V-belt is
seated correctly on the pulleys.

3
4

Poly-V-belt routing:
Vehicles without air conditioning

Vehicles with refrigerator block

1 Crankshaft
2 Coolant pump
3 Alternator
4 Tensioning pulley
5 Air-conditioning compressor
6 Refrigerator block

5
6
7
8

Vehicles with air conditioning

Vehicles with air conditioning and refrigerator block

465

Practical advice
Engine

1 Vehicles with belt-driven fan


i
In order to replace the poly-V-belt, it is
2
3
4
5
6
7

necessary to remove the fan. This work


requires specialist technical knowledge.
The maintenance work should always
be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

8
9

466

Vehicles with belt-driven fan

Vehicles with belt-driven fan and air conditioning

Poly-V-belt routing:
1 Crankshaft
2 Coolant pump
3 Alternator
4 Tensioning pulley
5 Air-conditioning compressor
6 Radiator fan

Practical advice
Engine

Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up

The fastening tabs and threaded holes


are directly opposite each other.

When there is a fault with the electromagnetic fan clutch, e.g. recognisable by elevated coolant temperature, it is possible to
lock-up the clutch mechanism. The fan has
a rigid connection to the belt pulley.

Electromagnetic fan clutch

1 Fastening tabs
2 Hexagon bolts
Turn the fastening tabs over the threaded holes on the fan.
Screw in and tighten M 6 x 10 four hexagon bolts (vehicle document wallet).

Replace the fan clutch as soon as possible.

The maintenance work should always


be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

5
6
7
8
9

467

Practical advice
Fuel system
Fuel system

1
2

Bleeding the fuel system


The hand pump is located either between
the chassis and the fuel tank or next to the
air cleaner housing.

Remove the fuel tank filler cap by turning it anti-clockwise.


Turn hand pump lever anti-clockwise to
release it.
Operate hand pump until definite resistance is felt.

i
Operate hand pump for approximately
100 strokes until definite resistance is
felt.

4
5
6

Secure the hand pump lever again by


turning it clockwise.
1 Hand pump (example)

7
8
9

468

Replace the cap on the fuel tank and


turn it clockwise to tighten.

Vehicles with fuel prefilter:

i
The fuel prefilter with heated water
separator is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle behind the cab.
Before bleeding the fuel system, operate the fuel prefilter hand pump and
completely fill the filter housing.

Practical advice
Fuel system
Operate the hand pump and catch the
water/fuel mixture.

Fuel prefilter, water drainage

Tighten the drain plug.

The fuel prefilter with heated water


separator is located on right-hand side
of the vehicle behind the cab.

1
2

Check the fuel system for leaks.

Dispose of the fuel/water mixture in an environmentally responsible manner.

Environmental note

Fuel prefilter (example)

1 Inspection glass
2 Drain plug
3 Hand pump

Place collector under the drain plug.

Unscrew the drain plug.

7
8
9

469

Practical advice
Transmission
Transmission

1
2
3

Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS)


In the case of a defective HPS, you can select 3rd, 4th or reverse gears manually using the shift and selector levers at the
transmission. Using fourth gear, you can
drive the vehicle to reach a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

Risk of injury and accident

If you select gears manually at the transmission, the vehicle can roll away. Only select
gears manually at the transmission with

a stationary vehicle
applied parking brake

ignition lock in position 0

8
9

470

Tools

You cannot change the selected gear


while driving if it was selected manually.

The required tools can be found in vehicle


tool kit pocket ( page 431).

Depending on vehicle type and equipment, it may be necessary to tilt the


cab in order to reach the shift and selector levers.
Tilt the cab ( page 453).

Gear

Tool

3, 4

Open-ended spanner 34 mm
across flats or adjustable pliers

Second open-ended spanner


34 mm across flats or second
pair of adjustable pliers

Practical advice
Transmission
To select 3rd or 4th gear

Move the shift lever into position 4 to


select 3rd gear.

Move the shift lever into position 6 to


select 4th gear.

The gear is selected when the selector


shaft can be felt to engage in the corresponding position.

3
4

Shift lever on right of transmission


Selector lever on left of transmission

Turn key in the ignition lock to


position 0.
Apply the parking brake.
If necessary, tilt the cab ( page 453).

If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on the right of the transmission into
neutral 5.

If 5th to 8th gear was selected, move


the selector lever on the left of the
transmission to the front, to position
2.

6
7
8
9

471

Practical advice
Transmission

1 To engage reverse gear


i
A second person is required to select
2

2nd person:
Move shift lever 1 on the right of the
transmission to the rear to position 4.
The gear is selected when the shift lever can be felt to engage in position 4.

reverse gear.

3
Pulling away

4
Shift lever on right of transmission

If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on


the right of the transmission into neutral
5.

5
6

When you stop the vehicle, you must


hold the clutch pedal depressed with
your foot.

1st person:
Selector lever on left of transmission

7 Turn key in the ignition lock to


position 0.

You cannot change the selected gear


while driving.

Apply the parking brake.


If necessary, tilt the cab ( page 453).

472

Push the selector lever on the left of


the transmission forwards 1 to the
stop and hold it there.

Depress the clutch pedal.


Start the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.

Practical advice
Transmission

Transmission control back-up mode

Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift:


Using the transmission control back-up
mode you can
select 2nd, 5th, reverse gear or neutral
( page 474)
shift the transmission into towing
mode if the vehicle has to be towed
( page 473).
In the back-up function, the gears are
changed with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You are guided
through displays from the driver information system in the multi-function display
via the control unit ( page 475 + 476).

i
The GS back-up function can also be
activated when no fault is present in
the transmission control. You may familiarise yourself with the transmission
control (GS) back-up function so that
you can react quickly in an emergency
situation.
GS back-up function menu

With the vehicle stationary and the


parking brake applied, press the
or button on the multi-function
steering wheel until Settings appears
in the multi-function display.
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is positioned on Configuration.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel until
Enable transmission control back-up
mode appears in the multi-function dis-

play.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

In order to activate the back-up function


you must enable the GS back-up function
menu ( page 474).

8
9

473

Practical advice
Transmission

1 To enable
2
3

Activate GS back-up function

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The GS back-up function is now activated. The driver information system displays Please select gear in the multifunction display.

The highlight is positioned at ON.


Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel to confirm the setting and go to next menu.

4 To lock
5

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.


The highlight is positioned on OFF.

6 Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel to confirm the setting and go to next menu.

7
8
9

474

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

With the vehicle stationary and the


parking brake applied, press the
or button on the multi-function
steering wheel until Transmission control back-up mode appears in the multi-function display.

Practical advice
Transmission

i
When the GS back-up function is activated, the GS back-up function menu is
permanently displayed in the multifunction display. The transmission
electronics monitor the driving operations and give you instructions, or
prompt you to confirm certain actions.

Telligent gearshift
Pulling away

Please apply clutch appears in the


multi-function display.

1
2

Depress the clutch pedal.


Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight
is positioned on YES.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel.

!
If you do not observe the instructions in
the multi-function display, transmission damage may result.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

Activate back-up function


( page 474).
The multi-function display shows
Please select gear.

Press the or button on the


multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is positioned on the gear desired.

The transmission control selects the


chosen gear.

3
4
5

Slowly release the clutch pedal and


slowly depress the accelerator.

The multi-function display shows

Driving in emergency running mode


restricted gear selection only possible.

8
9

475

Practical advice
Transmission

1 To stop the vehicle or change gear

Select neutral or a new gear using the


or button.

Telligent automatic gearshift


To pull away

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

Transmission control selects neutral or


the gear chosen.

4
5 Depress the clutch pedal.
6
7

Brake the vehicle to a standstill by applying the foot brake.


Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows
Please select gear.

8
9

476

Activate back-up function.


The multi-function display shows
Please select gear.

Practical advice
Transmission
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is positioned on the gear desired.

To stop the vehicle or change gear

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

Select neutral or a new gear using the


or button.

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.

The transmission control selects neutral or the gear chosen.

The transmission control selects the


chosen gear.

To deactivate the GS back-up function

The multi-function display shows

Stop the vehicle.

Driving in transmission control


back-up mode manual gear selection
only possible for N.

Depress the accelerator pedal slowly.


The vehicle will start moving.

Brake vehicle to a standstill by applying


the foot brake.
Press the j or k button on the
multi-function steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows
Please select gear.

Press the or button on


the multi-function steering wheel.
The driver information system goes to
next menu. Transmission control terminates the GS back-up function.
Lock GS back-up function menu
( page 474).

5
6
7
8
9

477

Practical advice
Transmission

1
2
3

Teach-in procedure
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift or
Telligent automatic gearshift:
The short/long teach-in procedure is necessary to teach-in vehicle-specific data
into the automatic transmission control
(GS) electronics system.

If the teach-in procedure is interrupted,


the splitter group indicators will stop
flashing and an event message appears
in the multi-function display.

Short teach-in procedure


The short teach-in procedure is required if
the sensors on the transmission or clutch
have been replaced.

If transmission control (GS) interrupts


the teach-in procedure, turn key in the
ignition lock to position 0.

To program the transmission control


(GS)

The lights in the gear display go out.

Apply the parking brake.

Wait at least five seconds before repeating the teach-in procedure.

Turn key in the ignition lock to


position 0.

The charge pressure in the auxiliary


consumer compressed-air circuit must
be sufficient. The multi-function display
must not be showing "Charge pressure,
auxiliary consumer" .

6
7

During the whole teach-in procedure,


the indicators for the high f and
the low splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.

8
9

478

Vehicles with Telligent automatic


gearshift: the clutch control (KS) automatically disengages and engages during the teach-in procedure.

Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep


it depressed.
Press the neutral button on gear lever
and hold it pressed.

Practical advice
Transmission
Turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker. The
indicators for the fast f and the
slow splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.
Release the clutch pedal.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker.
If neutral N appears in the gears display, release the clutch pedal.

Long teach-in procedure:

When the warning buzzer sounds, you


must push down or release the clutch
pedal within three seconds.

The long teach-in procedure is required if:


the GS control unit or the engine has
been replaced

You must hold the neutral button on


gearshift pressed down for the whole
period of the teach-in procedure.

the multi-function display shows an


event message with error code
"a 21011".

If the multi-function display shows the


event message again after the short
teach-in procedure, carry out the long
teach-in procedure.

After the display has appeared, turn


key fully back in the ignition lock and
then after a further approximately five
seconds, turn it back to the drive position.
The multi-function display shows an
event message with error code
"a 28093".

4
5
6
7

Release the neutral button on the gear


lever.

8
9

479

Practical advice
Transmission

1 Programming the transmission control


(GS)

2
3
4
5

i
Construction site vehicles with
Telligent gearshift:
When you carry out the long teach-in
procedure, the transmission control
deletes the function for construction
site mode ( page 229). A MercedesBenz Service Centre can reactivate
construction site mode again.
Apply the parking brake.

6 Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 0.

7 Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep


it depressed.

Press the neutral button and the function button on the gear lever and hold
pressed down.

480

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 2.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker. The
indicators for the high f and the
low splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.
Release the clutch pedal.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker.

Release the clutch pedal.


The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker.
Release the clutch pedal.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker.

Depress the clutch pedal fully.

Depress the clutch pedal fully.

When N flashes in the gear display, start


the engine.

When neutral N appears in the gear display, the teach-in procedure is complete.

The warning buzzer and a shift noise


sound in the central loudspeaker.

Release the clutch pedal, neutral button and function button.

Practical advice
Transmission

i
When the warning buzzer sounds, you
must depress or release the clutch
pedal within three seconds.
You must hold the neutral button on
the gear lever pressed for the whole of
the teach-in procedure.
If the event messages are not deleted
after the teach-in procedure, activate
the GS back-up process ( page 474).
Have the transmission examined.
The maintenance work should always
be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Emergency gearshift (NMV)


If the drive should fail, a rigid power transmission link can be established in the power take-off.

2
3
4
5
6

Power take-off (NMV)

1 Retainer
2 Slotted nut
3 Tapped holes for retainer

7
8
9

481

Practical advice
Transmission

1
2
3
4

Risk of accident and injury

When the engine is running, the power takeoff shaft turns as soon as the connection is
established. The rotating shaft can cause
serious injury. Operate the emergency gear
shift for the transmission-independent
power take-off only with vehicle stationary,
the parking brake applied and the engine
switched off.

5
6
7
8
9

482

Unscrew retainer 1.
Unscrew slotted nut 2 to the stop, approximately 4 turns.

i
If the slotted nut is hard to move, turn
the drive shaft slightly.
Secure the slotted nut with the retainer
by turning the retainer round and
screwing it onto a suitable thread.

After repairing the drive, disconnect


the rigid power transmission link again.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out by an authorised specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice
Brake system
Brake system
Releasing the spring-loaded parking
brake if there is a failure of charge
pressure

To release the spring-loaded brake


mechanically

In an emergency or in the workshop it is


possible to release the spring-loaded parking brake mechanically or pneumatically.
Risk of injury and accident

Before the vehicle is returned to service, the


proper operation of the spring-loaded parking brake must be restored.

Safeguard the vehicle against rolling


away.

Do not use a impact drive to unscrew


the spring-loaded brake release bolts.
Maximum release torque of the springloaded brake release bolt is 70 Nm.

2
3

To restore the spring-loaded parking


brake to operational condition

When the spring-loaded parking brake is released, the vehicle can roll away unexpectedly.

Spring-loaded brake release bolt (example)

1 Braked position
2 Released position
Slacken the release bolts to the stop
(released position).

Charge the brake circuit until the cutoff


pressure is reached.

Move the parking brake valve lever to


the release position ( page 52).

Tighten the release bolts fully (braking


position).
Tightening torque min. 25 Nm,
max. 45 Nm.

6
7
8
9

483

Practical advice
Brake system

1 Arrangement of spring-loaded brake cylinders:

2
3
4
5
6

To release the spring-loaded brake


using tyre pressure of spare wheel

Front axle Rear axle

4x2, 4x4

x1

A minimum air pressure of 8.5 bar is required in spare wheel.

6x2

6x2/2

6x2/4

6x4, 6x6

8x4/4, 8x6/ 4,
8x8/4

Vehicle

1 Optional extra

7
8
9

484

Connect tyre inflator hose to the test


connection and push connector on to
the tyre inflation valve.

Uncouple compressed-air lines to the


trailer or semitrailer ( page 377).

When the release indicator lamp for the


parking brake ! goes out, the
spring-loaded cylinders are completely
released.

Move the lever of the parking brake


valve to release position ( page 52)
and turn key in the ignition lock to
position 2.

Comply precisely with the manufacturer's operating instructions when releasing the brake on the trailer or
semitrailer.

Remove the dust caps from the test


connection of the trailer brake circuit
reservoir and from the tyre inflator
valve on the spare wheel.

Practical advice
Brake system

Releasing the spring-loaded


brake with an external source of
compressed air
Release is possible via:
the front coupling head
the tyre inflator connection
the spare wheel

Only charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection in
an emergency.

As far as possible do not charge the


compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air
is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the
pressure regulator.

To release the spring-loaded brake using compressed-air from the spare


wheel requires a minimum pressure of
8.5 bar.

1
2
3
4

the test connection on reservoir of


trailer brake circuit.

5
6
7
8
9

485

Practical advice
Compressed-air system
Compressed-air system

If the shut-off pressure of the external


compressed-air source lies below 10 bar,
dump the compressed air on the vehicle to
be towed until the pressure is below
10 bar. This can be done, for example, by
repeated operation of service brake on the
vehicle that is receiving the pressure.

Charging the compressed-air


system via the front coupling head
With the engine stopped, it is possible to

2 charge the compressed-air system via the


3

front coupling head. The coupling head is


located behind the cover in the bumper
and is marked red.

4
1 Coupling head (example)

5
6
7
8
9

486

After the compressed-air system has


been charged, the charge pressure
available in the individual compressedair circuits is limited when engine is not
running.

Practical advice
Compressed-air system

Charging the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection

i
Only charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection in
an emergency.

As far as possible do not charge the


compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air
is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the
pressure regulator.

2
3
4
5
6
7

1 Tyre inflator connection

8
9

487

Practical advice
Pneumatic suspension
Pneumatic suspension

1
2
3

Charging the pneumatic suspension


from an external compressed-air
source

i
It is possible to charge the pneumatic
suspension reservoir from an external
compressed-air source.

4 Before charging the pneumatic suspen5

sion reservoir, turn the key in the ignition to position 2.


Charging is possible via:

6 the tyre inflator connection


( page 487) or the front coupling
head ( page 486)

the pneumatic suspension "Charge"


connection

8
9

488

i
Charging the pneumatic suspension
reservoir via the pneumatic suspension
"Charge" connection or the front coupling head requires a minimum pressure of 10.5 bar.
Charging the pneumatic suspension
reservoir via the pneumatic suspension
"Charge" connection requires a minimum pressure of 7 bar.

Compressed-air drier (example)

1 Tyre inflator connection


2 Pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection

!
After the compressed-air system has
been charged through the front coupling head, the charge pressure available in the individual compressed-air
circuits is limited when engine is not
running.

Practical advice
Trailing axle
Trailing axle
Trailing axle, pneumatic
It is not possible to raise the trailing axle
when vehicle is unladen or partially laden if
there is insufficient charge pressure available.
Run the engine until pressure regulator
cuts out.

Nummek trailing axle, hydraulic


It is not possible to raise the Nummek trailing axle when vehicle is unladen or partially
laden if:

the hydraulic pump of the Nummek


trailing axle is faulty

the fuse of the hydraulic pump motor


on the Nummek trailing axle has blown
( page 525)

there is Insufficient oil in the hydraulic


system of the Nummek trailing axle

5
6
7
8
9

489

Practical advice
Steering system/Telligent steering system
Steering system/Telligent steering system

1 To prevent faults from occurring in the


2

Risk of accident

The maintenance work should always be

Adopt appropriate driving technique and


have steering system repaired immediately.

workshop.

The maintenance work should always be


carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

3 carried out by an authorised specialist

4 DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis5


6

steering system have maintenance work


carried out on the steering system in accordance with the maintenance instructions.

it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it


has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

7
8
9

490

If the power steering assistance should fail,


the vehicle will be very difficult to steer.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel under chassis

Spare wheel location


Risk of injury

Take off the wheel cover.

Operate winch until cable is lightly tensioned.

When you release the spare wheel, the centre of gravity can easily change due to the
heavy weight of the wheel, causing the
wheel to fall or tip over and injuring you or
other persons.
Using the winch, let down or take out the
spare wheel.

To remove the spare wheel

Loosen the nuts on the securing bolts.


Lower the spare wheel and its crossmember with the winch, allowing the
cable to pay out fully.

Spare wheel under chassis

1 Hand crank
2 Securing nuts

Pull the spare wheel out to the side or


to the rear.
Unscrew the spare wheel from the
spare wheel cross member.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

491

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel under tipper body

Risk of accident

Before removing the spare wheel from beneath the tipper body, observe body manufacturer's operating instructions.

3
4
Spacer

i
Secure spare wheel with tyre size

385/65 R 22.5 and


425/65 R 22.5

only in conjunction with spacer from


vehicle tool kit pocket.

8
9

492

1 Tipper body support (example)


Raise tipper body and fit support
( page 385).
Remove the spare wheel from beneath
the tipper body.

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel at side of chassis

Semitrailer tractor vehicles

1 Securing nuts
2 Wheel cover

i
Clean securing nuts and securing bolts
of rust/dirt and spray with rust release
fluid.

For semitrailer tractor vehicles with


side panelling: remove side panelling.

Unscrew and remove the retaining


nuts.

For vehicles with underride guard: Remove underride guard.

Lower spare wheel with winch, completely unwinding the line.

Remove wheel cover 2.

Pull spare wheel out to the side.

Assemble hand crank with pump lever


from the vehicle's tool kit,
( page 433).

Remove the retaining plate through the


centre hole of wheel rim.

3
4

Place pump lever with hand crank on


the winch so that locking sleeve on
winch engages in the cutouts on pump
lever.

Operate winch until cable is lightly tensioned.

Clean securing nuts and securing bolts


of rust/dirt and spray with rust release
fluid.

7
8
9

493

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres

1
2

Changing a wheel
Information on vehicle tools and emergency equipment ( page 430).

Risk of accident

Where an unapproved tyre size is used, the


braking behaviour of vehicles equipped with
Telligent brake system can change.
The Telligent brake system, tachograph
and speedometer must be re-calibrated if a
tyre of a different size is fitted.

The maintenance work should always be


carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

5
6
7
8
9

494

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit


a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres

i
When changing a wheel note the following carefully:
Use only the tyre and wheel sizes
approved for your vehicle type.
Please also observe particularly the
specific national approval regulations for tyres. These regulations
stipulate under certain conditions a
particular type of tyre for your vehicle or forbid the use of particular
types of tyre.
Please observe also the required
tyre load capacity and tyre speed
index for your vehicle. Please obtain the information from the vehicle certificate.

Special rims and wheel nuts are required for conversion of the vehicle
from steel wheel rims to light-alloy
rims. Information is available from
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Different wheel nuts are required
on the front and rear axles for securing wheels light-alloy wheels. Do
not interchange wheel nuts when
fitting the wheels. Never use wheel
nuts intended for pressed-steel
wheels.
Check tyre pressures. Observe the
tyre pressure table ( page 579).
Do not change the tyres' direction
of rotation.

If the tractor vehicle and trailer/


semitrailer are equipped with different pressed-steel wheels (hub centring and centring with spherical
spring washers):
carry a spare wheel for centring
with spherical spring washers. It is
possible to use this wheel for both
types of wheel centring until next
opportunity for repair is reached.
Use the wheel nuts for a wheel with
hub centring. Use tightening torques as for wheels with hub centring.

Do not damage threads of attachment studs when changing a wheel.

2
3
4
5

7
8
9

495

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres

Safeguard the vehicle against rolling


away.

Assemble the pump lever


( page 433).
Positioning of vehicle jack

Risk of accident and injury

4
Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims

5 1 Wheel nuts with pressure plate


2 Wheel nut with spherical spring washer

Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims

1 Single tyre
2 Twin tyres
Apply the parking brake.

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 0.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:


this prevents re-adjustment of chassis
height.

8
9

496

The vehicle's jack is intended only to raise


the vehicle for a short time. The vehicle
must be secured by axle stands of sufficient
loadbearing capacity, if work is being carried
out beneath it.

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
!

Front axle with steel springs

All-wheel-drive front axle

Position vehicle jack only at the attachment points provided, never locate jack
under the differential housing.

Do not raise vehicles with a loading


crane or loading tailgate, using the hydraulic supports. Damage would be
caused to the chassis.

3
4
Jacking point

Jacking point

Locate vehicle jack under the spring


support, directly in front of the front
axle member.

Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the axle support frame.

6
7

If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden


underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt
the cab forwards ( page 453).

8
9

497

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres

1 Air-sprung front axle

Air-sprung, steered leading axle


(8x4/4)

2
3
4
5

Jacking point

Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup of the air spring support, directly in front of the front axle member.

7
8

i
If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden
underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt
the cab forwards, ( page 453).

498

Location point of jack

Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup, directly in front of the front
axle member.

i
If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden
underlay (from vehicle tool kit).

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Rear axle with steel springs

Air-sprung rear axle

Nummek trailing axle

1
2
3
4

Jacking point

Jacking point

Jacking point

Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the axle support tube.

Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the air spring support.

Locate the jack under axle swing arm.

5
6

i
Position the support plate on the jack
such that the axle arm lies in the recess
of the support plate.

7
8
9

499

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres

1 Hendrickson leading axle (6x2/2)

Hydraulically steered trailing axle

Risk of injury

Jacking point

Jacking point

Locate the vehicle jack under the


spring mounting support plate.

Locate the jack under the axle carrier.

i
7

When you release the wheel, the centre of


gravity can easily change due to the heavy
weight of the wheel, causing wheel to fall or
tip over and injuring you or other persons.
Carefully remove the wheel.

To remove a wheel

Position the support plate on the jack


such that the spring mounting lies in
the recess of the support plate.

8
9

500

i
Set the jack in such a way that the support plate sits under the middle of the
axle carrier.

Unscrew and remove the caps from the


wheel nuts using the wheelbrace.
Loosen all wheel nuts and remove all
but three evenly distributed wheel
nuts.
Remove the last three wheel nuts when
it is clear that the wheel is sitting on the
wheel stud under no stress.
Remove the wheel.

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
To fit a wheel

Twin tyres with light-alloy wheels:


Before fitting the inner wheel, place the
fitting sleeve (from vehicle tool kit) on
the wheel bolt.
Place the wheels in position and screw
on two or three wheel nuts finger-tight.
Remove the assembly sleeve.

Assembly sleeve

Clean rust and dirt from locating surfaces of the wheel hub, wheel rim and
wheel nuts.
On wheel nuts with a pressure plate,
lightly oil the friction contact surfaces
between the pressure plate and the
wheel nut.

Screw on the remaining wheel nuts and


tighten them in a crosswise pattern.
Observe correct tightening torque
( page 577).
Rims with hub centring:

Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern. Observe correct tightening torque


( page 577).

1
2

!
Ensure correct centering. The wheel
bolts must located centrally in the
holes of the wheel.

3
4

Rims with centring by spherical spring


washers and wheel studs:
Replace wheel and screw on two or
three wheel nuts with spherical spring
washers finger-tight.

Place wheel in position and screw on all


wheel nuts.

7
8
9

501

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres

Ensure correct centering. The wheel


bolts must located centrally in the
holes of the wheel.

Screw on remaining wheel nuts with


spherical spring washers.

Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern. Observe correct tightening torque


( page 577).

Tyre inflator connection


The tyre inflator connection is on the front
of the compressed-air drier and has an integral pressure regulator.

!
Only use the tyre inflator connection
for inflating tyres.
As far as possible do not charge the
compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air
is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the
pressure regulator.

Risk of injury

Compressed-air drier (example)

1 Tyre inflator connection

If you inflate tyres to an excessive pressure


they can explode.
In order to inflate tyres, reduce charge pressure in the compressed-air system to approximately 6 bar.
Do not exceed a maximum tyre inflation
pressure of 10 bar. The tyres can explode.

8
9

502

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
To inflate tyres with the tyre inflation
connection

Reduce the charge pressure in the


compressed-air system to the required
value given in the tyre pressure table,
e.g. 6 bar.

2
3

This can be done, for example, by repeated operation of service brake.

Remove protective cap 1.


Connect the tyre inflator hose (vehicle
tool kit).

Inflate the tyre.

Observe tyre pressure table


( page 579).

7
8
9

503

Practical advice
Electrical system
Electrical system

1
2

Replacing bulbs
Lamps and lights are essential components of vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure
that all lamps are functioning at all times.

Risk of injury

Bulbs can be very hot. Therefore, before replacing, switch off and allow to cool. There is
a risk of burning.

Do not use a lamp which has been dropped


or whose glass bulb shows scratches. The
lamp can explode.
Do not hold the glass bulb with bare hands.
If necessary, clean the glass bulb with alcohol or spirit and wipe with a lint-free cloth.
Only operate lamps at correct rated voltage.

H1, H3 and H7 bulbs operate at high pressure and high temperature. There is a risk of
burning and explosion.

Only operate bulbs in closed lamps constructed for that purpose. Only use replacement lamps of same type.

Store lamps and bulbs out of reach of children.

8
9

504

Protect lamps from moisture when in use


and do not allow them to come into contact
with liquids.
Safety glasses and non-slip gloves must be
worn while replacing bulbs to prevent injuries.

Xenon lamps operate at high voltage, high


pressure and high temperature. There is
a risk of fatal injury if live parts of the lamp
and circuit equipment are touched. If the
headlamp is damaged, do not touch the
xenon lamp. Do not replace xenon lamps
yourself, but have them replaced by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For safety relevant work and work on safety relevant systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a specialist workshop.

Practical advice
Electrical system
Replacing a lamp
To prevent a short circuit, switch off
lighting before replacing lamps.
Use only 24 Volt lamps of same type
and of same wattage.
Do not work with oily or moist hands.
Hold lamps with a clean, lint-free cloth
only.
Check contacts for corrosion and clean
if necessary.
Check that all seals are sitting correctly. Replace damaged housing seals.

If the new lamp still does not function after


replacement, have the lighting examined in
an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

i
Have the headlamp setting regularly
checked.

Overview of lamps

Exterior lighting

Main headlamps
Main-beam headlamps

H1 24 V 70W

Dipped-beam headlamps H7 24 V 70W


Turn signal lamp, front

PY 21W

Side lamp/parking lamp W 5W 24 V

Turn signal/
perimeter, front side

P 21/5W

Front foglamp
(additional headlamp)

H3 24 V 70W

Perimeter, roof front

C 5W

6
7
8
9

505

Practical advice
Electrical system
Interior lighting

Rear lamps
P 21W

Entry door trim lamp

Turn signal and brake


lamp, reversing lamp,
rear foglamp

R 10W

Perimeter, side marker,


rear lamp and licence
plate lamp

R Cab roof/ceiling
lamp

Side marker lamp

LED lighting

Rotating signal lights

45W 24 V

MEGASPACE entry access step lamp

R 5W

7
8
9

506

10 W festoon
lamp

Interior lighting

P 18W

Reading lamp

R 10W

Nightlight

W 1.5W

Reading lamp, sleeping 10W festoon


berths
lamp
Swivelling reading
lamp, reclining seat

Ambient lighting (blue)

5W halogen

Roofspace/footwell trim 60 150


mcd@20 mA
Compartment above
windscreen

765 1,575
mcd@20mA

Exterior stowage compartment lamp

5W festoon
lamp

i
Always carry a selection of spare bulbs
in the vehicle for use in an emergency.

Practical advice
Electrical system
Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps

Headlamps, front turn signal lamps

Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1.


Swing out the headlamp.

Pull off the cable connector.


Disengage the cover and remove.

Pull cable connector from the bulb.

Rear of headlamp (example)


Headlamp (example)

1 Headlamp retaining screws


2 Front foglamps

3 Turn signal lamps


4 Dipped-beam headlamps
5 Main-beam headlamps
6 Side lamps

Detach retainer spring and take out the


bulb.

Re-assemble the lamp in the reverse


order.

Insert new bulb into the holder so that


base plate locates in the cutout.

6
7
8
9

507

Practical advice
Electrical system

1 Turn signal lamp


Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1.

2 Swing out the headlamp.


Pull off the cable connector.

3 Disengage and remove the cover.

Turn the lock of the bulb holder for turn


signal lamp 3 to left and remove.

Side lamp/parking lamp

Press the bulb down, turn it to the left


and withdraw it.

Swing out the headlamp.

Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1.


Pull off the cable connector.
Disengage and remove the cover.
Remove side lamps bulb holder 6.
Withdraw the capless bulb. Replace
bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

4
5
6
7
8
9

508

Practical advice
Electrical system
Side turn signal lamp, perimeter lamp

Press bulb holder 2 down, turn it to


the left and remove it.
Press the bulb down, turn it to the left
and remove it.
Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
Foglamp

Remove the housing cover.

Disconnect cable connector 1.


Detach retainer spring and take out the
bulb.
Re-assemble the lamp in reverse order.
Insert new bulb into the holder so that
base plate locates in the cutout 2.

2
3
4

1 Fixing screw
2 Lampholder for turn signal/perimeter
lamp

Unscrew fixing screw 1 and remove


complete lamp unit.

Pull off the cable connector.

7
1 Cable connector
2 Cut-out

8
9

509

Practical advice
Electrical system

1 Rear lamps

Rear lamps
Unscrew fixing screws 1.
Remove the lamp lens.

Press the bulb down, turn it to the left


and withdraw it.

To replace licence plate bulb, withdraw


the reflector unit.

4
5
6
7
8

Replace the bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.


Rear lamps, left

1 Fixing screws
2 Perimeter lamp/side marker lamp
3 Turn signal lamps
4 Brake lamp
5 Rear lamp
6 Reversing lamp
7 Rear foglamp
8 Licence plate lamp

510

Rear lamps, right

Practical advice
Electrical system
Front perimeter lamp

Side marker lamps

Press retainers 1 on the cable connector together and hold in this position.

Semitrailer tractor vehicle:

Pull off cable connector 2.

swing side panel out before changing


side marker lamp in the side trim.

Unlock and remove side marker lamp.

2
3

i
If the LED is defective, the complete
side marker lamp must be replaced.
1 Securing bolts
2 Festoon bulb

Remove the lamp lens.

Refit both screws and tighten.

4
5

Unscrew fixing screws 1.


Replace festoon bulb 2 and re-assemble in reverse order.

1 Cable connector
2 Side marker lamp

8
9

511

Practical advice
Electrical system

1 Entry access step lamp

Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screwdriver.


Pull off cable connector 2.

Press bulb holder 3 down, turn it to


the left and withdraw it.

Press the bulb down, turn it to the left


and withdraw it.

Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

5
6

Entry door trim lamp

Entry lamp (example)

1 Lamp lens/cover frame


2 Cable connector
3 Bulb holder
1 Lens
2 Reflector

7
8
9

512

Practical advice
Electrical system
Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screwdriver.

Interior ceiling lamp

Lever off lamp lens with a screwdriver.


Press down interior lamp 1 or reading
lamp 3, turn to left and withdraw.

Pull off cable connector and withdraw


reflector 2.

Nightlight 2: Pull off green cover and


withdraw the plug-in cap lamp.

Press the festoon bulb towards left and


withdraw.

Replace lamp and re-assemble in reverse order.

Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

The lamp lens must audibly engage


when it is replaced.

The lamp lens must audibly engage


when it is replaced.
1 Interior lighting
2 Nightlight
3 Reading lamp

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

513

Practical advice
Electrical system
Exterior stowage compartment lighting

1 Reading lamp, berth


2
3
4
5 Lever out lamp lens from the pivot
hinge (arrow) with a screwdriver.

Press the festoon bulb towards left and


withdraw.

Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp


lens.

8
9

514

Fold out the reading lamp.


Release lamp lens with a screwdriver
and remove.
Press the bulb upwards, turn it to the
left and withdraw it.
Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp
lens.

Lever lamp lens out of the mounting at


the back.
Press the festoon bulb downwards and
withdraw.
Replace the festoon bulb and reassemble the lamp lens.

Practical advice
Electrical system
Adjustable reading lamp

Headlamp setting
Correct headlamp adjustment is of great
importance for road safety. Therefore, regularly check settings with a headlamp setting device (observe manufacturer's
operating instructions).
Observe correct basic headlamp beam settings, see type plate ( page 552).

Before adjusting:

Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface.


The headlamp beam adjuster must be
at a right angle to the vehicle.
Correct tyre pressures.
Set headlamp range control to the basic setting.

2
3

Switch on headlamps.

4
5

Turn the switch cover to position .

unladen (ready for use filled with fuel)


and

Check each headlamp separately.


Cover the headlamp not being
checked, and the additional lamps.

Push bulb rearwards towards bulb


holder and remove.

have one driver on board or a load of


75 kg

For how to check and adjust headlamp setting ( page 516).

In order to check headlamp setting, the vehicle must be


1 Reading lamp

Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

!
Air-sprung vehicles: a pressure of at
least 10.5 bar must be present in the
compressed-air system.

7
8
9

515

Practical advice
Electrical system

1 To check and adjust headlamp setting


2

Lateral adjustment

Turn adjusting screw 3 until lateral


setting is correct.

Vertical adjustment:

The dipped-beam's light-dark boundary


at a distance of 10 metres is determined by measuring headlamp height
(centre of headlamp to ground) and deducting the stated basic headlamp setting.

If no lateral correction is necessary

Basic headlamp setting:

adjust height using adjusting screw 2.

1%

Then correct the height setting using


adjusting screw 2.

3
4
5 1 Securing bolts
6

2 Inner adjusting screw (vertical adjustment)


3 Outer adjusting screw (lateral adjustment)

7
8
9

516

= 10 cm

1.5% = 15 cm
2%

= 20 cm etc.

Practical advice
Electrical system

Partially masking headlamps


driving on left/right
The headlamps are designed so that they
illuminate the edge of the carriageway for
a particularly long distance.
The beam is asymmetrical.
If vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on opposite side of the road to
that of country where vehicle was approved, the beam falls not on the edge of
the carriageway, but onto the opposite carriageway.
This will dazzle road users travelling in the
opposite direction.

Risk of accident

In countries where vehicles drive on the opposite side of the road to that of the country
where vehicle was approved, there is a risk
of dazzling from the asymmetrical dipped
beam.
To prevent dazzling of oncoming traffic, cover over headlamps with adhesive tape, following the details issued by Mercedes-Benz.

The area of the headlamp lens to be covered may be seen in the relevant illustration below for the vehicle.

Prepare adhesive tape using commercially approved opaque adhesive tape


in accordance with the dimensions,
apply to corresponding area of the
headlamp.

1
2

Comply with national legislation when


vehicle is operated in other countries
and when used for international transport work.

The responsibility for vehicle lighting always rests with the driver.

5
6
7
8
9

517

Practical advice
Electrical system

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Self-produced adhesive strips for left-hand
drive vehicles

518

Practical advice
Electrical system
Left-hand-drive vehicles

1 H7 headlamp, right:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on left
2 H7 headlamp, left:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on left
3 Xenon headlamp, right:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on left
4 Xenon headlamp, left:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on left

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

519

Practical advice
Electrical system

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Self-produced adhesive strips for righthand drive vehicles

520

Practical advice
Electrical system
Right-hand-drive vehicles
5 H7 headlamp, right:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on right.
6 H7 headlamp, left:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on right.
7 Xenon headlamp, right:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on right.
8 Xenon headlamp, left:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on right.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

521

Practical advice
Electrical system

1
2

Fuses
The fuse box is in the electrical equipment
compartment on co-driver's side.

To open the electrical compartment


Fold back floor covering in the direction of the arrow.
Unlock fasteners 1 by lifting up.
Remove lid from the electrical compartment.

Risk of fire

Use only fuses with the specified ampere


rating. Do not fit fuses with higher ampere
rating. This would result in damage to the
electrical system or even burnt-out cables.
Do not re-wire fuses or bridge them out.

To close the electrical compartment

Insert lid of the electrical compartment


in lower guide slot and close.

5
6

Engage fasteners 1 and lock by folding down.


1 Fuse box fastener

7
8
9

522

Fold down floor covering.

Do not replace a fuse until the reason for the


fault has been traced and rectified.

!
Before replacing a fuse, switch off all
electrical consumers and disconnect
the batteries' negative () terminals.

Practical advice
Electrical system
To check/replace fuses

The individual electrical circuits are protected by safety fuses or a circuit breaker.

A faulty fuse can also be identified by


the burnt out fuse wire.

If an electrical circuit failure occurs,


switch off electrical consumers and
check the fuses.
Pull fuse out of its module with the
safety fuse extractor provided, and insert it into the test socket.
If the LED lights up, the fuse is in working order.
If the LED does not come on, the fuse
has blown or is defective.

1
2

Replacement fuses/fuse extractor


Replacement fuses and fuse extractor are
located in module B in the electrical compartment, see fuse assignment
( page 526).

3
4
1 Fuse extractor
2 LED
3 Test socket
4 Spare fuses

5
6

If necessary, replace the fuse.


Insert the fuse.

7
8
9

523

Practical advice
Electrical system

Circuit breaker

If a circuit breaker has tripped:

If a fuse blows repeatedly, have the


cause of fault rectified in an authorised
specialist workshop.

If a circuit breaker trips repeatedly,


have the cause of the fault rectified in
an authorised specialist workshop.

3
4
5

Rectify the cause of tripping and reset


the circuit breaker back on.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you


visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

6
Circuit breaker

1 On
2 Tripped
3 To trip

7
8
9

524

Practical advice
Electrical system
Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle

The fuse for the hydraulic pump motor


(5 amp safety fuse) is located in the hydraulics box on the left of the chassis.

2
3
4
Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle

1 Fuse (hydraulic pump motor)

5
6
7
8
9

525

Practical advice
Electrical system

1 Allocation of fuses, diodes, relays


2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

526

Practical advice
Electrical system

Rating

Consumer

Terminal

F1

20

Driver's door

30

F2

20

Other I-CAN subscriber

30

F3

20

Co-driver's door

Fuse
Base module A

30

F4

15

Transmission control, Telligent gearshift

30

F5

20

Trailer

30

F6

10

Switch panel

30

F7

30

Distribution terminal 30.2

30

F8

30

Distribution body terminal 30.1

30

F9

20

Trailer ABS

30

F10

30

Distribution body terminal 15.2

15

F11

15

Telligent brake system

30.1

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

527

Practical advice
Electrical system

Fuse

Rating

Consumer

Terminal

F12

15

Transmission control, Telligent gearshift

30

F13

10

Auxiliary heating time switch

30

F14

10

Drive control, ignition lock

30

F15

20

Blower

30

F16

10

Interior lighting

30

F17

10

Instrument cluster, tachograph diagnostic socket

30

F18

20

Sliding/tilting sunroof

30

Base module A

2
3
4
5

F19

6
7

15

Telligent brake system

30

F20

10

Transmission control, Telligent gearshift

15

F21

10

Engine control, alternator

15

F22

10

Trailer ABS

15

F23

15

Brake lamp, body

54

8
9

528

Practical advice
Electrical system

Rating

Consumer

Terminal

F24

15

Permanent+ distribution, body

D+

F25

10

Diagnostic socket

15

F26

30

Distribution terminal 15

15

F27

10

Blower

15

F28

10

Drive control

Fuse
Base module A

15

F29

10

Telligent brake system

15

F30

10

Instrument cluster, airbag

15

F31

10

Temperature sensor, audio device

15R

F32

10

Cigarette lighter

15R

4
5
6
7
8
9

529

Practical advice
Electrical system

Fuse

Rating

Consumer

Terminal

F1

15

Battery heating

30

F2

20

Heated windscreen

30

F3

20

Heated windscreen

30

F4

10

Refrigerator

30

F5

10

Sun visor, loading tailgate

15

F6

10

Engine compartment lamp

15

F7

15

Socket 12 V

15

F8

10

Electronic rear axle additional steering

30

F9

10

Electronic rear axle additional steering

15

F10

10

Seat heating, belt checks

15

F11

10

Auxiliary air conditioning, reclining seat

30

F12

10

Auxiliary air-conditioning

15

F13

10

Audio device 12 V

30

F14

10

Lane Assist

15

Module A1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

530

Practical advice
Electrical system

Rating

Consumer

Terminal

F1

20

Flame-start system

30

F2

20

Cab tilting pump

30

Fuse
Module A2

F3

10

Telligent distance control

15

F4

10

Retarder

30

F5

10

Anti-theft alarm system

30

F6

10

Rotating beacon lamp

30

F7

10

Transfer case oil cooler

30

F8

20

Transfer case oil cooler

30

F9

10

24 V sockets

30

F10

Free

F11

Free

F12

Free

F13

Free

F14

15

Load compartment light

3
4
5
6
7
8

30

Module B

Spare fuse

531

Practical advice
Electrical system

Module location

Designation

Terminal

K1

Trailer, body brake lamps

54

K2

Supply permanent+ signal

:D+

K3

Supply terminal 15.2

15

K4

Supply terminal 15.1

15

K5

Supply terminal 15R

15R

General module A (Relay)

2
3
4

Module A31 (Relay)

5
6
7
8
9

K1

Transfer case oil radiator

K2

Roller tipper/loading tailgate

K3

24 V socket

K4

Telephone fittings

K5

Free

K6

Free

K7

Free

K8

Free

K9

Free

K10

Free

532

15R

Practical advice
Electrical system

Designation

K1

Heated windscreen/belt checks

K2

Heated windscreen/belt checks

K3

Transfer case oil radiator

K4

Battery heating

K5

Free

K6

Free

K7

Free

K8

Free

K9

Free

K10

Free

Module location
Module A32 (Relay)

3
4
5
6

Module D
(Diode withstand voltage)
D1

7
Loading tailgate

8
9

533

Practical advice
Unlocking and locking in an emergency
Unlocking and locking in an emergency

1
2

Radio remote control


A radio remote control with a flat battery
can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle.
Have the battery replaced by an authorised
specialist workshop.

3 DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis4


5

it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it


has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

When the radio remote control battery


needs to be replaced, an event message appears in the multi-function display.

8
9

534

Risk of poisoning and


explosion

Batteries contain toxic substances. Therefore, keep batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Batteries can leak or explode if you try to recharge batteries that are not specially designed for re-charging.
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire and do
not try to open them with force or there is a
risk of explosion.

Environmental note

Do not dispose of used batteries with household waste. Take discharged batteries to a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to an authorised collection point for used batteries.

1 Battery
2 Spring contact
Battery removal
Lever up both sides of the radio remote
control housing halves at key ring location.
Push out old battery 1 from under
spring contact 2 and remove it.

Practical advice
Unlocking and locking in an emergency
To fit the battery
Insert new battery 1 under the spring
contact with the positive terminal upwards 2 using a lint-free cloth.

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof


mechanically
The drive is located in rear area of the cutout for the sliding/tilting sunroof.

Press both halves of housing together


until they engage.

Remove the 5 DIN 911 Allen key 2


from vehicle document wallet.

Pull the blind to opposite end of cutout


and engage in position ( page 342).

Pull blind further out of roller mechanism (arrow) until opening 1 is visible.

Insert Allen key 2 into the opening


and push upwards.

i
Observe the terminal markings on the
spring contact.

To close

Batteries are obtainable from any specialist workshop or from your


Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Turn the Allen key clockwise.

5
6

1 Opening
2 Allen key

7
8
9

535

Practical advice
Unlocking and locking in an emergency

Closing the tilting sunroof


mechanically
The drive is located in rear area of the cut-

2 out for the tilting sunroof. The opening is


closed off with a plug.

3
4

To close
Remove a flat screwdriver (blade width
4 mm) from vehicle tool kit pocket.
Remove plug.

5
6
7
8
9

536

Insert flat screwdriver into the opening


of the drive.
Turn the screwdriver anti-clockwise.
Replace the plug in the opening.

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Jump-starting
If the starter batteries are discharged, a
second vehicle can be used to jump-start
the vehicle.

Before starting from a mobile charging


station (batteries with a mains power
stage), pull out the mains plug. Overvoltage can damage electronic components in the vehicle.

Before jump-starting, disconnect


mobile communications systems, e.g.
telephone, radio equipment, fax, etc.,
from the electrical system.

Check and make sure that the vehicles


are not touching each other.

Do not use quick charging devices for


jump-starting.

Make sure that you have easy access


to the batteries ( page 423).

A discharged battery can freeze at a


temperature of 10 C. Do not start
the engine in these circumstances.
First, thaw out the battery.
Jump-start only from batteries with
same operating voltage (12 V/24 V).
Use jump leads with protection against
polarity reversal, insulated terminals
and a cross section of approximately
70 mm.

Risk of explosion and injury

1
2
3
4

There is a risk that batteries may explode


due to build-up of explosive gas. Avoid creating sparks. Do not work with open flames
or smoke in vicinity of the batteries.

Battery acid is caustic.

There is a risk of injury from ejection of


acid spray from batteries if you bend
over them when jump starting the vehicle.

Keep children away from batteries.


Wash off acid spray from skin, eyes or
clothing immediately with clean water. If
necessary seek medical attention.

8
9

537

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

1
2
3
4

i
Tractor vehicles with integrated batteries at the rear of the vehicle have a
socket for jump-starting on the left side
of the vehicle at fuel tank height. It is
not necessary to uncouple the semitrailer. It is possible to use this external
starting socket for jump-starting.
Turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 0.

5 Switch off all electrical consumers.


Take off the battery covers.

6 Begin with other vehicle's battery:


7

Connect first the positive terminals,


then the negative terminals with the
jump leads.
Do not swap the connection terminals.

8
9

538

Run the engine of the assisting vehicle


at fast idling speed.
Turn the key in the ignition lock of the
vehicle receiving assistance to position
3. When the engine has started allow it
to run at idling speed.

i
A description of the starting procedures for vehicles fitted with flamestart system can be found on
page 129.
Disconnect the jump leads, first from
the negative terminals, then from the
positive.

!
When the jump leads are detached, the
engine of the vehicle being started
must only be running at idling speed.

Have the battery examined in a


Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

i
Jump leads with protection against polarity reversal can be obtained from any
specialist workshop or from your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Environmental note

Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of


used batteries with household waste.
Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.
Take empty batteries to a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or to an authorised collection point for used batteries.
Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

Retrofitting the towing coupling


You can have a towing coupling 1 retrofitted to end cross-member 2 of the chassis.

!
In order to prevent damage to tail
cross-member, you must only fit the
towing coupling in conjunction with a
reinforcing plate 3.
Using the towing coupling, you may
only tow or manoeuvre vehicles with a
total weight up to a maximum of
25 tonnes. You must not use the towing coupling for trailer operation or for
vehicle recovery purposes.

Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer


operation will result in damage to the
end cross-member.

Observe the details on the type plate


fitted to the towing coupling.

3
4
Towing coupling (example)

Information is available from any specialist


workshop or your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.

5
6
7
8
9

539

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

Tow-starting
Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:

If the engine exceeds the permitted engine speed after the clutch is engaged,
an alarm sounds.

Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer


operation will result in damage to the
end cross-member ( page 539).

The retarder can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. To deactivate the retarder, remove fuse F 4 in module A2 in the
electrical compartment ( page 526).

Do not exceed a towing speed of 12 mph


(20 km/h).

Risk of accident

Vehicles with towing coupling:

2
3

The vehicle is equipped at the front with a

5 coupling jaw to allow manoeuvring or towing with the vehicle or for towing away.

6
7
8
9

540

The charge pressure display for brake circuit 1 and brake circuit 2 must show a
minimum charge pressure of 8 bar.

To prevent damage to the engine


select a higher driving gear or
reduce the towing speed.

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift

Telligent gearshift

Telligent automatic gearshift

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 2.

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 2.

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 2.

Depress the clutch pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal.

Select 4th gear.

Select 5th or 6th gear.

Select 4th gear.

Tow-start the vehicle.


When a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release
the clutch pedal and slowly depress the
accelerator.

The gear display shows 4th gear in the


left-hand position.
Tow-start the vehicle.
When a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release
the clutch pedal and slowly depress the
accelerator.

The gear display shows 4th gear in the


left-hand position.

2
3

Tow-start the vehicle.


When approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) is reached, depress the accelerator.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages.

4
5
6

i
If you depress the accelerator slowly,
the Telligent automatic gearshift engages slowly. If you depress the accelerator quickly, the Telligent automatic
gearshift engages quickly.

7
8
9

541

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

1
2

Towing
Depending on the cause of failure and the
equipment fitted to your vehicle, you must
perform a series of different measures before towing your vehicle.

3
Risk of injury and accident

The drive shaft can fall and injure you as


it is being removed. Before removal, secure the drive shaft against falling.

When you start the vehicle moving, the


traction control system (ASR) can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before you start to
move the vehicle.

6
7
8
9

542

Risk of injury and accident

When the engine is not running


On corners you may deviate from the
carriageway or collide against the towing vehicle. The power steering does not
operate. You must apply a great deal of
force to steer the vehicle. Arrange with
the driver of the towing vehicle a system
of unmistakable communication signals
and adopt suitable driving behaviour.

!
When the engine is not running
and you are towing your vehicle,
there is a risk of damage to the
transmission. Transmission lubrication does not function. Observe the
"Towing vehicles with engine damage" section ( page 544)
the brake system, gear selection
and pneumatic suspension have no
compressed air supply.

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

When towing the vehicle, run the engine if possible or provide a secure
compressed-air supply from the towing
vehicle.
For short towing distances, you can
charge the compressed-air system via
an external compressed-air source
( page 486).

Vehicles with Telligent stability control:


Switching off
( page 91).

Telligent

Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:

stability control

i
When towing a vehicle equipped with
Telligent stability control, you must
also switch off the Telligent stability
control.

Risk of accident

The retarder can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. To deactivate the retarder, remove the fuse F 4 in module A2 in the
electrical compartment ( page 526).

2
3
4

If the compressed-air system cannot be


charged, you must mechanically release the spring-loaded parking brake
( page 483).

5
6
7
8
9

543

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

1 Attaching the towbar

Swing cover 1 of the coupling pin upwards.

Swing cover 2 of the coupling jaw


downwards.

Release coupling pin 3, pivot it forwards through approximately 90 and


lift it out.

Insert the towbar and allow coupling


pin to engage in the lock.

Front coupling jaw

6
7
8
9

544

Towing vehicles with engine damage

i
Four-axle vehicles:
With the drive shaft fitted, the 2nd power steering pump takes over power
steering during the journey.

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Towing distance up to 1 km

Towing distance up to 60 miles (100 km)

Shift the transmission into neutral.

All-wheel-drive vehicles:

Risk of transmission damage. When the


engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. You may
tow a vehicle with engine damage at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h)
and for a maximum distance of
0.5 miles (1 km).

Risk of transmission damage. When the


engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. You may
tow a vehicle with engine damage and
high range selected at a maximum
speed of 25 mph (50 km/h) and for a
maximum distance of 60 miles
(100 km). You do not need to remove
the driveshaft to the drive axle.

Switch transfer case into the position


for road travel ( page 252).

Vehicles with hydro-pneumatic gearshift


(HPS):

Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/


automatic gearshift:
If the vehicle's electrical power supply
and/or compressed-air supply has
failed, you must remove the driveshaft
before towing the vehicle.
Shift the transmission into neutral.
All-wheel-drive vehicles:

4
5

Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/


automatic gearshift:
If the vehicle's electrical power supply
and/or compressed-air supply has
failed, you must remove the driveshaft
before towing the vehicle.

6
7

Transmission

1 Locking plug

Switch transfer case into the position


for road travel ( page 252).

545

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift:

Press the j or k button on the


multi-function steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows

Transmission control back-up mode


Towing.

!
If the multi-function display shows
Towing not possible remove propeller shaft, you may tow the vehicle at a

4
GP setscrew for high range

5 Unscrew locking plug 1 on transmission above drive shaft.

Remove the GP setscrew from vehicle


document wallet; screw it fully into the
opening and tighten.

Enable GS back-up function menu


( page 473).
Activate GS back-up function
( page 474).
Press the or button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the
highlight is positioned on Towing.

7
8
9

546

maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h)


and for a maximum distance of
0.5 miles (1 km). Failure to comply will
lead to transmission damage. For longer distances or for higher speeds, you
must remove the driveshaft.

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Towing distances greater than 60 miles
(100 km)

!
Risk of transmission damage. When the
engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. If you want
to tow the vehicle further than 60 miles
(100 km) or at a speed higher than
25 mph (40 km/h), you must remove
the driveshafts to the driven axles.
Remove driven axle driveshafts.

To be observed with transmission and


transfer case damage
Remove driven axle driveshafts.

To be observed with front axle damage

i
Towing requirements are the same as
with engine damage.

Risk of injury and accident

2
3

When you start the vehicle moving, the traction control (ASR) can produce uncontrolled
braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before
you start to move the vehicle.

Raise the front axle.

6
7
8
9

547

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

1 All-wheel-drive vehicles:
2
3

Remove the propeller shaft between


rear axle and transfer case.

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 2.

Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:

Engage the differential lock (transverse


lock).

Set chassis height as required with


control panel ( page 290).
Four-axle vehicles:

4
5
6

To be observed with rear axle damage

Remove both driveshafts.


Do not raise the front axle.

Vehicles with two driven rear axles:

If you raise the front axle of a laden


four-axle vehicle, this will result in damage to chassis. Only raise the front axle
of four-axle vehicles when the vehicle is
in the unladen condition.

Remove driveshafts at both rear axles.

7
8
9

548

Removing driveshafts, rear axle HL 7,


HD 7

All-wheel-drive vehicles:
Remove the propeller shaft between
front axle and transfer case.

Rear axle HL 7, HD 7

1 Circlip

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Unscrew and remove the oil drain plugs
at the planetary hubs.
Catch the oil that runs out in a suitable
container.
Remove the planetary hub end covers.

Rear axle HL 7, HD 7

Re-fit closure cap.

i
If vehicle is to be towed for more than
60 miles (100 km), add oil to the planetary hubs. Use clean oil only.

Pull out the circlips with pliers.

Remove the drive shafts together with


sun gear. For this, use the special tool
or a M 8 x 120 mm bolt.

2 Special tool

5
6
7
8
9

549

Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing

1 Removing drive shafts, rear axle HL 6,

Turn the key in the ignition lock to


position 2.

Engage the differential lock (transverse


lock).

HL 8

Do not raise the front axle.

Unscrew the bolt connections on the


wheel hub.

Remove the drive shaft at the wheel


end.

5
Rear axle HL 6, HL 8

6 1 Bolt connections on the wheel hub


7
8
9

550

Risk of accident

In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle


height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in).
When transporting the vehicle on a low-loader, the maximum permitted vehicle height of
4 metres (13 ft 1 in) must not be exceeded.
Observe carefully the height of bridges and
other structures on the route.

Technical data
Vehicle type plates
Service products and capacities
Operating data 1
Tyre pressure table
Limiting-speed feature
Compressed-air reservoir

2
3

Radio remote control

4
5
6
7
8
9

551

Technical data
Type plates
Type plates

Vehicle type plate


Information on the type plate

2 Type
Basic headlamp setting

3 Flue gas coefficient

The vehicle type plate is located on the


door frame.
The vehicle identification number is located on the longitudinal member.
The type plate and the vehicle identification number are explained here using an
example.

Rear axle ratio

4 Vehicle identification number (VIN)


5

Maximum permissible gross vehicle


weight
Maximum permissible axle loads

6
7
8
9

552

1 Vehicle type plate (example)


2 Vehicle identification number on the
right-hand longitudinal member (example)

Technical data
Type plates
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
WDB

934.032

1
264253

WDB

Vehicle manufacturer
934.032

Vehicle model designation number


1

Steering wheel (1 = left-hand-drive vehicles, 2 = right-hand-drive vehicles)


K

Code letter or code number of manufacturer's works


264253

Vehicle identification end number

Vehicle type designation

5
18 46
18

Maximum gross vehicle weight in metric tonnes


46

Engine power output in bhp (= x 10)

7
8
9

553

Technical data
Type plates

1 Vehicle type plate explanatory notes


2
3

The model designation, vehicle design,


axle version and number of wheels or pairs
of wheels are given on the vehicle type
plate. The meaning of the individual figures
is explained here using the example (model 934.03).

4
5
6
7

Vehicle type plate (example)

934.03
930
4

8x8/4
Model designation
Vehicle design
0 Platform trucks
2 Tippers/concrete mixers
4 Semitrailer tractor vehicle

03 Axle version
00...04
07, 08
11
20, 21
23
22
14/16/24/40
18, 41
30, 31, 42
32
33

8
9
1. Nummek trailing axle
2. Hendrickson leading axle

554

Number of wheels or
pairs of wheels
x8

Number of wheels or
pairs of wheels
/4

4x2
4x4
6x21
6x2
6x2/22
6x2/4
6x4
6x6
8x4/4
8x6/4
8x8/4

Number of steered
wheels

Technical data
Type plates

Engine type plate

2
3
4
1 Engine type plate

2 Engine type
3 Engine number

6
7
8
9

555

Technical data
Service products and capacities
Service products and capacities

1 Service products are all products needed


to operate the vehicle such as:

2
3
4
5

Lubricating products (oils and grease)


Brake fluid

Coolant

Service products or special lubricant


additives which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz could result
in damage to the assemblies.

Fuels
Windscreen cleaning fluid
Mercedes-Benz achieves optimum compatibility by ensuring that the service products used in the vehicle conform to the
materials used in the vehicle.
You should only use service products in

6 your vehicle which meet the strict


7

Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will


provide information about Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products.

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service


Products. Only then is optimum compatibility with the vehicle guaranteed.

i
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to restrict your warranty rights if service
products or special lubricant additives
which have not been approved are
used.

Risk of injury

Service products constitute a health hazard.


Always wear appropriate protective
clothing and a breathing mask when
handling service products.
If possible, avoid inhaling vapours.
Do not allow service products to come
into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Clean affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Change out of soiled
clothing without delay.
If the service products come into contact with the eyes, wash them thoroughly with clean water and consult a doctor
if necessary.
If any service product is swallowed, a
doctor should be consulted immediately.
Service products are highly flammable. For
this reason, avoid fire and naked flames and
refrain from smoking when handling service
products.

Keep service products away from children.

556

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Environmental note

Unless they are handled properly, service


products can damage people's health and
the environment.
Do not allow service products to enter
the ground
the sewage system
surface water.

Further notes on
handling different service products
storage
disposal
are available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Engine oils

Only use engine oils complying with Sheet


No. 228.5 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. These engine
oils have a high standard of quality and
have favourable effects on

engine wear
fuel consumption

3
4

exhaust gas emissions.

Observe the legal requirements.

Service products
Drums

Parts which have been contaminated by


the service products, such as filters or
cleaning cloths

must be disposed of in an environmentally


responsible manner.

8
9

557

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Non-approved engine oils could lead to


malfunctions and engine damage. The
use of such oils could affect your warranty rights.

Observe the notes in the Maintenance


Booklet.

4 Oil change
5

Oil change intervals depend on vehicle operating conditions and on the quality of the
oil used in the engine.

The driver information system automatically shows the time for an oil change as an
event message in the display.
Select the SAE class (viscosity) of engine
oil in accordance with the outside temperatures.

!
If oil for all-year-round operation is not
used in the engine, change the engine
oil in good time before the cold season
commences, and add an approved engine oil of the specified SAE class.
SAE engine oil classes

Single-grade oils

Multigrade oils

8
9

558

Technical data
Service products and capacities
The following data on engine oils is programmed in the "Adjusting service products" menu of the driver information
system:

Mixibility of engine oils

Sheet No. of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.

quality grade

SAE class
Adding/topping up the engine oil
When topping up, DaimlerChrysler recommends that you only use engine oils of the
same quality grade and SAE class as the oil
filled at the last oil change.

Adjusting oil quality

If in the unlikely event the

engine oil type

If you top up the engine oil or perform


an oil change using an engine oil of a
lower quality, the quality of this oil must
be adjusted in the "Adjusting service
products" menu in the driver information system.

SAE class
filled in the engine are not available: top up
the engine oil using another approved mineral or synthetic engine oil.

!
Mixing oils has a negative effect on the
benefits of high-quality engine oils.

If you top up using the higher quality


engine oil this quality should in no way
be entered in the driver information
system.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

559

Technical data
Service products and capacities

i
The

quality
SAE class

3
4
5

if necessary, the approval in accordance with Mercedes-Benz


Specifications for Service Products,
e.g. Sheet no. 228.5
can be seen from the drum designation
on the oil reservoir.

6
7
8
9

560

Engine oils for use with bio-diesel fuel


(FAME fuel)
Only use engine oils complying with Sheet
No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products which
are approved for operation
with bio-diesel fuel which have not
been mixed or
mixed with standard diesel fuels

!
The engine oil change intervals must be
shortened.

Environmental note

If your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuels, special precautions must be taken and national
specifications complied with when disposing of engine oils. Information is available
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Technical data
Service products and capacities
Coolant
The coolant is a mixture of water and a corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent or water
and a coolant additive without antifreeze
properties. In order to maintain corrosion
protection and to increase the boiling
point, the coolant must remain in the cooling system all the year round.

!
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the coolant should be
checked every six months.
Renew the coolant every three years,
since the level of corrosion protection
gradually decreases.
Water alone is not permissible as a
coolant, even if antifreeze protection is
not required. The water in the coolant
must satisfy the requirements specified on sheet no. 310 of the MercedesBenz Specifications for Service Products.

If the water quality is not sufficient you


must filter and/or treat the water.
Information is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Do not increase the concentration of
corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze beyond
55% by volume (= maximum antifreeze
protection). Above this concentration,
antifreeze protection deteriorates and
heat dissipation is less effective.
During the colder months, check corrosion protection and antifreeze more
frequently.

Coolant mixing ratios


Water %
by vol.

Corrosion/
antifreeze %
by vol.

1
Antifreeze
protection
to C

50

minimum 50

37

45

maximum 55 approximately 45

3
4

Environmental note

Unless they are handled properly, coolant


can constitute a risk both for people and for
the environment. Coolant must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters, the ground water or the ground
itself. Dispose of used coolant in an environmentally friendly manner. Observe the legal
requirements. Further information on how
to handle, store and dispose of coolants is
available from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.

561

5
6
7
8
9

Technical data
Service products and capacities

1 Coolant additives without antifreeze


2
3
4

No antifreeze protection is needed in countries in which the temperature is always


above freezing point. It is permitted in
these countries to mix water with a coolant
additive without antifreeze properties instead of a corrosion/antifreeze additive.
Comply with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.

5
6

Renew the coolant once a year.


Do not use fuel additives such as anticorrosion protection oils for the cooling
system.

7
8
9

562

Diesel fuels

Adjusting the fuel grade

Only use standard automotive diesel fuels


in accordance with DIN EN 590. Grades
such as marine diesel fuel, heating oils,
etc. are not permitted.

When the vehicle is delivered, the "Adjusting service products" menu of the driver information system is set to the normal
sulphur content (in %) in the fuel available
in the country of delivery.

!
Filter the fuel before adding it when refuelling the vehicle from drums or canisters. This prevents malfunctions in
the fuel system as a result of impurities
in the fuel.
Special additives must not be used as
they could lead to malfunctions and engine damage. The use of such additives
could affect your warranty rights.

If you refuel the vehicle occasionally or


predominantly in other countries, you must
adjust the normal sulphur content of this
country in the "Adjusting service products"
menu in the driver information system. For
an overview of sulphur content in % of fuel
available in other countries, see
( page 567).

Technical data
Service products and capacities
Diesel fuels at low temperatures
At low outside temperatures paraffin separation may reduce the diesel fuel's freeflowing properties.
To prevent operating problems, use diesel
fuel with improved flow properties in the
winter months.
In Germany, winter-grade diesel fuels are
sold which remain reliable in operation
down to approximately 20 C. Wintergrade diesel fuel can normally be used
without risk of malfunctioning at the outside temperatures expected in the country
where it is on sale.

Fuel additives

i
Do not use additives in winter diesel fuels. The fuel's flow properties could be
impaired by any such fuel additive.
If summer-grade diesel fuel or wintergrade fuel with less resistance to low temperatures is in use, add a quantity of flow
improver or kerosene, depending on the
outside temperatures.

The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This improves the flow properties of the diesel fuel by approximately
8 C.
Risk of fire and explosion

Adding petrol lowers the flash point of the


diesel fuel. This adds to the risk of handling
this fuel mixture.

1
2
3
4

Do not add petrol to diesel fuel.

Add the additives to the diesel fuel at the


appropriate time, before paraffin separation reduces the diesel's flow properties.
Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be removed by heating the
entire fuel system, e.g. by stopping the engine in a heated area.

6
7
8
9

563

Technical data
Service products and capacities

1 Flow improvers
2

The effectiveness of flow improvers cannot


be guaranteed with all fuels. Comply with
the manufacturer's recommendations.

The addition of flow improvers does not affect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.
Kerosene

4 The addition of 5% by volume of kerosene


5
6
7
8

improves the cold-resistance of diesel fuel


by approximately 1 C. The proportion of
kerosene additive must not exceed 50%.

If summer-grade diesel fuel or wintergrade fuel with less resistance to low temperatures is in use, add a quantity of flow
improver or kerosene, depending on outside temperatures.
Risk of fire and explosion

Adding kerosene lowers the flash point of


the diesel fuel. This increases the risk of
handling this fuel mixture.
Mix kerosene with diesel fuel only in the fuel
tank.

Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel)


It is also possible to run the vehicle on biodiesel fuel.
This results in
a slightly higher fuel consumption
a slightly reduced engine power output
increased white smoke formation after
a cold start
Please refer to the notes on Sheet No. 135
of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products.

Add the kerosene first, then the diesel fuel.

Add as little as possible, consistent


with outside temperatures.

Comply with the relevant safety regulations.

It is possible to mix standard diesel fuel


with FAME fuel (fatty acid methylester).

Run the engine for a while to ensure


that the additive reaches all parts of
the fuel system.

564

For safety reasons, only mix bio-diesel


fuel with diesel fuel in the vehicle's fuel
tank.

Technical data
Service products and capacities
!
The fuel filter and engine oil filter
must be replaced 600 miles (approximately 1,000 km) after switching to bio-diesel fuel.
The fuel filter and engine oil filter
must be replaced with every oil
change.
Bio-diesel fuel shortens the service
life of conventional fuel filters.
DaimlerChrysler therefore recommends fitting a special fuel prefilter.
Further information is available
from your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
When switching to bio-diesel fuel
the "Service Products" menu of the
driver information system is set to
FAME ( page 198).

The intervals for oil changes and replacing the engine oil filter are
shorter.
Only use bio-diesel fuel in accordance with DIN EN 14214. Special
additives are not permitted. Fuels
which do not comply with
DIN E 14214 or which have had
special additives added could cause
malfunctions or even engine damage.
Bio-diesel fuel corrodes painted
surfaces. For this reason, they must
not be allowed to come into contact
with paintwork. Rinse off immediately with water. Only use engine
oils complying with Sheet
No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods of time, bio-diesel fuel could
adhere to components of the fuel
system. If the engine is not used for
longer periods of time, use up the
bio-diesel fuel and run the vehicle
for a short time on conventional diesel fuel and leave it in the fuel system. The use of bio-diesel fuels is
not recommended for vehicles
which spend long periods out of use
(e.g. fire engines).
Observe the manufacturer's operating instructions on how to run the
auxiliary heating on bio-diesel fuel.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

565

Technical data
Service products and capacities

1
2
3
4
5
6

Environmental note

If your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuel, ask


your disposal plant whether you must collect the engine oil separately. Not every
manufacturer of two refined (lubricant manufactured from used engine oil ) can process
bio-diesel fuel to produce enriched engine
oil.
Special precautions must be taken and national specifications complied with when
disposing of engine oils. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

7
8
9

566

Mercedes-Benz will not accept any warranty claims for damage if

Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel) at low temperatures

such damage is in directly or indirectly


caused by the use of bio-diesel fuels
which do not comply with DIN E 14214

Bio-diesel fuels complying with


DIN E 14214 remain reliable down to an
outside temperature of approximately
20 C.

the specifications in accordance with


Sheet No. 135 of Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products for operation with bio-diesel fuels are not
observed
malfunctions or consequential damage
(e.g. paintwork damage) are caused by
the handling or by operation with biodiesel fuels.

The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This improves the flow properties of the diesel fuel.
Flow improvers
The addition of flow improvers does not affect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.

Technical data
Service products and capacities
Table showing fuel sulphur content

1
Sulphur content (% by weight)

0...0.1
Europe

0.1...0.3

0.3...0.8

0.8...

Austria

Italy

Azores

Armenia

Albania

Belgium

Lithuania

Bulgaria

Azerbaijan

Andorra

Czech Republic

Luxembourg

Iceland

Estonia

Bosnia-Herzegovina

Denmark

Netherlands

Madeira

Georgia

Croatia

Finland

Norway

Poland

Latvia

Montenegro

France

Portugal

Russia

Macedonia

Romania

Germany

Slovakia

Malta

Slovenia

Great Britain

Spain

Moldova

Yugoslavia

Greece

Sweden

Turkey

Hungary

Switzerland

Ukraine

2
3
4
5
6
7

Ireland

8
9

567

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Sulphur content (% by weight)


0...0.1

0.1...0.3

0.3...0.8
India

Australia

Australia

Asia

Hong Kong

Indonesia

Korea

Israel

Japan
Singapore

Taiwan
Thailand

5
North America

Mexico

USA
South America

Canada

Africa

8
9

568

Argentina
South Africa

0.8...

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Service products and capacities


Series

Engine with oil


filter

Capacity
approximately

Service product

Engine oil ( page 557)

Sheet no.1

501 LA

541.9..

maximum
34 litres

(228.0/1)

+ refrigerator block

541.9..

maximum
27 litres

(228.2/3)

502 LA

542.9..

maximum
38 litres

228.5

+ refrigerator block

542.9..

maximum
29 litres

3
4
5
6

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.

7
8
9

569

Technical data
Service products and capacities

1
2

Transmission2

G 231

Series

Capacity
approximately

Service product

Sheet
no.1

715.5..

15.5 litres

Transmission oil SAE 75W-90

235.11

15.5 litres

Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W,


80W/85W

235.1

1.0 litres

Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W/85W

235.5

Transmission oil SAE 75W-90

235.11

+ transmission oil cooler

G 210 G 260

+ transmission oil cooler

1.0 litres
715.5..

+ power take-off

5
6
7
8
9

NA 121 1b

+0.4 litres

NA 121 2b; 121 2c

+0.6 litres

NA 123 10b; 124 10b

+0.6 litres

NA 123 11b/c;
124 11b/c

+1.0 litres

NA 125 10b;
125 10b/R

+0.7 litres

NA 125 11b/2c;

+1.3 litres

NMV 150, NMV 200

+2.9 litres

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.


2 G 210G 260 with transmission oil cooler: only use transmission oil complying with Sheet No. 235.11.

570

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Transfer case

VG 1700

Series

Filling caService product


pacity approximately

Sheet no.1

750.86.

11.4 litres

Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90

235.0, 235.6

Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W

235.1, 235.5

80W/85W

235.11

+ oil cooler
Transfer case

VG 2400

Retarder (Voith)

2
3

+0.5 litres
750.850

13.2 litres

Transmission oil SAE 75W/85W

235.4

750.851

10.2 litres

Transmission oil SAE 75W-90

235.11

4
5

750.852
+ oil cooler

+0.5 litres
5.9 litres

Single-grade engine oil SAE 10W, SAE 20W-20,


SAE 30

227.0

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.

8
9

571

Technical data
Service products and capacities

1
2

Series

Front axle

Differential hub reduction AL7

730.108

Differential hub reduction AL7

730.109

3
4

Rear axle

Through-drive AD7
730.110
Planetary hubs
Differential hub reduction HL7, 748.210, 748.211
HD7
748.220, 748.230

6
Through-drive HD7

748.231, 748.240
748.214, 748.217
748.236, 748.239
748.211, 748.231
748.215, 748.217
748.237, 748.239

Planetary hubs
HL6

746.213

HL8

748.590

14.0 litres

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.

572

Sheet no.1

235.0
235.6
235.8
235.0
235.6
235.8

2.5 litres
3.5 litres
each
3.25 litres
15.0 litres

8
9

Filling capac- Service product


ity approximately
7.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90,
85W-90
7.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90,
85W-90
8.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90
each1.5 litres
8.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90,
85W-90
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90,
85W-90
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90
12.0 litres

Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90,


235.0
85W-90
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.8

Technical data
Service products and capacities

Series

Power steering

Filling caService product


pacity approximately

Sheet no.1

4.5 litres

236.3, 236.6

Steering gear oil or transmission fluid (ATF)

2
3

+ Telligent steering
system
Cab tilting unit

Tipper oil or hydraulic fluid or

236.2, 236.3

transmission fluid (ATF)

236.6, 341.0

Fifth-wheel coupling, trailer


coupling

Multipurpose grease

267.0

Axle load compensation


linkage

Multipurpose grease

267.0

Propeller shaft universal joint,


slide piece

Multipurpose grease

267.0

Front axle king pin

Multipurpose grease

267.0

4
5
6
7
8

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.

573

Technical data
Service products and capacities

1
2
3
4
5

Series

Clutch hydraulic section


Hydraulic component of the Range change transhydraulic-pneumatic gear- mission
shift:
+ NMV/WSK
Battery cable terminals
Fuel tank
Cooling system

6
7

541.9...

502 LA engine
+ Retarder (Voith)
+ Retarder (Telma)

542.9...

8
9

1 MB Specifications for Service Products.

574

Sheet no.1

331.0
331.0

1.37 litres

501 LA engine

Windscreen washer system,


headlamp cleaning system

Filling capac- Service product


ity approximately
Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus)
1.27 litres Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus)

Acid-resistant grease
300 Diesel fuels ( page 562)
950 litres
34.5 Coolant ( page 561)
36.5 litres
45.0 litres
+13.5 litres
+11.5 litres
16.0 litres Water with windscreen washer
concentrate S for summer or W
for winter. Observe the correct
mixing ratio.

350
130
310

371.0

Technical data
Operating data
Operating data

Operating data overview


Compressed-air system (reservoir pressure)
Service brake (constant pressure system)
Brake circuit 1

minimum 6.8 bar

Brake circuit 2

minimum 6.8 bar

Brake circuit on trailer/semitrailer

minimum 5.5 bar

Pressure regulator (activation/deactivation pressure)


Spring-loaded brake release circuit
External compressed-air source (charging the compressed-air system)

10.0 bar

approximately 10.2/12.3 bar

minimum 5.5 bar


maximum 10.0 bar

Gearshift at transmission

minimum 7.0 bar

Auxiliary consumers

minimum 5.5 bar

5
6
7
8
9

575

Technical data
Operating data

Engine
Engine speed limiter (transmission in neutral)

approximately 1,700/min

Engine speed limitation (emergency running mode)

1,300 rpm

Idling speed

3
4
5

approximately 500 rpm

Minimum engine operating speed (vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift)

approximately 550 rpm

Exhaust brake (operating range)

900 2,300 rpm

Engine oil pressure (idling speed)

minimum 0.5 bar

Engine oil pressure (rated speed)

minimum 2.5 bar

Rated speed

approximately 1,800 rpm

Operating temperature (coolant temperature)

Normal operation
Arduous operation (automatically reduced engine power output)

Maximum permissible coolant temperature

Tyre pressure
Maximum permissible air pressure for inflating tyres ( page 579)

576

approximately 80 95 C
from approximately 105 C
110 C

10.0 bar

Technical data
Operating data

Wheel nut tightening torques (Nm)


Light-alloy wheels

600 25 Nm

Pressed-steel wheel, hub centering by wheel hub

600 25 Nm

Pressed-steel wheel, centring by spherical spring washers and wheel bolts


Wheel nut cover caps

450 Nm
50 70 Nm

Spring actuator
Spring-loaded brake release screw release torque
Spring-loaded brake release screw tightening torque

4
maximum 70 Nm
minimum 25 Nm, maximum 45 Nm

Release pressure (reservoir pressure in compressed-air system)

minimum 8.0 bar

Release pressure (with outside source of compressed air)

minimum 6.5 bar

Release pressure with tyre air pressure (spare wheel)

minimum 8.5 bar

5
6
7
8
9

577

Technical data
Operating data

1
2
3

Fifth-wheel coupling (low maintenance)


Tightening torque (Nm) for the friction lining of the securing bolts (see manufacturer's operating instructions)
Pneumatic suspension
Filling the air-spring system via tyre inflator connection or front coupling head

minimum 9.0 bar

Filler valve, red protective cap

minimum 6.5 bar

4
Speed limiter

Limiting speed (there may be variations in certain countries)

Steering wheel play

Maximum permissible steering wheel play (measured at the rim of the steering
wheel with the engine running)

8
9

578

approximately 85 km/h

30 mm

Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Tyre pressure table
Single tyres
Risk of accident

If tyre pressures are too low, road safety and


tyre life will both be adversely affected; fuel
consumption and tyre wear will increase,
and there will be an increased risk of tyre
damage.

i
Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.2 bar for every 10 C change in
ambient temperature. Remember this
when checking tyre pressures inside a
building particularly in winter.

The tyre pressure on the front axles for


Michelin tyres must be set in accordance with the values in the table
+1 bar. Do not, however, exceed the
maximum permissible tyre pressure of
8.5 bar. Exceptions to this are Michelin
tyres which have a recommended tyre
pressure of 9 bar.

Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply
in particular with the permissible tyre
specifications for each country. These
specifications may specify a certain
type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit
the use of certain types of tyres which
may be permissible in other countries.

Comply also with the required tyre load


capacity and the speed index for your
vehicle.

2
3
4
5
6
7

Example:
Room temperature = approximately
20 C
Outside temperature = approximately
0 C
Required tyre pressure:
specified tyre pressure + 0.4 bar

8
9

579

Technical data
Tyre pressure table

1 Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)


2
3
4
5

Tyres
12.00 R 20
12.00 R 20
13.00 R 20
13.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
12 R 2 2.5
12 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
13 R 22.5

LI
154
157
163
164
160
164
149
150/152
154
156

6,000
6.5
6.5

7.25
7.0
6.5
6.25

6,300
7.0
6.75

7.75
7.5
6.75
6.5

1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)

6
7
8
9

580

6,500
7.25
7.0

8.0
7.75
7.0
6.75

6,700
7.51
7.251

8.251
8.01
7.251
7.01

6,900
7.75
7.5

8.251
7.5
7.5

7,100
8.0
7.75

8.51
7.75
7.75

7,500
8.5
8.0

5.5

8.5
8.25

8,000

8.75
6.5

6.0
6.0

8.75

8,500

7.00
6.25
6.5
6.5

9,000

7.75
6.75
7.0
6.75

9,500

8.25
7.00

7.25

10,000

7.5

7.5

Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)
Tyres
12 R 24
12 R 24
285/60 R 22.5
295/60 R 22.5
295/80 R 22.5
305/60 R 22.5
305/70 R 22.5
315/60 R 22.5
315/70 R 22.5
315/80 R 22.5
385/65 R 22.5
425/65 R 22.5

LI
156
160
148
150
152
150
150
152
154
156
160
165

6,000

8.25
7.5
7.0
7.75
7.5
7.5
7.0
6.25

6,300
6.25

8.75
8.0
7.5
8.25
8.0
7.75
7.5
6.75

6,500
6.5

8.25
7.75
8.5
8.25
8.25
7.75
7.0

1
6,700
6.75

8.5
8.01
8.75
8.5
8.5
8.0
7.51
6.5

6,900
7.0

8.251

8.75
8.25

6.75

7,100
7.25
6.75

8.51

9.0
8.5
7.75
7.0

7,500
7.75
7.0

9.0
8.25
7.25

8,000
8.25
7.5

8.75
8.0
6.5

8,500

8.25

8.5
6.75

9,000

8.75

9.0
7.25

9,500

10,000

2
3
4
5
6

1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)

7
8
9

581

Technical data
Tyre pressure table

Twin tyres

2
3
4
5

Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply
in particular with the permissible tyre
specifications for each country. These
specifications may specify a certain
type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit
the use of certain types of tyres which
may be permissible in other countries.
Comply also with the required tyre load
capacity and the speed index for your
vehicle.

6
7
8
9

582

Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)
Tyres
12.00 R 20
12.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
12 R 22.5
12 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
12 R 24
12 R 24
285/60 R 22.5
295/60 R 22.5
295/80 R 22.5
305/60 R 22.5
305/70 R 22.5
315/60 R 22.5
315/70 R 22.5
315/70 R 22.5
315/80 R 22.5

LI
150
153
157
160
146
148
149
150
153
156
145
147
148
147
148
148
148
150
150

9,500
6.0

6.0
6.0

7.0
6.0

6.0
6.0

10,000 10,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,500 13,000 13,500 14,000 14,500 15,000 16,000 17,000 18,000
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.5
7.75 8.0
8.5

6.5
6.75 7.25 7.5
7.75 8.0
8.5
8.75 9.0

5.5
5.75 6.0
6.25
6.75

6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
6.25 6.75 7.0
7.5
8.0
8.25

6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
8.5

6.25 6.5
6.75 7.25 7.75 8.0
8.25

6.0
6.5
6.75 7.0
7.5
8.0
8.25 8.5

6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
8.25

6.75

7.5
7.75 8.25 8.75

6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 8.0

6.5
6.75 7.25 7.5
8.0
8.5

6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 8.0

6.25 6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0

6.75 7.0
7.5
8.0
8.25 8.5

6.0
6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0

6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
8.25 8.75

6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

583

Technical data
Speed limiter
Speed limiter

1 The vehicle's maximum speed is limited to


2
3
4
5
6

85 km/h. Variations may be permitted by


legal requirements in all countries concerned. Once a road speed of 50 mph (approximately 85 km/h) has been reached,
the engine automatically regulates the
speed. Caution is needed when overtaking.
Risk of accident

If the driver exceeds the maximum speed of


the vehicle, there is a risk of rolling for articulated vehicles. You would also overload the
vehicle's brakes and tyres. There is a risk
that you could lose control of the vehicle,
particularly if you are driving down long
steep slopes with a loaded vehicle.

7
8
9

584

You are responsible for ensuring that the legal maximum permitted speed is not exceeded.
Downshift and engage the engine brake early on to make full use of the engine braking
effect on long downhill sections. Slow the
vehicle down by braking if necessary.

Technical data
Compressed-air reservoir
Compressed-air reservoir
Compressed-air reservoir
information
for first-time buyers and other users
Accompanying documentation in accordance with Council Directive 87/404/EEC
and EN 286-2
The reservoir is
a

only to be used for motor vehicle compressed-air systems and those of their
trailer vehicles, and only for the supply
of compressed air;
to be marked for identification with a
works number and the reservoir manufacturer's name together with the principal operating data and the EC mark
see type plate or engravings directly on
the reservoir wall,
to be manufactured with a "declaration
of conformity" in accordance with
Article 12 of Directive 87/404/EEC.

to be secured to the vehicle by retaining straps (clamps). On buses, direct


mounting at the threaded rings is permitted.

only to be cleaned using non-alkaline

In the case of aluminium reservoirs,


soft liquid-proof retaining strap inserts
are to be used to prevent contact between different materials. Securing
straps are to be set in such a way that
the base connecting seams are not
touched and that the reservoir is not
subjected to any strain that would impair operating safety.

to be emptied at regular intervals suffi-

Coatings applied to aluminium reservoirs must not contain lead, and the
top paint coating must only be applied
on top of a suitable primer coat. Steel
threaded unions for aluminium reservoirs must have a corrosion-proof coating,

detergents (aluminium reservoir)

to have the interior visible through the


threaded unions.
cient to prevent the accumulation of
condensation (drainage ring nut at lowest point of reservoir).
e

to require no maintenance if Item d is


complied with.

No welding, heat treatment or other


operation relevant to safety is to be
performed on the pressure bearing
walls of the reservoir (casing, base,
ring nuts).

Internal reservoir pressure may exceed


maximum operating pressure Ps by not
more than 10% for a brief period.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

DaimlerChrysler AG

585

Technical data
Compressed-air reservoir

Aluminium tank

Steel tank

2
3
4
5
6
7

Type plate, aluminium reservoir (example)

Type plate, steel reservoir (example)

1 SAG, Austria
SMA, Italy
2 MB part number
3 Volume (litres)
4 Testing establishment code number
5 Year

1 L&S, Germany
Elesfr, France
LMP, Portugal
Silverton Engineering, South Africa
2 MB part number
3 Volume (litres)
4 Year
5 Testing establishment code number

8
9

586

Technical data
Compressed-air reservoir
Aluminium tank
Volume (litres)

1
MB Part No.

Volume (litres)

MB Part No.

Volume (litres)

MB Part No.

004 432 1001

20

004 432 1401

35

003 432 9801

6.0

003 432 4601

20

004 432 4601

35

004 432 2701

7.5

004 432 1201

25

003 432 9601

35

004 432 4901

10

004 432 1301

25

003 432 9701

40

003 432 4001

15

003 432 3701

30

003 432 3401

40

004 432 0101

20

003 432 5201

30

003 432 3801

45

003 432 0101

20

003 432 5301

30

004 432 4401

60

004 432 4101

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

587

Technical data
Compressed-air reservoir

1 Steel tank
2
3
4

Volume (litres)

MB Part No.

Volume (litres)

MB Part No.

Volume (litres)

MB Part No.

004 432 0501

20

004 432 1901

30

004 432 4301

6.0

003 432 0601

20

004 432 3101

35

003 432 9501

7.5

004 432 0701

25

003 432 9301

35

004 432 2601

10

004 432 0801

25

003 432 9401

40

003 432 3901

15

003 432 3301

25

004 432 4201

40

004 432 0001

20

003 432 1401

30

003 432 2001

45

003 432 9901

20

003 432 1501

30

003 432 3201

60

004 432 4001

5
6
7
8
9

588

Technical data
Radio remote control
Radio remote control

Radio type approvals


Country

Radio remote control transmitter MB Part


no. 001 820 12 97

Control unit basic module


MB Part no. 000 446 00 18

Immobiliser MB Part
no. 020 545 39 32

Austria

GZ 100 243-ZB/97

Belgium

RTT/D/X 1443

Denmark

ALR 96129

Finland

G 750723 H

France

Germany

DL 0001 97

Great Britain

12462

Greece

EK 482

Hungary

2
3
4
5
6
7

1 Application for radio type approval submitted


2 Not required

8
9

589

Technical data
Radio remote control

1
2

Country

Radio remote control transmitter MB Part


no. 001 820 12 97

Control unit basic module


MB Part no. 000 446 00 18

Immobiliser MB Part
no. 020 545 39 32

Ireland

IRL TRA 24/5/60/23

Italy

DGPGF/SEGR/2/FO/
000197

Luxembourg

L-2431/10203-02H

Netherlands

NL 97021470

Norway

NO 96000845-R

Portugal

ICP-022TC-97

Spain

E D.G.Tel. 07 97 0641

Sweden

Switzerland

BAKOM 96.1106.G.P.

3
4
5
6
7

1 Application for radio type approval submitted


2 Not required

8
9

590

Technical terms

ABS
(anti-lock braking system)
ABS is an integral component of the
Telligent brake system (->BS). This
prevents the wheels from locking when
the vehicle is braking. The vehicle thus
remains steerable. It is operational
from walking pace, regardless of road
surface conditions.
ADR
(Accord europen relatif au transport
international des marchandises dangereuses par route)
ADR is the European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of
Dangerous Goods by Road. This corresponds to the German GGVS agreement.

AG
(automatic gear selection)
->Control unit abbreviation
System which automatically determines and selects the best possible
gear for the driving situation, accelerator pedal position, engine operating
conditions, etc. The automatic gear selection is a monitored electronics system and forms part of the Telligent
automatic gearshift system.
AHK
Trailer coupling
APU
(air processing unit)
Four-circuit safety valve with filter dryer and tyre inflator connection

ART
(distance-regulating cruise control)
->Control unit abbreviation
Driving system which enables you to
maintain a specified distance from the
vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, the


system works like conventional
->cruise control.

If a slower vehicle is detected


ahead, the distance-regulating
cruise control reduces your speed
enough to allow you to maintain the
set specified distance from the vehicle.

4
5
6
7
8
9

591

Technical terms

1 ASR
2
3

(acceleration skid control)


Function of the Telligent braking system.
Acceleration skid control prevents the
drive wheels from spinning when the
vehicle pulls away or accelerates, regardless of the road conditions.

4 Belt drive
5

Drive connection from the engine to


the engine accessories, such as the alternator, coolant pump or cold compressor.

6
7
8
9

592

BS
(Telligent brake system)
->Control unit abbreviation
Electronic braking system which comprises the regulating functions for
->ABS, ->ASR, ->SR, continuous brake
(engine brake/->retarder) and Brake
Assist. Takes into consideration the
current vehicle weight and any trailer/
semitrailer when distributing brake
power. This always ensures that the
vehicle/trailer combination is braked
with optimum effect.

BTS
(battery cut-off switch)
->Control unit abbreviation
BW
(binary value)
Stored binary values in the diagnostics
menu serve only as information for
service personnel. These values will
help the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to diagnose and rectify malfunctions more rapidly.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
DaimlerChrysler customer service centre offering advice on all matters concerning the vehicle, and support in the
event of a breakdown.

Technical terms

CAN
(Controller Area Network)
Means that the control units are networked and exchange data with each
other. Controls vehicle functions, such
as the central locking system or windscreen wipers, depending on the vehicle or environmental conditions and
delivers information to the ->FIS. This
system connects the vehicle's electronic systems.
CODE
Checks whether a person entering or
driving the vehicle is authorised to do
so, and forms part of the anti-theft system.

Control unit
Electronic component that controls the
functions of the engine or transmission, for example.

Drive train
Collective term for all vehicle components which belong to the drive, such
as:

Control unit abbreviation


The control unit abbreviation sorts an
event message and information in the
Diagnostics menu of the corresponding
electronic system.

Engine

Cruise control
Driving system which makes it possible
to store any speed above 10 mph
(15 km/h).

Transfer case

Clutch

1
2
3

Transmission
Propeller shafts

Axle drive shafts

Driving mode selector switch


Switch with which the driver of a vehicle with Telligent automatic gearshift
can select automatic or manual operating mode.

6
7
8
9

593

Technical terms

1 EAB
2
3
4
5
6

(electronic trailer brake)


Supplements the Telligent braking
system

EDW
(anti-theft alarm system)
->Control unit abbreviation
The towing vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer are protected against break in
and theft by motion and sound sensors.
EHZ
(additional electronic rear axle control)
->Control unit abbreviation
Telligent steering system

Engine number
Number specified by the manufacturer
and marked on the cylinder head, by
which each engine can be clearly identified.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement of the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The viscosity is better the higher
the temperature the oil can withstand
without becoming too thin, or the lower
the temperature the oil can withstand
without becoming too thick.

EPS
(electronic pneumatic gearshift)
Transmission shifting which electronically transfers the shift pulses to the
transmission. The gears are shifted by
pneumatic units on the transmission.
->EPS III S, ->EPS III optional
EPS III S
(electronic pneumatic gearshift)
Telligent gearshift, third generation
EPS III SA
(electronic pneumatic gearshift)
Telligent automatic gearshift, second
generation with automated clutch.
FAME fuels
(fatty acid methyl ester)
FAME fuels are bio-diesel fuels which
are based on fatty acid methyl ester.

7
8
9

594

Technical terms

FFB
(radio remote control)
The radio remote control can be used
to:
lock and unlock the driver's door
first and then the co-driver's door
centrally lock and unlock the driver's and co-driver's doors
activate and deactivate the antitheft alarm system
FIS
(driver information system)
The driver information system can be
used to call up important information
relating to the vehicle and to modify
the vehicle's settings. The ->multi-function display serves as the display window for the driver information system.
You can use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate in
the ->driver information system menus.

FLA
(flame-start system)
->Control unit abbreviation
The flame-start system is a cold-start
aid for use at very low outside temperatures (below 20 C). The flame-start
system is automatically activated below about 4 C.
FM
(front module)
->Control unit abbreviation
Electronic control module, which is
linked via the ->CAN to the base module ->GM and the rear end module
->HM.

FR
(drive control)
->Control unit abbreviation
Electronic control module; incorporating the functions of ->AG and the
clutch.
GGVS
(German regulations for the transport
of dangerous goods by road)
Two EMERGENCY OFF switches (battery cut-off switches) should be fitted
in vehicles used for transporting dangerous goods. When the EMERGENCY
OFF switch is operated, the engine
stops running and all major electrical
consumers are disconnected from the
vehicle's electrical circuit.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

595

Technical terms

1 GM

(base module)
->Control unit abbreviation
Central electronic module, which is
connected via the ->CAN to the front
module ->FM and the rear end module
->HM.

2
3
GS

4
5

(gear control unit)


->Control unit abbreviation
The gear control unit is a monitored
electronic system and is part of the
Telligent gearshift or Telligent automatic gearshift system.

6
7
8
9

596

GSM
(Global System for Mobile Communications)
The GSM standard establishes the
guidelines for constructing a cellular
digital mobile system. Thanks to this
uniform standard, it is possible to use a
mobile phone abroad. Within GSM
there are approximately 300 network
operators in 120 countries. The transmission method is digital.
HM
(rear end module)
->Control unit abbreviation
Electronic control module; which is
connected via the ->Controller Area
Network to the base module ->GM and
the front module ->FM.

HPS
(hydraulic pneumatic gearshift)
Transmission shifting which transfers
the shift movements to the transmission hydraulically. Pneumatic units on
the transmission shift the ->splitter unit
and the range group.
HZR
(heating control and air conditioning)
->Control unit abbreviation
Electronic control module for the automatic air conditioning.
INS
(instrument panel)
->Control unit abbreviation
The instrument panel is an independent control unit. It controls the indicator lamps, needle instruments and the
multi-function display.

Technical terms

KB
Clutch operation
KOM
(communications gateway)
Communications interface
KS
(clutch control)
->Control unit abbreviation
Clutch control is a monitored electronic system which forms part of the
Telligent automatic gearshift system.

KSA
(enhanced central locking system)
The enhanced central locking system
includes ->central locking for the driver's and co-driver's door, the electric
power windows and electric sliding/
tilting sunroof. When the vehicle is
locked, the side windows and sliding/
tilting sunroof close automatically if
they are still open. If the sliding/tilting
sunroof closing lock switch is activated, the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain open.
LIM
(limiter)
Driving system which makes it possible
to limit the road speed from 10 mph
(15 km/h) upwards.

LM rim
(light metal rim)

Loading platform approach aid


When reverse gear is engaged, the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle appears in the ->multi-function
display.
M+S tyres (winter tyres)
(slush and snow)
Tyres which bear the marking M+S are
intended for wintry road conditions.
The rubber mix of these tyres contains
special additives which prevent the
tyres from becoming "hard" even at low
temperatures. For safety reasons,
M+S tyres should be fitted as soon as
temperatures fall below +4 C.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

597

Technical terms

1 MBS

(Mercedes-Benz item number)


Diagnostics menu display

2 Menu
3

The displays in the multi-function display of the ->driver information


system (FIS) are arranged in menus.
Several commands are in the menus.

4 MFD
5
6

(multi-function display)
Display in the instrument panel which
has ->menus to show information and
settings for the ->driver information
system.

7
8
9

598

MR
(engine control)
->Control unit abbreviation
Engine control is a monitored electronic system which forms part of the
Telligent engine system. It controls
the engine, e.g. the engine idling
speed.
MSF
(modular shift panel)
->Control unit abbreviation
MSS
Engine start/stop function

Multi-function display
Display in the instrument panel which
has ->menus to show information and
settings for the ->driver information
system.
Multi-function steering wheel
Steering wheel with control buttons
which control the ->driver information
system.
MW
(measured value)
Stored measured values in the diagnostics and results menus serve only as information for service personnel. These
values will help the Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre to diagnose and rectify
malfunctions more rapidly.

Technical terms

Network operator logo


Identifying symbol for the mobile network operator

PFA
(particle filter system)
->Control unit abbreviation

RS

NMV
(power take-off, engine connected)

PSM
(programmable special module)
->Control unit abbreviation
Interface for the connection of
special-purpose bodies to the vehicle
electrics/electronics system.

Rumble strip noise


The lane assist warning sound reproduced over the vehicle audio system
which informs you that you are driving
across road lane markings on construction sites.

RAD
(radio) ->Control unit abbreviation

SAE code
Fault code specified by the Society of
Automotive Engineers.

NOX
Treatment of gas emissions (DeNOx)
->Control unit abbreviation
NR
(level control)
The chassis frame can be lowered,
raised or moved to the normal position
(driving position) using the Telligent
level control panel.
Overrevving range
Speeds in the red area of the rev counter at which the engine can only operate for a short period.

Retarder
The anti-wear brake which acts on the
propeller shaft. Supplements the continuous brake.

(retarder control)
->Control unit abbreviation

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

599

Technical terms

1 SMS
2
3
4
5
6
7

(short message service)


Mobile network service enabling small
amounts of data to be sent and received. This can be data, text or even illustrations with up to a maximum of
160 characters.

SPA
(lane assist) ->Control unit abbreviation
Lane assist is a convenience system
which continuously monitors the position of the vehicle in relation to the
roadside markings through a camera
behind the windscreen.
If the lateral lane markings are driven
on or crossed, an audible warning in
the form of a "rumble strip" noise will
sound over the left-hand or right-hand
cab loudspeaker.

8
9

600

Speed index
Part of the tyre designation; indicates
the speed range for which a tyre is permissible.
SR
(stability control)
In critical driving conditions, such as
sudden swerving or cornering too fast,
Telligent stability control reduces the
risk of skidding, jack-knifing or toppling, regardless of the vehicle load or
road surface conditions.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
->Control unit abbreviation
Airbag and seat belt control

Stand-by position
Function of the Telligent level control
->NR. With sufficient reservoir pressure
in the compressed-air system,
Telligent level control maintains the
chassis frame at the stored height for
approximately five seconds.
TCO
(tachograph)
->Control unit abbreviation
TEL
Hands-free device (telephone)
->Control unit abbreviation
Telligent
Telligent systems are networked electronic systems, which have been developed specially for Actros. These
systems control the engine, transmission and brakes, for example.

Technical terms

Tightening torque (Nm)


Force with which bolt connections,
e.g. wheel bolts, are tightened.
Nm = Newton meters
TMB
(co-driver's door module)
->Control unit abbreviation
TMF
(driver's door module)
->Control unit abbreviation
TP
(telematics platform)
->Control unit abbreviation
Traction
Force which is transferred from the vehicle to the road via the tyres, and
which describes the grip.

Vehicle identification no.


Number specified by the manufacturer
and affixed to the longitudinal member
chassis, by which each vehicle can be
clearly identified. ->VIN
VIN
(vehicle identification number)
Number specified by the manufacturer
and affixed to the longitudinal member,
by which each vehicle can be clearly
identified.
WR
(roll control)
Telligent roll control electronically
regulates the damping effect of the
suspension, automatically adapting it
to the vehicle load, driving situation
and road surface characteristics.
Telligent roll control is a monitored
electronics system which forms part of
Telligent level control.

WS
(maintenance system)
->Control unit abbreviation
Depending on the vehicle's operating
conditions, the Telligent maintenance
system calculates service due dates
for:
oil change (service work) in mechanical assemblies (service
points)
general service work on other service points
WSK
(converter and clutch unit)
->Control unit abbreviation

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

601

Technical terms

1 Xenon headlamps

ZL

ZV

3
4

An electric arc in the front Xenon headlamps generates light. A xenon lamp
delivers twice as much light as a modern bulb with a heating filament.

ZDS
(central data accumulator)
->Control unit abbreviation
Independent component of the GM.
Serves as a back-up memory for programmable vehicle electronics data.

5 ZHE
6

(auxiliary heating)
->Control unit abbreviation

7
8
9

602

(auxiliary steering)
->Control unit abbreviation
(central locking)
When the vehicle is locked, the driver's
and co-driver's doors lock at the same
time.

Index

A
ABS 76
ABS activation 87
ABS deactivated 85
ABS, event messages 79
ABS or Telligent brake system event
messages 79
Actros Info (menu) 160
Actros Info menu 160
Adjustable reading lamp 143
Adjusting (seat) 41, 118
Adjusting oil quality 202, 559
Adjusting the driver's suspension
seat 41
Adjusting the exterior mirrors 45
Adjusting the steering wheel 44
ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch 126
After the engine has been started 50
Air conditioning 75
Air conditioning switch 325
Airbag 70, 72

Air-recirculation mode 321


Alarm 178
Alarm menu 178
Ambient lighting 142
Anti-lock braking system 76
Anti-theft alarm system 105, 111
Applying parking brake 62
Arrangement of fuses, diodes,
relays 526
ART 280
Ashtray 344
ASR 87
Attaching the towbar 544
Audio and mobile communication
equipment 73
Audio equipment 169, 359
Operating audio equipment 359
Operating cassette player 364
Operating CD player 363
Regulating volume 360
Selecting radio station 361

Audio menu 169


Automatic air conditioning 315
Automatic bulb check 379
Auxiliary air conditioning 323
Auxiliary heating 177, 327
Auxiliary heating menu 177
Axle load indicator 163

1
2
3

B
Batteries 423
Battery care 427
Charging 428
Checking the fluid level 426
Disconnecting 424, 425
Before starting the engine 40
Belt tensioner 72
Belt tensioners 70
Berth 32, 121
Berth access step 122
Berth switch unit 32
Bio-diesel fuels (FAME fuels) 564, 566
Bleeding the fuel system 468
Brake assist system 77
Brake system 483

603

4
5
6
7
8
9

Index

1 Brakes 371
2

Brake system 77
Braking with anti-lock protection
Breakdown assistance 540
Breakdown equipment 39
BS 77

84

3 C
4
5
6
7

Cab locking 453


Cab stowage compartments
(exterior) 348
Cab stowage compartments
(interior) 345
Cab tilt lock 51
Cab tilting system checking oil level/
topping up 460
Cables, compressed-air and hydraulic
lines 375
Care 397

8
9

604

Cassette player 364


CD player 363
Central locking 103, 105
Central locking system 34, 102
Changing a wheel 494
Changing gear
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 216
Hydro-pneumatic shifting 55
Telligent automatic gearshift
Automatic mode 240
Telligent automatic gearshift
Manual mode 245
Telligent gearshift 57
Charging the refrigerant
accumulator 324
Checking anti-corrosion protector 415
Checking compressed-air brake system for
leaks 412
Checking compressed-air lines 412
Chocks 39

Cigarette lighter 344


Climate control 307
Clock 148
Clock menu 197
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
manually 535
Closing tilting sunroof manually 536
Cockpit 14
Cockpit switch units 22
Combination switch 134
Communication equipment 73, 74
Compressed-air lines 375
Compressed-air reservoir 585
Compressed-air system 50
Charging compressed-air system via
front coupling head 486
Charging compressed-air system via
tyre inflator connection 487
Constant engine speed 260

Index

Construction-site filter 326


Construction-site mode 229
Continuous brake 261
Control unit abbreviations 208
Converter and clutch unit 166
Converter and clutch unit
temperature 166
Cool box 347
Coolant 561
Coolant level 421
Coolant temperature 162
Coupling up 373
Cruise control 275
Cruise control sound 184
Cruise control sound menu 184

D
Deleting SMS 170
Demisting 322
Demisting windows 322
Diagnostics 207
Diagnostics menu 207
Diesel fuels 562
Differential lock 185
Differential lock permanent display 185
Differential locks 253
Dipped-beam headlamps 59, 132, 507
Direct gearshift
Telligent gearshift 222
Distance control
Telligent distance control distance
warning 288
Distance control (ART) 280
Door release mechanism 104
Driver information system 150
Driver's vehicle checks 38
Driving position (chassis) 294
Driving safety systems 76
Driving tips 368
Driving with ASR 88

E
Econometer 145
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system 457
Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up 467
Electronic-pneumatic
gearshift 218, 231, 437
Emergency equipment/
first-aid kit 39, 430
Emergency gearshift (NMV) 481
Emergency-off switch 127
Engine brake 263
Engine emergency running mode 462
Engine oil consumption 370
Engine oil grade 202
Engine oil grade display 202
Engine oil level 163, 418
Checking the engine oil level 418
Engine oil viscosity 200
Engine oil viscosity menu 200
Engine oils 557

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

605

Index

1 Engine oils for use with bio-diesel


2
3
4
5
6
7

fuel 560
Engine start/shutdown with cab
tilted 461
Engine tunnel shelf 347
Engine type plate 555
Engine-dependent power take-off
(NMW) 258
Engine-resident power take-off 259
Enhanced central locking system 106
Entry access step lamp 504, 512
EPS III S 214, 218
EPS III S/EPS III SA 437
EPS III SA 214, 231
Event info menu 175
Event menu (driver information
system) 175
Events menu 210
Exterior door release mechanism 104
Exterior mirrors 302

8
9

606

F
FAME fuels (bio-diesel fuels) 564, 566
Fifth-wheel coupling (low
maintenance) 578
Fire extinguisher 39, 430
First-aid 39, 430
First-aid kit 39, 430
Flame-start system 49, 129
Flashing light 504
Flow improvers 564, 566
Fluids and lubricants
Adjusting quality/viscosity 198
Fluids and lubricants menu 198
Foglamp 504, 509
Fresh air filter 326
Front foglamps 133, 504, 505, 507

Fuel additives 563


Fuel consumption 369
Fuel gauge 148
Fuel grade 562
Fuel level 40
Fuel level and range 168
Fuel prefilter 469
Fuel sulphur content 199, 567
Function check of brake systems 77
Fuses 522
Checking/replacing 523
Miniature circuit breaker 524
Fuses, Diodes, Relays 522, 526

Index

G
Gear indicator 219, 231
Gear lever 220, 232
Gearshift 214
Telligent gearshift 225
Gearshift unit 26
Telligent automatic gearshift
Telligent gearshift 220
Grab handles 36
GS back-up function menu 473

232

H
Hands-free system 74, 350
Hazard warning lamps 137
Head restraint 120
Headlamp
Headlamp setting 515
Headlamp flasher 134
Headlamp range control 133
Headlamps 507
Checking headlamp setting,
adjusting 516
Headlamp cleaning
system 24, 136, 419
Headlamps partially covered driving
on left/right 517
Heating and heater-air conditioning
control panel 309
Hendrickson leading axle 297
High-pressure cleaner 397

High-pressure compressor 410


Hillholder 130
HPS 214, 215, 434
Hydraulic lines 375
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift 54, 214, 215, 434, 470

1
2
3

I
Idling speed 265
Ignition lock 37
Ignition lock positions 37
Immobiliser 125
Indicating 40, 60
Indicator lamps 20
Inflating tyres with tyre inflator
connection 503
Insect screen 342
Instrument lighting 143
Instrument panel 18

4
5
6
7
8
9

607

Index

1 Instrument panel switch units, centre


2
3

section 28
Interior ceiling lamp 504, 513
Interior lighting 138, 504, 505
Switching off 140
Switching on 139
Intermittent wipe 304
Item number of control unit 209

4 J

Jack 39, 430


Jump-starting 537

5 K
6

Kerosene 564
Key 103

7
8
9

608

L
Lamps 504, 505
Lane assist 96
Language menu 182
Leading axle 297
Level control 186, 290
Permanent display 186
Level control permanent display 186
Light switch unit 135
Light switches 59, 132
Lighting 40, 132, 504
Limiter 269
Liquid load volume monitoring 194
Load compartment light 135
Load info 165
Load monitoring 378
Load pressure monitoring 192
Load temperature monitoring 189
Loading platform approach aid 379
Locking the driver's and co-driver's
doors 34, 65
Locking the driver's door 34, 65
Locking using key 65
Locking using radio remote control 65

M
Main-beam
headlamps 60, 132, 134, 507
Maintenance 171
Maintenance menu 171
Maintenance system 408
Manual mode
Telligent automatic gearshift 243
MB item number 209
Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting
system 454
Menu navigation 155
Mirror heating 29, 303
Miscibility of engine oils 559
Monitoring info 161
Monitoring info menu 161
Multi-function display 156
Multi-function steering wheel 25

Index

N
Navigation system 73
New SMS 169
New SMS menu 169
Nightlight 141
Nummek trailing axle 489
O
Occupant safety 68
Oil change intervals 558
Oil level in engine
Checking engine oil level 163
Opening and closing doors 102
Opening and closing roof hatch 343
Opening and closing the side
windows 30, 338
Opening and closing the tilting roof 342
Opening the door from the inside 65

Opening the door from the outside 36


Opening the maintenance flap 417
Opening using the radio remote
control 35
Opening with the key 34
Operating temperature 576
Outside stowage compartment
lighting 504, 514
Outside temperature display 147
Overview of lamps 505

P
Parking 371
Parking brake 130
Applying 62
Release 52
Parking vehicle
Telligent automatic gearshift 250
Particulate filter 326
Perimeter lamp 509, 511
Pneumatic suspension 290, 578
Charging pneumatic suspension via
external compressed-air
source 488
Poly-V-belt 462
Power take-off 255, 257, 258, 259
Preselected direct shift 223

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

609

Index

1 Preselected gearshift with Telligent

2
3
4
5
6
7

driver's choice 227


Pressure 579
Programmable special module
(PSM) 256
Pull away
Telligent gearshift 222
Pulling away 52
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 54, 216
Telligent automatic gearshift
Automatic mode 239
Telligent automatic gearshift
back-up function 476
Telligent automatic gearshift
Manual mode 244
Telligent automatic shifting 57
Telligent gearshift 55
Telligent gearshift back-up
function 475
Pump lever 39, 430, 433

8
9

610

R
Radio 73, 359, 361
Radio and mobile communication
equipment 74
Radio mode arrow key menu 187
Radio remote control 35, 109, 534, 589
Radio type approvals 589
Raised driving position 295
Rapid change in direction 238
Reading lamp 140, 504, 505, 514
Rear foglamp 134, 504, 505
Rear lamps 505, 510
Rear-view mirror 302
Reflective safety jacket 39, 431
Refuelling 372, 562
Reminder 160
Removing a wheel 500
Replacement fuses/fuse extractor 523
Replacing a lamp 505

Reservoir pressure 162


Reservoir pressure for brake
circuits 1 and 2 149
Reservoir pressure in the compressed-air
system 50, 575
Restraint systems 68
Retarder 264
Rev counter 144
Reversing warning 99
Rocking out bogged-in vehicle 230, 238
Roll control 95
Rotating beacon lamp 136, 504, 505
Running the vehicle in 370

Index

S
Safety regulations for air conditioning 75
Seat belt 46, 69
Checking the seat belts 414
Seats 41, 118
Selecting events 210
Selecting neutral 221
Telligent automatic gearshift 236
Telligent gearshift 221
Selecting reverse gear
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 218
Telligent automatic gearshift 237
Telligent gearshift 229
Semitrailer coupling 40, 373

Service due date 173, 174


Service note 172
Service products 556
Capacities 569
Setting clock mode 206
Setting language for driver information
system (FIS) 182
Setting time 197
Settings menu 183
Side lamp/parking lamp 504, 508
Side marker lamps 504, 505, 511
Side wind deflector 384
Single tyres 579
Sliding/tilting sunroof
Opening and closing 340
Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock 108
Sliding/tilting sunroof lock switch 341
SMS text message 169
Snow chains 394, 395

Spare wheel location 491


Special tools 432
Speed limiter 578, 584
Split-shifter 217
Spring actuator 577
Spring-loaded brake
Releasing spring-loaded brake with
an external source of compressedair 485
Releasing spring-loaded parking brake
if there is a failure of charge
pressure 483
Stability control 90, 543
Standby switch 293
Starting and stopping the engine with cab
tilted 461
Starting the engine 49
Starting-off aid 296

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

611

Index

1 Steering
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Steering wheel play 51, 578


Steering system/Telligent steering
system 490
STOP lamp 451
Stopping
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 218
Hydro-pneumatic shifting 63
Telligent automatic gearshift
Automatic mode 242
Telligent automatic gearshift
Manual mode 249
Telligent automatic shifting 63
Telligent gearshift 228
Telligent shifting 63
Stopping the engine 64
Stopping the engine Telligent
automatic gearshift 64
Switching audio equipment on/off 359
Switching off Lane assist 98
Switching on Lane assist 98
Switching on lights 59, 132
Swivelling reading lamp 504, 505

612

T
Tachograph 45, 251
Tail lamps 504
Teach-in procedure 478
Telephone 73, 74, 169, 350
Telephone book 354
Telephone menu 169
Telligent automatic gearshift 231
Gearshift unit 232
Operating mode selector switch 233
Selecting operating mode 233
Telligent automatic gearshift automatic
mode 239
Telligent automatic gearshift modes of
operation 232
Telligent automatic gearshift unit 27
Telligent brake system 77
Telligent distance control (ART) 280
Telligent driver's choice
Telligent gearshift 226

Telligent gearshift 55, 218


Gearshift unit 220
Selecting neutral 221
Telligent gearshift unit 26
Telligent level control 290
Telligent maintenance system 408
Telligent roll control 95
Telligent stability control (SR) 90, 543
Event message 93
Switching off 91, 543
Switching on 91
Telligent stability control event
message 93
Temperature regulator 316, 319
The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) 370
Tilting the cab 453
Timed heating 332
Tipper body support 385
Tipper operation 385
Topping up the engine oil 418
Topping up the windscreen washer/
headlamp cleaning system 419

Index

Total distance recorder 144


Towing 540, 542
Towing and tow-starting 540
Towing coupling, retrofitting 539
Traction control (ASR) 87
Trailer ID 165
Trailer/semitrailer coupling 40, 373
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring 378
Trailing axle 298, 489
Transfer case 252
Transmission control back-up
mode 189, 207, 473
Transmission control back-up mode
menu 189, 207
Transmission oil grade 203
Transmission oil grade menu 203
Transmission oil quality 570

Transmission oil viscosity 570


Transmission-dependent
power take-off 257
Trip computer 166
Trip computer menu 166
Trip data 166
Turn signal and brake
lamps 40, 60, 504, 505
Twin tyres 582
Two-way radio, fax machines,
telephone 74
Two-way radio, fax, telephone 73
Type plates 552
Tyre inflator connection 502
Tyre pressure 576
Tyre pressure table 579
Tyres 75
Tyres and wheels 390

U
Underride guard 100
Units menu 205
Units menu, temperature unit 205
Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's
doors 34, 35
Unlocking the driver's door 34, 35
Unlocking using key 103
Unlocking using radio remote
control 103
V
Vehicle check using the driver information
system (FIS) 40
Vehicle document wallet 432
Vehicle jack 497
Vehicle key 103
Vehicle lighting, turn signal and brake
lamps 40, 504
Vehicle tool kit and emergency
equipment 430, 432
Vehicle tool kit pocket 431
Vehicle type plate 552
Voltage transformer 358

613

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Index

1 W
2
3
4
5
6
7

Warning lamp 39, 431


Warning triangle 39, 431
Wearing seat belts 46
Wheel fitting 501
Wheel nuts 370, 496
Tightening the wheel nuts 577
Tightening wheel nuts 392
Wheel nut tightening torques
(Nm) 577
Wheel wrench 39
Wheelbrace 430
Wheels and tyres 491
Wind deflector 381
Windscreen cleaning platform 305
Windscreen wipers 61, 304
Winter driving 394
Winter operation 394
Wiping action 304
Work-area lamp 135

8
9

614

Contact

Editorial office

Mercedes-Benz will be happy to


answer any queries you may
have:

You are welcome to forward any queries


or suggestions you may have regarding
the Operating Instructions to the technical
documentation team at the following
address:

Mercedes-Benz contact
Telephone: 00 800 1 777 7777
International: +49 69 95 30 72 77
Internet
Further information about
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
DaimlerChrysler can be found
on the following websites:
www.mercedes-benz.com
www.daimlerchrysler.com

DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R803,


70546 Stuttgart, Germany
As at: 30.07.2002
Title illustration number N00.01-2201-31
Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or
in part, without written permission.
Print
W. Kohlhammer GmbH